Home

Boss Audio Systems BR-900CD User's Manual

1. No Patch Name Algorithm No Patch Name Algorithm 01 JC Clean COSM GTR AMP 51 Hard Drv COSM GTR AMP 02 HiGainLd COSM GTR AMP 52 HyperMtl COSM GTR AMP 03 Over Drv COSM GTR AMP 53 Metal Ld COSM GTR AMP 04 Phased COSM GTR AMP 54 ResoLead COSM GTR AMP 05 Crunch COSM GTR AMP 55 ARPEGGIO COSM GTR AMP 06 MS Strgt COSM GTR AMP 56 SmallAmp COSM GTR AMP 07 St WACK COSM GTR AMP 57 CleanLd COSM COMP GTR 08 Ambient COSM GTR AMP 58 BluesyLd COSM GTR AMP 09 Voxy COSM GTR AMP 59 Delayed COSM GTR AMP 10 St Metal COSM GTR AMP 60 Wah Lead COSM GTR AMP 11 TREM TWN COSM GTR AMP 61 FatClean COSM COMP GTR 12 StdAmpF COSM GTR AMP 62 ClnTubes COSM GTR AMP 13 StdAmpM COSM COMP GTR 63 Std MkII COSM GTR AMP 14 St Flang COSM GTR AMP 64 Crunchy COSM GTR AMP 15 TEXAS COSM GTR AMP 65 Aussie COSM GTR AMP 16 HiGainMS COSM GTR AMP 66 DarfBlus COSM GTR AMP 17 StThrash COSM GTR AMP 67 HeadinWM COSM GTR AMP 18 SWEET LD COSM GTR AMP 68 BG Lead COSM GTR AMP 19 BIG COMP COSM GTR AMP 69 FixedWah COSM GTR AMP 20 PowChord COSM GTR AMP 70 BIG 3RDS COSM GTR AMP 21 Uni Wah COSM GTR AMP 71 ACOUSTY ACOUSTIC SIM 22 Gt Pad COSM GTR AMP 72 BrightAc ACOUSTIC SIM 23 D CompLd COSM COMP GTR 73 ACO w PZ ACOUSTIC SIM 24 DrivenLd COSM GTR AMP 74 AC4Slide ACOUSTIC SIM 25 RockLead COSM GTR AMP 75 Dream Ac ACOUSTIC SIM 26 RAGE COSM GTR AMP 7
2. UTIL 0 6 24 IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL 0 6 24 IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to ERS and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM L R Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select ALL and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Use CURSOR lt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V Track to erase When you are ready to execute the erasure press ENTER The display will ask Are you sure so that you can confirm the operation Press ENTER The erasure is executed Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 75 Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing Exchanging Data Track Exchange Perform the procedure given below to exchange the data between two tracks Example exchanging all the data on track 1 with all the data on track 2 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR TL gt to move the cursor to TRK
3. 3 Press CURSOR 11 gt to select the parameter to be displayed Name of the currently selected song Song s data type and memory used Size MB 4 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line Data Type of the display while the lower line shows what is being HiFi MT2 High quality recording type processed STD LV1 Standard recording type e LONG LV2 Long recording type When REC is pressed in the Play screen putting the BR 900CD into record standby REC flashes the remaining recording time is displayed in the TIME area TIME INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Remaining memory The song sizes are displayed in units of 1M 1 000 000 bytes The size displayed is an approximation 4 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen Section 2 Editing Registering Time Locator Using the locator function you can register any desired time in a song as a locator point so that you can jump to that point later with just the press of a button This function is quite useful during editing Registering a Loc
4. Press CURSOR lt 1 gt and turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the characters Press ENTER to switch between uppercase and lowercase Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 132 Creating Original Patterns e e Copying Patterns Erasing Patterns 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is flashing indicator is flashing 2 Press EDIT 2 Press EDIT 3 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to COPY and 3 Press CURSOR gt repeatedly to move the cursor to press ENTER ERASE and press ENTER The Pattern Copy screen appears RHYTHM RHYTHM 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the pattern to be 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the copy deleted destination arrangement S001 S100 Song Pattern 1 100 S001 S100 Song Pattern 1 100
5. press EXIT repeatedly to return to the PLAY screen REC MODE g Doubling 6 ic y When you want to spread out the guitar backing sound ui N 12345678M LR to the left and right record the same guitar backing y separately to two tracks then pan the sounds to the left 3 and right This is known as doubling By using the DBLN loop effect you can produce a o doubling effect even from a single track mono E e recording allowing you to make more efficient use of 24 ici a the tracks Ifyou want to emphasize the doubling effect pan the track 3 Press CURSOR gt until FX Type or Type is completely to the right or to the left and increase the displayed then turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the doubling effect level In addition use the following loop effect procedure to raise the send level When using CHO DLY Select from CHORUS DELAY or DBLN doubling LOOP FX REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS A O O O SN 12345678 108 Using the Loop Effects Track EQ Adjusting How the Loop Effect is Applied The following explains how you can alter the volume of the signals sent by each track to the loop effects the send level and control the degree to which the loop effects are applied 1 Press LOOP
6. 5 Use CURSOR lt gt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V Track to be loaded then press ENTER When loading to the tracks in mono UTIL When loading to the tracks in stereo Select the track combination 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 UTIL 6 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the measure or position in the track from which loading is to start then press ENTERI UTIL The BOSS_BR 900 icon is added to the computer Ex 178 7 Copy the WAV or AIFF files you want to import im porti ng SMEs and C reating 1 Double click the BOSS_BR 900 icon Patterns 2 Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the USB folder in the ROLAND folder You can import SMFs Standard MIDI Files stored on Only one file can be imported at a time in each import memory cards as song patterns You can easily increase your collection of song patterns by creating SMFs on your computer or other device and copying them to memory cards ote operation Do not drag and drop more than one file at a time UTIL
7. BR 900CD Memory Card Midis IN 7234567 8AM LR Preset Drum Kit 9 2 Press EDIT Song Drum Kit Preset Drum Kit 1 Kick Snare Kick Snare a Closed Hi hat SD Open Hi hat z 3 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to KIT and press ENTER Drum Kit Name Performing the Drums 1 Make sure performance of the song is stopped then press RHYTHM PAD repeatedly until the indicator is lit or flashing OH 2 Press REC TRACK 1 6 to input the drum sounds RHYTHM PAD Lit Number P P t S Enables performance of the UPPER drum sounds meee S Sony REC TRACK 1 KICK 4 Use CURSOR 1 gt and the TIME VALUE dial to REC TRACK 2 SNARE select drum kits by switching the preset song and REC TRACK 3 CLOSED HIHAT number REC TRACK 4 OPEN HIHAT P1 9 REC TRACK 5 CRASH CYMBAL STD1 2 Standard sets REC TRACK 6 RIDE CYMBAL ROOM Set with moderate ambience applied HARD Set appropriate for hard rock RHYTHM PAD Flashing JAZZ Set appropriate for jazz Enables input of the LOWER drum sounds HIP HOP Set appropriate for dance REC TRACK 1 CROSS STICK HOUSE Set appropriate for dance REC TRACK 2 COWBELL REGGAE Set appropriate f
8. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select AB and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Use CURSOR lt 1 gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V Track to move from and track V Track to move to 6 Press ENTER TIME UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Use CURSOR 1 and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the time of the beginning of the location T To where you want the data to be moved 8 When you are ready to execute the move press ENTER The display will ask Are you sure so that you can confirm the operation 9 Press ENTER Move Event is executed 10 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Moving by specifying the time TME MES Perform the procedure given below to move the portion between specific times Ex 1 Moving to the same track START END TO Time START END TO Time 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR TL gt to move the cursor to TRK and press ENTER UTIL
9. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 8 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen 137 Using the Drum Kits Changing the position pan of Erasing drum sounds 1 2 4 Press UTILITY Press CURSOR 1 gt to move the cursor to TONE and press ENTER Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to ERASE and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the erase drum kit then press ENTER S1 5 Song Drum Kit 1 5 UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the erase drum sound then press ENTER Select ALL if you want to erase all of the drum sounds in the kit UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Are you sure appears Press ENTER YES to erase the drum sound To cancel press EXIT NO Press EXIT to return to the
10. IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to MOV and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select TME MES and press ENTER 71 Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing Mu After specifying the time in the procedure above a may appear to show that there is a discrepancy between the actual current position and the position displayed If you specify the o locations using measures specify the locations at each screen a using the TIME VALUE dial to eliminate the discrepancy IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR HINT 5 Use CURSOR lI b gt and the TIME VALUE dial to You can also enter the time using LOCATOR ZERO select the track V Track to move from and track V STOP REW STOP FF and AUTO PUNCH IN Track to move to OUT 6 Press ENTER Moving a complete track ALL Perform the procedure given below to move the complete UTIL data from one track to another 24 1 Press UTILITY
11. INPUT 6 0 24 INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 24 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 8 Use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the dum sound and press ENTER 5 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to Copying of the waveform data begins EXPORT and press ENTER When Completed appears the import is finished Copying audio track waveform data to computers WAV AIFF Export z You can write data for specified tracks to a CD R RW disc as waveform data then import the waveform data to the computer using your computer to read the CD R RW disc 6 Press CURSORI N I b gt to select the file format then press ENTER NOTE The Waveform Data Export screen appears You will be unable to use CD RW discs if your computer is only equipped with a CD ROM or CD R drive In this case used CD R discs 1 Place a writable CD R RW disc a blank disc in the REC MODE y BR 900CD s CD R RW drive ia is EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until this indicator stops flashing and tums off before 7 Use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the tracks you proceeding want to export 2 Press CD R RW The Write Speed scre
12. EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press EDIT 180 10 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to SMF and press ENTER The names of the SMFs on the memory card are displayed UN y v v v RI 11 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the SMF to be imported then press ENTER MEMO When importing GM GS XG compatible SMFs MIDI Channel 10 is generally assigned as the channel used for rhythm performances Thus only the data on MIDI Channel 10 in the SMF is isolated and imported by the BR 900CD Note that the data on other channels is disregarded 12 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the import destination song pattern then press ENTER The import is executed With some SMF files a considerable amount of time may be required to finish importing the file During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Loading Drum Sounds from WAV AIFF Files Tone Load You can import WAV and AIFF files on your computer and load these as drum sounds TONE LOAD ore The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used when t
13. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR lt gt to select Sub Mixer and turn the TIME VALUE dial to turn the setting ON UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen 5 Turn the LINE SENS knob to adjust the sensitivity to the input from the external MIDI device ole Even when the Sub Mixer is turned on if you press INPUT SELECT LINE illuminating its indicator the signal from LINE IN that passes through the recorder mixer block is given priority and the Sub Mixer will not work Using Condenser Microphones Phantom Power Most condenser microphones need a supply of power known as phantom power in order to operate Accordingly the BR 900CD can supply phantom power at 48 V to condenser microphones connected to any of the XLR type connectors for MIC 1 and MIC 2 MEM Phantom power Condenser microphones generally contain a pair of thin opposing electrodes When a voltage is applied across these electrodes any vibration resulting from incoming audio will be output as electrical waves However since these waves are very weak they must be boosted using amplification circuitry within the microphone itself Phantom power is used to drive this amplification circuitry Certain type
14. SWARE CLOSEDHH OPENHH USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About WARNING and A CAUTION Notices About the Symbols Used for instructions intended to alert The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions the user to the risk of death or severe or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is Z WARNING injury should the unit be used determined by the design contained within the improperly triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it Material damage refers to damage or means that the unit must never be disassembled other adverse effects caused with The O symbol alerts the user to things that must be respect to the home and all its carried out The specific thing that must be done is furnishings as well to domestic gt indicated by the design contained within the circle In animals or pets the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplu
15. USB cable Notes on Using USB Do not perform the following actions when switching to USB mode or transmitting data These operations may result in your computer not responding to the data Data on memory cards may also be corrupted Do not e Disconnect the USB cable e Eject the memory card e Put the computer in suspended standby mode or hibernation restart or quit Turn off the BR 900CD s power When Using Windows XP 2000 If using Windows XP 2000 log on to Windows as one of the following users 4019s e Administrator or other user with the privileges of the Administrators group e A user whose account type is Computer Administrator Note that you will not be able to properly quit the USB connection if the user name is not one of those described above For more details consult the system administrator for the computer you are using 163 Backing Up the BR 900CD s Data 2 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB cable Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press UTILITY Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears Select BACKUP with the TIME VALUE dial then press EN
16. EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Use CURSOR lt 1 D and the TIME VALUE dial to set the EQ On Off for each track Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track corresponding to the button pressed 4 To change the EQ settings press CURSOR repeatedly to display the parameter screen then turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the settings value INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 After you have completed the setting press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen 110 Loop Effect Parameter Functions Parameter List CHORUS DELAY DBLN Doubling This selects the chorus delay or doubling effect FX Type This sets the type of the effect CHORUS A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader DELAY This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound DBLN By adding a slightly time delayed sound to the direct sound this produces the impression that multiple sources are sounding together a doubling effect The delayed sound will be output from the side opposite to which the playback track has been panned E When CHORUS is selected Rate 0 100 Adjusts the rate of the Chorus effect Depth 0 100 Adjusts the d
17. Ol C RHYTHI EFFECTS LAI CIC CCIC 1234 S A SS 56 8 R To adjust the send level for the input source move the cursor to In Send To adjust the send level for the Rhythm move the cursor to Rhy Send The setting is adjusted by turning the TIME VALUE dial to the desired value 5 After you have completed adjusting the send level press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen ME You can switch screens in the following sequence with the screen cycling to the next screen each time LOOP EFFECTS is pressed Loop Effects selection screen Send Level screen gt Type screen gt Play screen 109 Using the Loop Effects Track EQ Setting the Track EQ This section explains how to edit the Track EQ settings parameters is For a fuller description of Track EQ refer to Track EQ Parameter Functions p 112 MEMO Track EQ do not have patches Loop effect settings are saved along with the song data If you want to save the settings in the currently selected song hold down STOP and press REC 1 Press PAN EQ 2 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to EQ and press ENTER REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y REC MODE INPUT
18. 5 n Roland in fm EV 5 LI wn m AROMA wu Ol f Foot Switch FS 5U etc Expression Pedal Roland EV 5 etc nore To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections O To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit should the plug be pulled out accidentally and to avoid applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack anchor the power cord using the cord hook as shown in the illustration BOSS Corporation move BR 900CD POWER Audio Set etc Electric Guitar or Electric Bass fy YY Ny LY hi EA ki Myst GUITAR BASS Hi Z IP 0 AAA a E AS a Me CA a a E Keyboard etc Feedback could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by 1 Changing the orientation of the microphone s 2 Relocating microphone s at a greater distance from speakers 3 Lower the volume Two types of MIC inputs are included TRS phone type jacks compatible with balanced input and XLR type connectors The pin assignment for the MIC jack is as shown below Before makin
19. continuous frames are easier to deal with non drop is IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR generally used In contrast in situations such as in broadcast where the time code must match actual clock The offset is set as the difference between the time to time drop is used which to align the MTC timing and the time to which to align the song timing For example you want to have the external device play back with the MTC timing shown below when the song timing reaches 01h00m00s00 then set the offset as follows Song Timing MTC for Offset Setting External Device 01h00m00s00 01h30m00s00 00h30m00s00 01h00m00s00 00h30m00s00 23h30m00s00 4 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 159 Synchronizing with MIDI Devices Using MMC MMC stands for MIDI Machine Control This is a protocol that uses MIDI System Exclusive messages to remotely 2 control multiple recording devices from one device Your BR 900CD supports the MMC protocol By using MMC your BR 900CD can send commands such as PLAY STOP and FF to connected MIDI devices to operate them MEMO Some MIDI devices do not support the BR 900CD s MMC functionality If so it will not be possible to operate the
20. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Press CURSOR TL gt to move the cursor to TRK 7 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify and press ENTER the beginning of the portion S Start of data you want to move 8 Press ENTER UTIL UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 6 y IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 9 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the UTIL ending of the portion E End of data you want to move 6 10 Press ENTER IN 12345678M LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to MOV and press ENTER IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR UTIL 11 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify i the time of the beginning of the location T To a where you want the data moved IN 1234567 8RWM LR 12 When you are ready to execute the move press ENTER 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select ALL and press The display will ask Are you sure so that you can ENTER confirm the operation 13
21. When you have finished Copying the data the Idling screen returns to the display Quit the connection to the computer With Windows XP In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk If this procedure fails to eject the disk use the procedure below 1 Click the 5 icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message displayed there 4 Task Tray 2 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears Task Bar 4 With Windows 2000 Me 1 In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk 2 Click the Ss icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message displayed there 4 Task Tray 3 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears Task Bar 4 168 9 Press the BR 900CD s EXIT The WAV or AIFF file is imported The contents of the USB folder are automatically deleted at the time the import is finished If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER imports the WAV or AIFF file UTIL Once the import is complete you are returned to the screen for specifyin
22. EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR q TH gt to move the cursor to AUDIO and press ENTER The Audio CD menu screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to REMAIN and press ENTER The remaining time for recording on audio CD will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR nore With finalized discs discs that have been used for data backup and other discs that cannot be used as audio CDs a remaining time of 0 is indicated 142 Playing Back Audio CDs Let s now listen to the audio CD we have just created using the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive In addition to CD R discs this drive can be used to play back CD RW discs that cannot be played on standard CD players Naturally you will also be able to listen to commercially produced audio CDs on this drive and it can even play back audio CDs created using the BR 900CD that have not yet been finalized Note If you are working with an audio CD created with the BR 900CD you can play back and check the sounds on the CD even before finalizing it Please note however that depending on the type of disc used and the data on
23. E MIC E LIN LINE No Patch Name Algorithm No Patch Name Algorithm 01 Vo Comp1 COSM COMP VCL 01 CM FatEQ STEREO MULTI 02 Vo Comp2 COSM COMP VCL 02 CM ThnEQ STEREO MULTI 03 Kick Cmp COSM COMP VCL 03 Tight EQ STEREO MULTI 04 SnareCmp COSM COMP VCL 04 CM BigEQ STEREO MULTI 05 BrassCmp COSM COMP VCL 05 SMALL EQ STEREO MULTI 06 VocalFx1 VOCAL MULTI 06 T WAH UP STEREO MULTI 07 VocalFx2 VOCAL MULTI 07 T WAH DW STEREO MULTI 08 VocalFx3 VOCAL MULTI 08 R MOD LO STEREO MULTI 09 VocalFx4 VOCAL MULTI 09 R MOD HI STEREO MULTI 10 NARRATOR VOCAL MULTI 10 TotalMod STEREO MULTI 11 VOX DOUB VOCAL MULTI 11 DEEP FLG STEREO MULTI 12 VOX DETN VOCAL MULTI 12 LO amp SLOW STEREO MULTI 13 KARAOKE VOCAL MULTI 13 LO amp FAST STEREO MULTI 14 UNISON VOICE TRANS 14 HI amp SLOW STEREO MULTI 15 STUTTER VOICE TRANS 15 HI amp FAST STEREO MULTI 16 D VADER VOICE TRANS 16 StChorus STEREO MULTI 17 ALIEN VOICE TRANS 17 SlowChrs STEREO MULTI 18 BullHorn VOCAL MULTI 18 FastChrs STEREO MULTI 19 SEAGULLS VOICE TRANS 19 PRE DLY STEREO MULTI 20 SO DEEP VOICE TRANS 20 VntgPhas STEREO MULTI 21 BrightCh VOCAL MULTI 21 MdrnPhas STEREO MULTI 22 FatBrass VOCAL MULTI 22 DeepPhas STEREO MULTI 23 Dark EQ VOCAL MULTI 23 PhatPhas STEREO MULTI 24 Vocal EQ VOCAL MULTI 24 PS DETUN STEREO MULTI 25 BrightEQ VOCAL MULTI 25 PS 10CT STEREO MULTI 26 Enh BCut VOCAL MULTI 26 PS 10CT STEREO MULTI 27 ST PAN VOCAL MULTI 27 ST DOUBL STEREO MULTI 28 SLOW FLG VOCAL MULTI 28 MONO gt
24. O You cannot import SMFs containing more than 999 E measures Add the extension MID to SMFs you are importing When you have finished copying the data the Idling O Use file names containing eight alphanumeric characters screen returns to the display 8 Quit the connection to the computer 1 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB 1 Drag the BOSS_BR 900 icon into the trash cable 9 Press the BR 900CD s EXIT 2 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press The WAV or AIFF file is imported UTILITY The contents of the USB folder are automatically deleted at the time the import is finished 3 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the The USB screen appears computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER imports the WAV or AIFF file 4 Select BACKUP with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER The Idling screen appears in the display UTIL OO LL UTIL LIC LIC Once the import is complete you are returned to the screen for specifying the import source track V Track y At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer
25. 206 Arrangement Pattern List Preset Pattern List Pattern Name Initial Measure Abbreviation shown in display Tempo F1 V2 ROCK1 ROCK2 ROCK3 ROCK4 ROCK5 ROCK6 Hard Rock 1 HdRc1 Hard Rock 1 HdRc2 Hard Rock 1 HdRc3 m Hard Rock 1 HdRc4 Hard Rock 1 HdRc5 HEAVY1 HEVY1 HEAVY2 HEVY2 HEAVY3 HEVY3 HEAVY4 HEVY4 HEAVY5 HEVY5 POP1 POP2 POP3 POP4 POP5 POP6 POP7 POP8 BALLAD1 BALD1 BALLAD2 BALD2 BLUES1 BLUS1 BLUES2 BLUS2 BLUES3 BLUS3 BLUES4 BLUS4 R amp B1 R amp B2 R amp B3 R amp B4 R amp B5 JAZZ1 JAZZ2 JAZZ3 FUSION1 FUSN1 FUSION2 FUSN2 HipHop1 H Hp1 HipHop2 H Hp2 FUNK HOUSE Cntry1 Cnty1 Cntry2 Cnty2 OTHER1 Othr1 OTHER2 Othr1 OTHERS Othr1 Metro BREAK aA 2 pol s r o a al al ayn ala alr alalr a a a a alo p r rr an pf a slo alr alal ala p a nm ro A po rof ro a a ro as A po po pe A po po po po aan pO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PY PO PO BA PY PO A PO A PO P V PY PD anajajaja n ap na aj l DN nin a a a fp aj niv MENENIE po a a ro A A po po po A po po po po po A a po po A pO pO po pO PO PO PO PO PO A PO PO
26. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to select the song to be loaded 4 Press ENTER The song data is loaded nore Patches employing the Guitar Synth algorithm of the BR 864 are replaced by P001 when loaded The Harmonist of the BR 864 are replaced by Flanger when loaded NEM To record or edit turn off song protect p 79 When you turn off song protect Overwrite OK appears in the display press ENTER YES Song protect is switched off and the data is simultaneously converted to BR 900CD format After this step is executed the song data can no longer be used with the BR 864 Loading Songs Created with the BR 532 When copying song data created with the BR 532 from SmartMedia to a BR 900CD memory card you can load the data as a BR 900CD song Note Reading BR 532 data requires a PC with a SmartMedia reader and CompactFlash writer connected First copy the data on the BR 532 memory card SmartMedia to the PC with the SmartMedia reader and use the CompactFlash writer to copy that data from the PC toa BR 900CD memory card Then insert the memory card containing the copy of the desired data into the BR 900CD 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR q Il gt to move the cursor to SEL and press ENTER The Song Select screen is appeared UTIL
27. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select 01 SOLOBANG Title Composer Copyright Copyright O 2005 SOLOBANG Yutaka Nakano 78 A BOSS Corporation 4 Press ENTER E If you have changed the recording or editing Since the BR 900CD automatically updates the recorded data and operation content if the recording or editing have been changed you do not need to perform any special operations for saving During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Ifyou try to record or edit data using a protected demo song Protected appears Playing back a song 1 Move the TRACK faders 1 6 7 8 and the RHYTHM fader to the positions shown in the figure below and lower the MASTER fader a RHYTHM MASTER 2 Press PLAY LJ gt o 200 209 200 Fi STOP q REC SCRUB The song starts Slowly increase the MASTER fader and adjust the volume to the desired level Note Use of the demo song supplied with this product for any purpose other than private personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law Additionally this data must not be copied nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder MEMO By adjusting the TRACK faders you can listen to the individu
28. STEP Velocity 8 Input the drum sounds There are two ways to input drum sounds Method 1 Inputting with the REC TRACK buttons Use REC TRACK 1 6 to input the drum sounds You can switch the UPPER and LOWER drum sounds by pressing RHYTHM PAD RHYTHM PAD Lit Enables input of the UPPER drum sounds REC TRACK 1 KICK REC TRACK 2 SNARE REC TRACK 3 CLOSED HIHAT REC TRACK 4 OPEN HIHAT REC TRACK 5 CRASH CYMBAL REC TRACK 6 RIDE CYMBAL RHYTHM PAD Flashing Enables input of the LOWER drum sounds REC TRACK 1 CROSS STICK REC TRACK 2 COWBELL REC TRACK 3 TOM1 REC TRACK 4 TOM2 REC TRACK 5 TOM3 REC TRACK 6 TOM4 Method 2 Inputting with the ENTER Press CURSOR 7 to move the cursor to the matrix display Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the intersection of the drum sound you want to input and the time at which you want it to sound then press ENTER The drum sound is alternately input or deleted each time you press ENTER W flashes rapidly when you move the cursor to a point where a sound has already been input When a drum sound is input the display changes to W Pressing CURSOR A in the top row of the matrix display returns the cursor to its original position wo g 3 Bl ig 7 STEP Indicated in the matrix You can confirm the timing
29. When you have finished exporting the data the Idling screen returns to the display Quit the connection to the computer With Windows XP In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk 166 If this procedure fails to eject the disk use the procedure below 1 Click the a icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message displayed there Task Bar 4 4 Task Tray 2 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears With Windows 2000 Me 1 In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk 2 Click the a icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message displayed there Task Bar 4 Task Tray 3 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears 10 Press the BR 900CD s EXIT The file format selection screen returns to the display The contents of the USB folder are automatically deleted the instant the EXIT button is pressed If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER returns the file format selection screen to the display UTIL At this point you can
30. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Use CURSOR lt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track and V Track to which the drum sounds are to be loaded then press ENTER IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 135 Using the Drum Kits 5 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify 6 When you have finished setting the start and end the range start and end points of drum sounds to be points move the cursor to LOAD and press ENTER loaded in terms of measures or time locations You cannot specify an interval between the start and end points or a length of time in less than 100 ms or excess of 13 seconds ee o When specifying measures the result is reflected in the time display and vice versa IN 12345 67 8 RM LR Start Point S Specify the measure or location to be used as the start point for loading the drum sounds UTIL Measure Beat toy IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Specify the load destination song drum kit with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER li S15 Song Drum Kit 1 5 N 11 34 6 7 8 RIYTHM LR Hours Seconds Minutes Frame
31. IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to select the song to be loaded 4 Press ENTER The song data is loaded Note The data remains in BR 532 format immediately after loading Once the loaded song is saved the data is converted p 79 to BR 900CD format 61 Displaying the Song Information Displaying the Remaining Displaying the Memory Card Usage Available Recording Time Follow the procedure below to display the current condition Follow the procedure below to either display the elapsed of the memory card being used recording time in the recording standby and recording 1 Press UTILITY screens 2 Press CURSOR J gt to move the cursor to SYS and press ENTER 0 6 24 IN 123 45 67 8RWM LR 0 E y 24 IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM L R 3 Press CURSOR gt to select Remain Inf and 7 turn the TIME VALUE dial to select ON 24 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press UTILITY UTIL IN 123456 7 8 RHYTHM LR ON Displays the remaining available recording time in minutes seconds OFF Doesn t display the remaining available recording time 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to INF and press ENTER
32. EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM L R 7 Use the TIME VALUE dial to set the write speed and press ENTER The message Write sure will appear she e The range of available write speeds can sometimes be limited by the type of media being used In such a case the BR 900CD will allow you to select only the supported speeds e Ifyou are using CD R or CD RW discs intended for high speed writing the frequency of write errors may increase if the x2 or x4 speed is selected It is recommended that you use the x8 speed for high speed discs 8 Press ENTER YES Writing to the CD R RW disc will begin When the message Completed appears it indicates that the backup has been successfully completed Saving all of the songs on a memory card to a CD R RW disc All Backup 1 Insert an empty CD R RW disc into the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive 4 5 6 Press CURSOR NI gt to move the cursor to BACKUP and press ENTER The Backup menu screen will appear INPUT 6 24 EFFECTS IN 1 2345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press CURSOR NI gt to move the cursor to ALL and press ENTER The Write Speed screen will appear
33. Your BR 900CD allows you to automatically change banks by pressing an INPUT SELECT button For example pressing the GUITAR BASS MIC2 INPUT SELECT button changes you to a guitar bank patch and pressing LINE changes you to a line bank patch Also within each bank effect patches are further grouped as shown below 84 Preset patches P The preset patches contain preset data Their settings can be changed but you cannot create a new preset patch User patches U User patches can be rewritten and are stored in internal memory If you have created a patch that you would like to use for other songs as well it is convenient to store it as a user patch Song patches S Like user patches song patches can be written however the data for song patches are stored along with the song data to the memory card This is convenient when you have created a patch for a specific recorded performance and would like to store that patch together with the song BR 900CD Memory Card Preset Patch Song patches S cannot be selected unless a memory card is inserted NE Your BR 900CD is shipped with the user patches U and song patches S containing the same patches as the preset patches P send When you create a new song copies of the patches in the song patches S are made in the preset patches P for each bank Using the Insert Effects Editing Insert Effect Settings If you
34. 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select AB and press ENTER E y UTIL i i 5 START END Time 24 IN 1234567 8 RW LR 1 Press UTILITY 5 Use CURSOR lt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to 2 Press CURSOR lt 1 gt to move the cursor to TRK select the track V Track to erase from and press ENTER 6 When you are ready to execute the erasure press ENTER The display will ask Are you sure so that you can confirm the operation Mi 7 Press ENTER 8 24 The erasure is executed N 1234567 6AM OR 8 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return y to the Play screen 7 During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line ie of the display while the lower line shows what is being j processed 24 IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to ERS and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select TME MES and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing 5 Use CURSOR lt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V Track to erase from 6 Press ENTER UTIL
35. EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR HINT By pressing ENTER while the cursor is at a Bank Number you can display the Edit Effect screen directly 4 Press CURSOR q lE gt to move the cursor to each effect and turn the TIME VALUE dial to turn each effect on or off Blocks that are turned on are shown in uppercase letters while blocks that are turned off are shown in lowercase letters Turn on the effects that you want to use EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Press CURSOR J gt to move the cursor to the effect with the parameter that you want to change and press ENTER The Parameter Setting screen for each effect appears EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 6 Use CURSOR J Il gt to select a parameter and turn the TIME VALUE dial to edit the value 7 Ifyou would like to edit another effect press EXIT to return to the previous screen and repeat steps 5 6 8 If you wish to save the current effect settings perform the procedure described in Saving insert effect settings next O se effect settings are temporary If you exit the Edit Effect screen without saving the effect patch you changed TMP app
36. EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 6 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to PLAY and press ENTER The SMF play screen appears REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the SMF to be played If the SMFs are collected in a folder then the folder name is displayed To show the SMFs within the folder press ENTER and press ENTER The BR 900CD will start playback 9 Tostop playback press CURSOR lt 11 gt to move the cursor to E and press ENTER You can use START and STOP to start and stop SMF playback Note In cases where the SMF contains a large amount of MIDI data playback of the file may be sluggish Loading drum patterns from the CD R RW drive SMF Import You can import SMFs Standard MIDI Files stored on PC as song patterns You can easily increase your collection of song patterns by creating SMFs on your computer or other device and copying them to memory cards Any SMFs that satisfy the following conditions can be played in this way Format 0or1 File size 240 KB maximum Note that this will vary slightly based on the SMF content io oe importing GM GS XG compatible SMFs MIDI Channel 10 is generally assigned as the channel used for rhythm performances Thus only the data on MIDI
37. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the beginning of the portion S Start of data you want to erase 8 Press ENTER TIME UTIL IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 9 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the ending of the portion E End of data you want to erase 10 When you are ready to execute the erasure press ENTER The display will ask Are you sure so that you can confirm the operation 11 Press ENTER The erasure is executed 12 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Mo After specifying the time in the procedure above a may appear to show that there is a discrepancy between the actual current position and the position displayed If you specify the locations using measures specify the locations at each screen using the TIME VALUE dial to eliminate the discrepancy HINT You can also enter the time using LOCATOR ZERO STOP REW STOP FF and AUTO PUNCH IN OUT Erasing a complete track ALL 2 3 4 Press UTILITY Press CURSOR JE gt to move the cursor to TRK and press ENTER
38. EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Press ENTER YES If you want to cancel finalization press EXIT NO Finalization will begin and the state of progress will be displayed When the message Complete appears and the track buttons begin to flash the finalization is complete 6 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen 7 Press the CD R RW drive s EJECT button to eject the disc This enables the CD R RW disc to be played back on regular consumer CD players ore e Once finalization has been started it will not be possible to cancel this process e In certain cases a period of several seconds will pass before the disc is actually ejected 144 Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange Data The BR 900CD s built in CD R RW drive can be used to Bac king up a song to a CD R RW exchange data in the following ways disc one at a time Song Backup O Storing of songs and other data on the memory card to CD R RW discs Backup 1 Insert an empty CD R RW disc into the BR 900CD s O Reading songs and other backup data back into the CD R RW drive memory card Recover The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until O Exchanging of waveform data with a PC this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding noe 2 Press CD R RW When you use the CD R RW drive you must use only the supplied AC adaptor The CD R RW drive cannot be used w
39. disc 0 e If the total size of the songs and other data you intend to 6 back up exceeds the capacity of a single CD R RW disc REO A IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR you will be able to perform a backup using as many discs as necessary In this case you will need to have a 5 Press CURSOR number of blank CD R RW discs on hand and during the backup process you should insert and remove them 11 to move the cursor to SONG and press ENTER The Song backup screen will appear as requested on screen e To cancel writing to a CD R RW disc press EXIT NO When the message Cancel appears press ENTER YES to confirm cancellation A certain amount of time may pass between pressing of EXIT REC MODE INPUT 6 NO and display of the confirmation message Please ee 2 note however that no guarantee can be made regarding a ie me the state of the data written before cancellation 145 Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange Data 6 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the song you want 3 to back up and press ENTER The Write Speed screen will appear Press CURSOR q lE gt to move the cursor to DATA and press ENTER The Data CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6
40. EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Select an arrangement Use CURSOR lt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the Preset Song and number 3 Move the RHYTHM fader to the positions shown in the figure below 4 Press ZERO to reset the play position back to the beginning of the arrangement then press PLAY The selected arrangement is performed 121 Selecting patterns This selects the pattern to be played with the Rhythm 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is flashing P Preset S Song Pattern Number a INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Select a pattern Use CURSOR D and the TIME VALUE dial to select the Preset Song and number P001 P327 Preset patterns 1 327 S001 S100 Song patterns 1 100 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Performing patterns 1 Make sure performance of the song is stopped then press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is flashing INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Select a pattern Use CURSOR gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the Preset Song and number 3 Move the RHYTHM fader to the positions shown in the figure below 4 Press
41. EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to switch the point to which the insert effects are connected INPUT lt NORMAL gt The sound is monitored and recorded after it passes through the insert effect Normally you will use the BR 900CD with this setting TRACK 1 REC INPUT lt REC DRY gt The sound is monitored through the insert effect but is recorded without the effect dry TRACK 1 8 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 5 amp 6 7 amp 8 The insert effect can be applied to the playback of a track or pair of tracks Use this when you wish to try out effects after recording the dry sound or when you wish to apply effects only to a specific track TRACK 1 PLAY RHYTHM The insert effect can be applied to the playback of a Rhythm MASTER Use this when you wish to apply effects to the entire song such as when adjusting the tone or applying a special effect during mixdown 4 y TRACK 2 PLAY i TRACK 8 PLAY Press EXIT to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 87 Insert Effect Parameter Functions Algorithm List The algorithms the available effects and their connection order that can be used as an insert effect are shown below
42. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to select AB Qtz and turn the TIME VALUE dial to turn the setting on When off the quantize function will not work UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Changing the tempo after having made the quantize function settings in a repeated portion will result in timing discrepancies between the repeat start and end points and the beginnings and ends of measures You can set the repeat portion to one measure by pressing REPEAT twice at the same position HINT When the repeat portion is set you can use the following functions to edit your recorded track data Copying the repeat portion p 67 e Moving the repeat portion p 70 e Erasing the repeat portion p 73 Before using these functions you can use the quantize function to set the repeat portion with accurate timing Re recording Only a Mistake Punch in out You may occasionally make a mistake while recording or the Ma nua ly pu nch ing in a nd out performance may not turn out as you expect In this case you U sin g REC can punch in out to re record only the portion t
43. IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR HINT You can also display this screen directly by pressing ENTER while the cursor is positioned at the Preset Song User or number 103 5 Press CURSOR q lE gt to move the cursor to each effect and turn the TIME VALUE dial to turn each effect on or off Blocks that are turned on are shown in uppercase letters while blocks that are turned off are shown in lowercase letters Turn on the effects that you want to use 6 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to the effect with the parameter that you want to change and press ENTER The Parameter Setting screen for each effect appears EFFECTS REC MODE MASTERING 24 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Use CURSOR lt 1 gt to select a parameter and turn the TIME VALUE dial to edit the value 8 If you would like to edit another effect press EXIT to return to the previous screen and repeat steps 5 6 9 If you wish to save the current effect settings perform the procedure described in Saving Mastering Tool Kit Settings below Note Edited effect settings are temporary If you exit the Edit Effect screen without saving the effect patch you changed TMP appears next to the indication of the bank Be aware that if you select a new effect patch while TMP is displayed the altered effect pa
44. INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Use the TIME VALUE dial to set the write speed and press ENTER The message Are you sure will appear ole e The range of available write speeds can sometimes be The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding 2 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 146 limited by the type of media being used In such a case the BR 900CD will allow you to select only the supported speeds If you are using CD R or CD RW discs intended for high speed writing the frequency of write errors may increase if the x2 or x4 speed is selected It is recommended that you use the x8 speed for high speed discs Press ENTER YES Writing to the CD R RW disc will begin When the message Completed appears it indicates that the backup has been successfully completed Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange Data Loading Saved Songs to a Memory Card Recover Loading saved songs to a memory card one at a time Song Recover 1 Insert a CD R RW disc containing backup songs into the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive The drive s access indicator will begin to flash
45. as a mono recording onto one track Press one of TRACK 1 6 at REC TRACK to select the one track to which to record However if you want to record in stereo to increase the effect of insert effects you can simultaneously press the 1 and 2 3 and 4 or 5 and 6 REC TRACK buttons for stereo recording onto two tracks In addition Tracks 7 8 are stereo tracks so they always produce stereo recordings Recording in Mono AOCGOO dl Recording in Stereo ED ED EB EB A OOOO If INPUT SELECT LINE or SIMUL are lit INPUT SELECT SIMUL u CHIA or INPUT SELECT 107 SIMULA Since the input is stereo the recording is normally performed on two tracks Press either REC TRACK 1 or 2 to select tracks 1 and 2 or 3 or 4 to select tracks 3 and 4 However if you want to mix together the left and right channels being input onto one track with tracks 1 and 2 selected press REC TRACK 1 again to select track 1 Using the same procedure you can select any track 1 to 6 to be the track to which to record In addition Tracks 7 8 are stereo tracks so they always produce stereo recordings Recording Changing V Tracks The BR 900CD is a eight track multitrack recorder and each track consists of eight V Tracks You can select any one of these V Tracks for recording or playback Therefore by making use of the many V Tracks you can use the BR 900CD jus
46. IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR to select Preview SW and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set ON UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR This enables use of the Preview function 4 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed NEM You can temporarily switch to Preview during scrub with the following operations Press REW Press FF PREVIEW TO PREVIEW FROM Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing The BR 900CD allows you to edit your songs by performing editing functions such as copying and moving data recorded on the tracks About the Measure Time Specification screen Measures and time are specified in the S Start E End and T To screens in Track Edit as shown below S Start E End T To Measure Beat N 123 4 6 7 8 RYTHM LR Sub Frame Hours Seconds Minutes Frame MEMO Data is saved in its edited form when you return to the Play screen from the Track Edit screen D
47. UTIL 10 Repeat Steps 4 8 as needed Z UOID9G 11 When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF file s press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling screen is displayed Refer to p 212 for instructions on resolving this problem The BOSS_BR 900 icon is added to the computer Ex 179 5 9 Import the SMF 1 Double click the BOSS_BR 900 icon 2 Drag the imported SMF to the SMF folder in the ROLAND folder UTIL When you have finished importing the SMF the Idling screen returns to the display Quit the connection to the computer 1 Drag the BOSS_BR 900 icon into the trash Press BR 900CD s EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER and then EXIT returns the Play screen to the display UTIL At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is flashing REC MODE INPUT 6
48. 5 If you want to delete the pattern press ENTER 5 Press ENTER The screen for confirming the deletion appears The screen for confirming the copy appears RHYTHM 6 Press ENTER YES to delete the pattern 6 Press ENTER YES to copy To cancel press EXIT NO T l EXIT NO Sl TUNG 7 Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen 7 Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed processed 133 Using the Drum Kits A drum kitis a variety of rhythm instrument sounds Sel ecting Dru m Kits collected in a single set the BR 900CD includes nine internal preset drum kits 1 Make sure performance of the song is stopped then In addition you can also put together an additional five press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the original song drum kits indicator is lit Song drum kits are saved to individual songs on memory cards The drum kit instrument sounds are used in the performance of the arrangements and patterns INPUT
49. End Point E s Specify the measure or location to be used as the end IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR point for loading the drum sounds 8 Specify the load destination drum sound with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER Loading is executed From the screen for setting the start point press CURSOR gt repeatedly to display the screen for setting the end point To cancel press EXIT Measure Beat t t UTIL 24 IN 1 2345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR N 11234 6 7 8 RIYTHM LR Hours Seconds Minutes Frame NEO e You can press ENTER to switch between the start point and end point settings screens e You can preview the drum sounds in the specified range by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing ENTER Determine the sounds to load while setting the start and end points and the length and repeating the preview You can press PLAY to preview the sounds and press STOP to stop the sounds 136 Using the Drum Kits Copying drum sounds from other drum kits 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor to TONE and press ENTER UTIL IN
50. Turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the metronome volume Valid Settings 0 3 129 Creating Original Patterns Creating Patterns in Step Recording 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is flashing REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press EDIT UN y y y v RI Press CURSOR to move the cursor to STEP and press ENTER STEP appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen The recording standby screen appears in the display Measure Tempo Quantize Time Signature Use CURSOR and the TIME V ALUE dial to set the measure beat and quantize from which to start recording of the pattern Measure This sets the number of measures in the pattern to be recorded Valid Settings 1 999 Tempo When recording this sets the tempo for confirming the pattern Valid Settings 25 0 250 0 The tempo setting here is exclusively for confirmation of the pattern recording This tempo is not stored in the pattern you cannot make any individual tempo settings for the patterns themselves 130 Time Signature This sets the time signature i e the beat for the pattern to be recorded Valid S
51. UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR OFF Synchronization signals will not be output MTC MIDI Time Code will be transmitted MCK Sends the MIDI clock based on the tempo set with the Rhythm p 120 If OFF or MCK is selected proceed to step 6 5 Press CURSOR lt 1 gt to select MTC Type and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the MTC type UTIL IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Verify the specifications of your MIDI sequencer and set the MTC type on the BR 900CD 30 30 frames per second non drop format This is used by audio devices such as analog tape recorders and for NTSC format black and white video used in Japan and the U S 29N 29 97 frames per second non drop format This is used for NTSC format color video used in Japan and the U S 29D 29 97 frames per second drop format This is used for NTSC format broadcast color video used in Japan and the U S Synchronizing with MIDI Devices 25 25 frame per second frame rate This is used Setting the MTC offset for SECAM or PAL format video audio equipment and film used in Europe and The offset sets the time required to align the song playback and MTC timing when synchronizing an external device elsewhere a using MTC from the BR 900CD 24 24 frame per second frame
52. Scrubbing to Find the Music Starting Ending Point 1 Hold down STOP and press PLAY The PLAY indicator begins flashing and scrubbing starts At this time the Track 1 7 8 level meters are displayed The SCRUB TO and SCRUB FROM displayed at the TEMPO position in the screen are the scrub points with respect to the current position When the cursor is set under the scrub point it is possible to change scrub point by TIME VALUE dial INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR MES TIME REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR MEM You can press PLAY to preview the material to or from the currently selected scrub point PREVIEW FROM PREVIEW TO HINT To mute the sound of a particular track hold down DELETE MUTE and press the relevant REC TRACK button so it starts blinking 2 Slowly turn the TIME VALUE dial to move the current position and search for the starting point of the phrase e g where sound is first emitted 3 After you find the exact point where the music starts press STOP to stop scrubbing NEI You can now press LOCATOR to register a locator point so that you can find the point easily later 65 Search for the Music s Start and End Scrub Preview
53. UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR QU gt to move the cursor to CPY and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 67 Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select AB and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Use CURSOR lt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V Track to copy from and track V Track to copy to 6 Press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Use CURSOR and turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the time of the beginning of the location T To where you want the copied data to be placed 8 Press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 9 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the number of copies you want to be placed 10 When you are ready to execute the copy press ENTER The display will ask Are you sure so that
54. Changing the Scrub Points Besides switching the scrub point in the Play screen p 65 you can also use the following method to switch the scrub point 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR JI gt to move the cursor to SCR and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to select FROM TO and turn the TIME VALUE dial to change scrub points UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR TO Scrubs to your current position FROM Scrubs from your current position 4 After completing the setting press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Enabling Use of the Preview Function with REW and FF Besides using PLAY for the Preview function p 65 you can also set the unit so that REW and FF can be used with the Preview function 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to SCR and press ENTER UTIL
55. During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 125 Creating Original Patterns When creating a Rhythm arrangement by stringing together Rhythm patterns there may be times when you do not find anything suitable among the preset Rhythm patterns or when you want to get a Rhythm pattern that sounds exactly the way you want In such cases you can create your own original Rhythm patterns There are three ways to create Rhythm patterns Realtime Recording In Realtime Recording you record while tapping the TRACK buttons in time with the metronome Rhythm patterns are played back repeatedly and the data being input is mixed in with these sounds Additionally even if your timing is a little off when tapping the buttons you can use the Quantize function to rectify the input so the timing is correct Step Recording In Step Recording the timing of sounds and the drum sounds are programmed one at a time There are two ways to input drum sounds e Specifying the timing of a sound measure beat click and inputting the drum sound at that point by tapping the TRACK button e Inputting a drum sound at the desired timing within the detailed framework dividing a single measure the matrix This allows you to visually get an overall grasp of the Rhythm pattern making for a simple way to create Rhythm patterns Importing SMFs You can import S
56. Peak 0 100 This adjusts the amount of wah effect applied Lower values provide a mild wah effect while higher values result in a sharper wah sound With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume E When PEDAL is selected The effect of the wah pedal can be obtained by operating the Expression pedal For a detailed explanation refer to When Using an Expression Pedal p 187 Peak 0 100 This adjusts the amount of wah effect applied Lower values provide a mild wah effect while higher values result in a sharper wah sound With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume 101 Use the Mastering Tool Kit to produce a two track master 1 Press REC MODE several times until MASTERING of the bounce tracks with the levels optimized is indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen 2 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the recording What is Mastering Tool Kit When creating an audio CD from your recorded songs or recording to an MD or similar media the overall volume needs to be restrained so that even the loudest portions of the songs are handled appropriately on the CD or MD However this often results in an overall lowering of the volume resulting in a CD or MD that lacks excitement and impact Moreover in the low frequency range to which the human ear is not very sensitive the so
57. The Write screen appears EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT 6 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 115 Fixing the Pitch of Vocals Pitch Correction 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the patch number to which to write the new patch 6 After you ve selected the destination press ENTER After the save has been completed you are returned to the Pitch Correction patch selection screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 3 Making Detailed Settings for Pitch Correction Correction Event Map In the procedures described thus far what has been explained is how to correct the overall pitch for the entire song from start to finish in semitone increments In actual practice however there may be situations where you want to correct only a certain section or adjust the pitch differently In such instances use the following procedure 1 Start by switching to BOUNCE mode and selecting the patch to which pitch correction is to be applied 2 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to P MAP in the Pitch Correction patch selection screen and press ENTER The Correction Event Map screen appears EFFECTS INPUT 6 2 3456 7 8 RHYTHM LR In the Corr
58. and press ENTER IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to XCG and press ENTER IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Use CURSOR lt 11 gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the two tracks V Tracks to exchange data When you are ready to execute the exchange press ENTER The display will ask Are you sure so that you can confirm the operation Press ENTER The exchange is executed Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Organizing the Songs You ve Recorded Copying a Song Song Copy Follow the procedure below to copy the currently selected song 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to EDT and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LF y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press C
59. will be erased Tf you initialize the memory card supplied with the BR 900CD the demo songs on the card will be lost O see you insert or remove a memory card always turn off the BR 900CD first If a memory card is inserted when the power is turned on the data in the memory card may be destroyed or the memory card may become unusable 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to INI and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to CARD and press ENTER The confirmation message Are you sure appears in the display UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 196 4 To continue the initialization press ENTER YES To cancel press EXIT NO or UTILITY When ENTER is pressed initialization begins When the initializing has been completed Completed appears in the display Keep power on Song creating then appears in the display and a new song is automatically created In this case the data type selected is HiFi MT2 When creation of the song is finished the play screen returns to the display Depen
60. Creating a Master Tape Disc 3 Press CURSOR q TH gt to move the cursor to DPRT and press ENTER The Digital Copy Protect screen appears UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Rotate TIME VALUE dial to select the ON ON Digital copying will be prohibited OFF Digital copying is enabled 5 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Some DAT recorders do not support SCMS or do not allow digital connections to a CD player If you are using this type of DAT recorder it will not be possible to record the digital output of the BR 900CD on a DAT recorder if Copy Prtct is turned ON In this case you will need to turn off the Copy Prtct setting What is SCMS SCMS stands for Serial Copy Management System This is a function of consumer digital audio devices such as DAT recorders CD recorders that protects the copyright of the producer by prohibiting second generation and subsequent copies from being made digitally If digital connections are made to a digital recorder that has this function SCMS flags will be recorded along with the digital audio signals Digital audio data that contains this data cannot be recorded again via
61. O hd you use the CD R RW drive you must use only the supplied AC adaptor The CD R RW drive cannot be used while running on battery power Rhythm function The Rhythm function makes it easy to capture phrases or musical ideas that come to mind Simply select an appropriate Rhythm pattern and set the tempo In addition to the internal preset Rhythm patterns already provided you can also create your own original Rhythm patterns By recording using the Rhythm function editing one measure at a time is greatly simplified is Section 4 Using the Rhythm p 119 Five versatile digital effects processors The BR 900CD comes with five different types of effects processors These systems including recording effects Insert effects send return Loop Effects tone adjustment Track EQ vocal pitch correction Pitch Correction and mastering effects Mastering Tool Kit can be used independently for each application as needed This enables high quality song production in a single device with no need to connect any external effects The BR 900CD has many built in simulations and effects including amp modeling with COSM for a wide variety of insert effects Many effects for vocal keyboard and guitar tracks are also included for a vast array of applications The loop effects include spatial effects such as chorus and reverb which are vital for proper stereo mixdown The Track EQ is a built in two band EQ whose utilit
62. 2 Press CURSOR I gt to move the cursor to EDIT and press ENTER The Pitch Correction edit screen will appear 3 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the setting you want to change and select a new value using the TIME VALUE dial EFFECTS INPUT 6 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Type LO MALE HI MALE LO FEML HI FEML Set this parameter to match the type of voice in the original vocal part If this parameter is not set correctly problems will be more likely to occur in pitch detection and correction LO MALE Low Male Select this setting for a low pitched male voice HI MALE High Male Select this setting for a high pitched male voice LO FEML Low Female Select this setting for a low pitched female voice HI FEML High Female Select this setting for a high pitched female voice If the BR 900CD is frequently incorrect when detecting the pitch either change the type setting In certain cases this will reduce the number of incorrect detections Smooth 0 100 This setting determines how quickly pitch correction will react to changes of pitch in the original vocal part Large values result in a longer time before correction is applied consequently changes in pitch will be more gradual Small values produce rapid changes in pitch Corrections that are made too rapidly seem robotic However if the correction
63. Select the input source to record The indicator of the selected button will light INPUT GUITAR MIC L LINE R BASS MIC2 VOCAL v v Y SENS SENS Oy 0 0 MN Max MIN Max MIN MAX INPUT SELECT smua O O GUITAR BASS MIC2 Select to record the instrument connected to the GUITAR BASS jack or MIC 2 jack MIC 1 In the Play screen press the MIC INPUT SELECT Select to record the signal from a microphone connected to button the MIC1 jack or from the internal microphone When the MIC indicator for the INPUT SELECT button is lit you can use both the microphone connected to the MIC1 jack The Mic Select screen appears while MIC is held down and the internal microphone simultaneously T TIME Your BR 900CD is shipped with its internal microphone A turned off When not using the internal microphone be sure to eT 6 turn it on see next section EEEE be IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR LINE Select this when you wish to record the sound of an 2 While still holding down MIC use the TIME VALUE dial to select ONBRD EXT ONBRD EXT The built in mic is switched on and the input is a mix of instrument or CD player connected to the LINE jacks SIMUL To record the vocal and guitar at the same time press GUITAR BASS MIC2 and MIC
64. or INPUT SELECT sIMuL LAS Since the input is mono the recording is normally performed as a mono recording onto one track Press one of TRACK 1 6 at REC TRACK to select the one track to which to record However if you want to record in stereo to increase the effect of insert effects you can simultaneously press the 1 and 2 8 and 4 or 5 and 6 REC TRACK buttons for stereo recording onto two tracks In addition Tracks 7 8 are stereo tracks so they always produce stereo recordings Recording in Mono ED ED ED EBEBEB 909090 Recording in Stereo QaLVQOIOS If INPUT SELECT LINE or SIMUL are lit INPUT SELECT simuL TR O or INPUT SELECT urr SIMUL Since the input is stereo the recording is normally performed on two tracks Press either REC TRACK 1 or 2 to select tracks 1 and 2 or 3 or 4 to select tracks 3 and 4 However if you want to mix together the left and right channels being input onto one track with tracks 1 and 2 selected press REC TRACK 1 again to select track 1 Using the same procedure you can select any track 1 to 6 to be the track to which to record In addition Tracks 7 8 are stereo tracks so they always produce stereo recordings About the recording REC modes Recording on the BR 900CD is separated into three main modes Use whichever mode is suitable in the course of bri
65. 01h00m00s00 00h30m00s00 23h30m00s00 Nn The Offset is stored to each song individually About the Scrub Parameters This section describes the Scrub parameters 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to SCR and press ENTER 3 Using CURSOR 11D 1 select the Scrub parameter then make the setting with the TIME VALUE dial Scrub Mode From To Valid Settings FROM TO Initial value FROM This sets the Scrub function mode Scrub is a function for repeatedly playing back material of an extremely short duration approximately 45 msec You can get scrub playback by holding down STOP and pressing PLAY FROM Provides about 45 milliseconds of scrub playback starting from the current location TO Provides about 45 milliseconds of scrub playback ending up at the current location Preview Switch Preview SW Valid Settings ON OFF Initial value OFF This setting turns the Preview function on and off When the Preview switch is set to ON pressing REW during scrub playback provides one second of playback time starting from the current location while pressing FF provides one second of playback time ending up at the current location 199 g uoIp s 200 Section 9 Appendices Effect Patch List E GTR GUITAR BASS
66. 164 175 AN A ie ne E EENE RAE anis 147 Redondas 57 Reference Pitch tasa 188 189 Rehearse Release remiti Aid Release TIME iii lidades 94 REMAIN usada AS eh ica 142 Remain Inf wisseceicsecessssseedasssscsassavvuacsaseqascacesdivesessattsgavavesaceeave 62 198 Remaining available recording time cooononcononnnnornnarannananrarnnrannos 62 Remaining time for recording on Audio CDS ocmccconcnnaonnnnnannnraso 142 A NA 51 Repeat E E EEEE T nano ccoo ccoo nnna nono E nnan cnn Resonance REV ai Na Rev Send Rev Time dd 111 REVERB iiviiiviio sisi dota 111 Reverb iia talleres 108 REW a is 29 66 Rhy Sends 2 fea he feet l 109 Rhy MIDI hienas 157 199 o O O 35 87 ROM ii tai 37 120 157 RAYTHM fadet siii iia 37 121 122 Rhythm Mode smidaaita tai aia 121 RHYTHM PAD pisei daeta aa 127 131 134 Mastering Tool Kit cooooocnconconoonoonncnnononanonnnanonnnnnrnnnnnonnranrnnrn Pitch Correction tii bis To CD R RW disc veines Ee Raa E Tiie Track data in WAV AIFF format AT SUD ii AA AA AAA SCRUB FROM titi e 65 Scrub Parameter inignore E ESES 199 Sorub Point aoier eie e llantos 65 SCRUB TO marao e ee N a eevee 65 SENS KOD inci iia ibid eai R ESTRES 35 Separation ina dt 95 96 98 SHELVG SONG aos 145 147 Song Arrangement isisisi naiiai 38 120 123 Song Backup siii as latin chia a eee 145 O 77 Song Drum Kit ia 134 Song Erase 77 Song Information idad cd 62 Song Name iii dd 78 Song O Song Optimize A
67. 512 MB 260 min 312 min 392 min 1 GB 520 min 624 min 784 min The above listed recording times are approximate Times may be slightly shorter depending on the number of songs that were created The above number is the total for all the tracks that are used If each of the eight tracks contain an equal amount of data the length of the resulting song will be approximately 1 8 of the above Nominal Input Level Variable GUITAR BASS jack 20 dBu MIC TRS balanced XLR jack 40 dBu LINE IN jack 10 dBu Input Impedance GUITAR BASS jack IMQ MIC 1 2 jack 1 5 k Q HOT COLD TRS balanced XLR 1 0 k Q HOT GND COLD GND LINE IN jack 10kQ Nominal Output Level LINE OUT jack 10 dBu Output Impedance LINE OUT jack 2kQ Headphone jack 140 Q O Recommended Load Impedance LINE OUT jack Headphone jack 20 k Q or greater 32 100 Q O Residual Noise Level LINE OUT jack 85 dBu or less INPUT SELECT GUITAR BASS MIC2 input terminated with 1 k Q INPUT SENS CENTER IHF A typ EFFECT OFF 0OdBu 0 775 Vrms O Interface USB Connector DIGITAL OUT S PDIF 16 24 bit Optical type Display 16 Characters x 2 Lines Approx 100 icons Backlit LCD Connectors GUITAR BASS jack 1 4 inch phone type MIC 1 jacks XLR balanced type TRS balanced 1 4 inch phone type MIC 2 jacks XLR balanced type LINE IN jack RCA Phono type LINE OUT jack RCA Phono type DIG
68. AY PO A PO PV PY PO PD aDnajajaloa n a 222 pin a l ninin a a a mm Vanina ina no anonima co oo oo po a a Novo rfp A p A 200 Dal OojOo nio nin alm aA aA 207 Parameter List 1 If you want to save the settings as the currently selected song data hold down STOP and press REC 2 Stored in the BR 900CD 3 Not Stored Mixer Parameter 1 Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Input Select GUITAR BASS GUITAR BASS MIC LINE SIMUL 3 Recording Mode REC MODE INPUT INPUT BOUNCE MASTERING 3 PAN PAN C00 L50 C00 R50 Chorus Delay Doubling Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Effect Type FX Type CHORUS CHORUS DELAY DBLN Chorus Chorus Send Level Send In Tr1 Tr6 Tr78 0 Rhy 0 0 100 Rate Rate 10 0 100 Depth Depth 10 0 100 Pre Delay Pre Dly 10 0 ms 0 5 50 0 ms Effect level E Level 100 0 100 Delay Delay Send Level Send In Tr1 Tr6 Tr78 0 Rhy 0 0 100 Delay Time Dly Tme 370 ms 10 1000 ms Feedback Feedback 30 0 100 Effect Level E Level 30 0 100 Reverb Send Rev Send 50 0 100 Doubling Doubling Send Level Send In Tr1 Tr6 Tr78 0 Rhy 0 0 100 Delay Time Dly Tme 20 0 ms 0 5 50 0 ms Effect level E Level 100 0 100 Reverb Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Reverb Send level
69. Command All sound off Reset all controllers Local ON OFF All Notes OFF Aux Active Sense Message System Reset X X X X X X X B X X X X X X X X X X X X XOXXXX OO o wm 0 1 Rhythm only Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 219 Specifications BR 900CD Digital Recording Studio O Tracks Track 8 V Track 64 8 V Tracks per each Track Up to 2 tracks can be recorded simultaneously and up to 8 tracks can be played back simultaneously Useful Capacity CompactFlash 32 M 1 G bytes O Data Type HiFi MT2 STANDARD LV1 LONG LV2 O Signal Processing AD Conversion 24 bit AY Modulation AF AD Guitar Bass 24 bit AX Modulation AF AD Mic 1 2 24 bit AX Modulation Line 24 bit AX Modulation Simul DA Conversion 24 bit A Modulation Internal Processing 24 bit digital mixer section AF method Adaptive Focus method Adaptive Focus is a unique Roland BOSS technology that allows the signal noise S N ratios of AD and DA converters to be vastly improved Sample Rate 44 1 kHz Frequency Response 20 Hz to 20 kHz 1 3 dBu Recording Time conversion in one track Data type Capacity HiFi MT2 STD LV1 LONG LV2 32 MB 16 min 19 min 24 min 64 MB 32 min 39 min 49 min 128 MB 65 min 78 min 98 min 256 MB 130 min 156 min 196 min
70. High Mid Gain 12 12 dB Sets the amount of boost or cut in the upper low range High Mid Freq Sets the center frequency for the upper midrange 20 Hz 8 0 kHz High Mid Q 0 3 16 0 Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve for the upper low range s center frequency High Type SHELVG PEAK Sets the equalizer type shelving peaking for the upper range High Gain 12 12 dB Sets the amount of boost or cut in the upper range High Freq 1 4 20 0 kHz Sets the center frequency for the upper range High Q 0 3 16 0 Sets the frequency response curve steepness for the upper range s center frequency 1 Output Gain Sets the overall volume level after equalization 24 12 dB 1 The Low Q Hi Q setting is disabled when SHELVG shelving type equalization is selected for the Low Type or High Type 105 Mastering Tool Kit Parameter Functions Bass Cut Filter This is a filter that cuts unwanted low range noise such as pops On Off OFF ON This setting turns the Bass Cut Filter on off Freq 20 Hz 2 0 kHz This sets the frequency containing popping or other undesirable lower range noises that you want to cut Enhancer This adds more liveliness to the sound putting sounds at the forefront On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the enhancer effect on off Sens 0 100 This sets the amount of Enhancer that is applied Freq 1 0 10 0 kHz Sets the frequency at which the enhancer effect wil
71. Set the tempo of the pattern that is selected by the current step Valid Settings 25 0 250 0 7 When you have finished creating the arrangement press EXIT repeatedly The Play screen is displayed again and the arrangement is saved During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 123 Creating Original Arrangements Inserting a Step Perform the procedure below to insert a new step into the location of the present step Verse y Insert Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 intro verse Pm Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Intro verse verse Fi The parameter value of inserted step will be the same as of the targeted step 1 Make sure performance of the song is stopped then press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is lit 2 Press EDIT The Arrangement Edit screen appears 3 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to STEP and press ENTER The Recording Standby screen appears 4 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to set the location step where the data is to be inserted ii Y M M v RI ETB cr OH CH mm ol c SD m C l mm OO STEP 5 Press CURSOR repeatedly to move the cursor to INSERT and press ENTER To cancel the operation press CURSOR to return to the Arrangement Edit
72. The algorithms that can be selected will differ for each bank To select the algorithm that you wish to use first select the effect bank that includes that algorithm and then refer to the Effect Patch List p 202 and select a patch that uses the desired algorithm The line or lines connecting the algorithm indicate whether the effect features mono output single line or stereo output two lines Example Output Mono Output Stereo COMP PAMP MOD DLY BANK GUITAR 1 COSM GTR AMP This is a multi effect designed for electric guitar This provides an amp sound using a preamp and speaker simulator In case of Phaser output will become monaural COMP PAMP SP EQ WAH NS FV MOD DLY Compressor Preamp Speaker Simulator 4Band Equalizer Wah 4Band Equalizer Wah Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Modulation Flanger Chorus Phaser Pitch Shifter Harmonist Doubling Tremolo Pan Slow Attack Delay 88 2 ACOUSTIC SIM This is a multi effect designed for electric guitar It allows you to use an electric guitar to produce sounds similar to those of an acoustic guitar ASIM COMP EQ INS FV MOD DLY Acoustic Guitar Simulator Compressor 4Band Equalizer Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Modulation Flanger Chorus Phaser Pitch Shifter Doubling Tremolo Pan Delay Insert Effect Parameter Functions 3 BASS SIM Simul
73. To cancel press EXIT NO or UTILITY To cancel press EXIT NO or UTILITY When ENTER is pressed initialization begins When ENTER is pressed initialization begins After the initialization has been completed you are After the initialization has been completed you are returned to the Play screen returned to the Play screen HINT You can perform the same initialization with INIT ALL by holding down INPUT SELECT GUITAR BASS MIC2 MIC and LINE while turning the POWER switch ON then pressing ENTER 194 Initializing the BR 900CD s Settings Initializing the Effect Settings Follow the procedure below to initialize the user effect patches or song effect patches 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to INI and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to U EFX user patch or S EFX song patch and press ENTER The confirmation message Are you sure appears in the display Example when you select U EFX UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 To continue the initiali
74. Track Exchange ococicioonononnonoso 76 Organizing the Songs You ve Recorded essssosesssossesssoosesseeosese 7 7 Copying a Song Song Copy coccciccnononcononocirinanononoso 77 Erasing Songs Song Erase concoconinincncononencnnnnrnnanaoos 77 Saving Memory on the Memory Card Song Optimize ranea tinana 78 Naming Songs Song Name oconicininononnonononinncanoconoso 78 Protecting a Song Song Protect cece 79 Saving the Current Settings to the Song Song Save 79 Creating a Master Tape Disc 80 Recording to a Cassette Tape Recorder Analog Connection ccocococininnonnninnonononionincnnororioninios 80 Recording to a Digital Recorder Digital Connection 80 Disabling digital copying Digital Copy Protect 80 9 Po Section 3 Using Effects ccccccoee 33 EUA a 96 fos oS ak eo A Te Slee PUBIC OR A O 96 Using the Insert Effects 0 004 4 4 84 Foot VOLUME nicotina 96 Bileet Patches and Baris E of LOP Bok A Shh en la 96 Editing Insert Effect Settings 85 Noise SUPPRESS Ot carnada 97 Saving Insert Effects Settings Write 86 Oda venida it 97 Changing How the Insert Effects are Used POS at NO DIA ir 97 According to the Moderato ii 87 Pitch Shifter ccccsscesssscsssssesssssssssussssussssssssseessee 98 Insert Effect Parameter Functions 88 Preamp A ii 98 Algorithm a 88 Ring Modulator s ssssssssssssssssrststsrsistssssssssssnsnnnens 99 BANK GUITAR cecec
75. When you have finished rehearsing move the cursor to STOP and press ENTER You can also quit the rehearsal by pressing STOP Deleting unneeded drum sounds You can delete any drum sounds you do not need during Realtime Recording by holding down DELETE MUTE and pressing the track buttons 1 When you hold down DELETE MUTE and press one or more REC TRACK buttons for the tones you want to delete The corresponding drum sounds are deleted for as long as the buttons are pressed QOQOQO dl SNARE CLOSED HH OPEN HH CK COWBELL TOMA TOM2 lt h DELETE 1 MUTE Changing the metronome volume Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the 2 4 5 indicator is flashing INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press EDIT an y RI Press CURSOR to move the cursor to REAL and press ENTER REAL appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen The Recording Standby screen appears REC MODE REAL ii Y v M Press CURSOR repeatedly to move the cursor to Click REC MODE REAL RHYTHM A v v v
76. cable 3 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press UTILITY 4 Press CURSOR q Il gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears 5 Select BACKUP with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER The Idling screen appears in the display UTIL UTIL You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling screen is displayed Refer to p 212 for instructions on resolving this problem The BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon is added to the computer Ex ge BOSS_BR 900 Removable Disk 6 Delete the BR 900CD ROLAND folder 1 Click the BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon and delete the ROLAND folder 7 Drag the previously backed up BR 864 BR 532 ROLAND folder to the BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon and drop it there UTIL When you have finished backing up the data the Idling screen returns to the display Quit the connection to the computer With Windows XP In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk If this procedure fails to eject the disk
77. have enough free space to hold the files If too little memory is available and the Card Full error message appears there are two approaches you can take to overcome the problem Deleting unneeded data from the memory card 1 Back up the data on the card see p 164 2 Erase unneeded songs see p 77 3 Also erase track data other than that for the tracks you want to export see p 73 4 Export the data 5 Restore the backed up data to the BR 900CD see the Step 5 HINT on p 164 Using a high capacity memory card For more on supported memory cards CompactFlash for the BR 900CD refer to the separate sheet About Memory Cards Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB cable Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press UTILITY Press CURSOR J gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears Select EXPORT with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER UTIL UTIL Press CURSOR lt 1 gt to select the file format then press ENTER WAV This is an audio format used primarily with Windows AIFF This audio format is used primarily with Macintosh Use CURSOR gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V track to be saved When saving in mo
78. simultaneously Both indicators light telling you that simultaneous recording is the sounds from the internal mic and the external mic connected to MIC 1 EXTERNAL now possible i The built in mic is switched off and the input consists You can select the source even when you have two mics j only of the sounds from the external mic connected to connected simultaneously to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 inputs When two recording tracks are selected the GUITAR BASS dd MIC2 is recorded to Track 1 3 5 7 and the MIC1 is recorded 3 Release MIC to Track 2 4 6 8 The internal mic is switched on When one recording track is selected the GUITAR BASS During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line MIC2 and MIC1 are mixed and then recorded of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed You can also make the internal mic settings in the UTILITY system parameters For more details refer to the Utility Parameter List p 198 Recording Playing Back a Song Adjusting the input sensitivity When input from GUITAR BASS MIC2 or MIC is selected adjust their input sensitivity with the relevant SENS knob INPUT GUITAR MIC L LINE R BASS VOCAL v v v SENS O SENS O SENS its PEAK y PEAK Mx O 0 MAX MIN MAX HINT In order to record at a good sound level you should adjust the input levels so that the PEAK indicator lights momentarily when a guitar is strummed stro
79. starts You can also start Realtime Recording by pressing the REC button 6 Set the velocity how hard the note is played for the sounds to be input from the current point by adjusting Fader 1 The current velocity value is briefly indicated where the beat value normally appears ii Y M M v REC MODE CR REAL Velocity 7 Input the drum sounds with the desired timing Use REC TRACK 1 6 to input the drum sounds You can switch the UPPER and LOWER drum sounds by pressing RHYTHM PAD RHYTHM PAD Lit Enables input of the UPPER drum sounds REC TRACK 1 KICK REC TRACK 2 SNARE REC TRACK 3 CLOSED HIHAT REC TRACK 4 OPEN HIHAT REC TRACK 5 CRASH CYMBAL REC TRACK 6 RIDE CYMBAL RHYTHM PAD Flashing Enables input of the LOWER drum sounds REC TRACK 1 CROSS STICK REC TRACK 2 COWBELL REC TRACK 3 TOM1 REC TRACK 4 TOM2 REC TRACK 5 TOM3 REC TRACK 6 TOM4 You can confirm the drum sound currently being input by checking the matrix at the bottom part of the display Indicated in the matrix You can confirm the timing at which each rhythm instrument sounds in the matrix display The V mark in the lower part of the matrix indicates beat timing 127 Creating Original Patterns When a coarse Quantize setting is used the W mark may Rehea rsing recordings indicate half note or quarter not
80. 00 00 00 00 0 23 59 59 29 9 Section of the song recorded a ZERO STOP REW STOP FF Moving through a song using hours minutes seconds frames or sub frames Press q gt to move the cursor to hours minutes seconds frames or sub frames display and turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the current time in the song Moving through a song in measures or beats The current position s measure beat clock are displayed at the location MEAS measure in the display For the demo songs a Arrangement p 37 p 120 has already been created and it is set so that measure beat clock and song is properly synchronized Press q Ml gt to move the cursor to measure or beat display and turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the current measure or beat in the song You cannot move the cursor to Clock cannot be altered Recording Playing Back a Song 1 Preparing the Memory Card The BR 900CD writes the recorded data directly to the inserted memory card Therefore for recording or playback the memory card must be inserted is Memory Cards Supported by Your BR 900CD p 16 Inserting the memory card Nove Before inserting the memory card CompactFlash be sure to first turn off the BR 900CD If a memory card is inserted when the power is turned on the data in the memory card may be destroyed or the memory card may become unusable 1 Insert the memor
81. 26 BG LEAD a ds 98 Accessindicator csi iaiahiis 21 ACOUSTICGTR es 89 Acoustic Guitar Simulator sssini ninen eiei 93 Acoustic Processor cita 93 ACOUSTIC SIM iia eis 88 TATE A 165 176 Bounce ida e atodos 58 Algonthri it R E 35 88 105 BONO e aside nicer E E 45 ALL cececccecceee 72 75 137 146 147 194 TNpuESQUECO diia astas 60 All Bac k p ii A ada 146 To a CD R RW DISC conccnnacnoncnoncnonenoncnnncnoncnnnenon cnn cnn enrn enero 59 dead 147 E tdo tes 97 A N E 162 BRO ticas 61 173 183 ARRANGE PATTERN OFF 37 121 123 126 130 134 A sasdubessens 61 173 183 Arrangement conan 37 120 121 Bi as 99 Arrangement Mode cococcnocnocnnonnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnannanonnonnonnonncncnnnnnos Arrangement Name ciiise irea aiis tior riii aa Attache iii Attack TN AUDIO it os Audio CD menu screen Audio CD player screen Audio CD Write screen Audio Sub MiX oes eeeeeseseneeeseneneseneneneeeneneneneneneneneneneneneeenenenenens CD menu A TT 140 AUTO PUNCH IN cocccccninccnoninnnnnnnononnnnncnnonnnoncn ronca nn rncnnancnnnnnnos CD RY A Ae ie a ee 140 145 AUTO PUNCH ON OFF CD R RW ise srta 6 AUTO PUNCH OUT ccecssescsscssssessssesssuccssuscssercsseresseressecssneessavess Compatibility ccccccsssssssssssssssssssssseessesesssssecssseessssneesseeessssneesees 6 Auto Punching In Out tcc cctsveses tives cies ac ci Oia INCL viii cid AA v Precautions Ain 6 B REMOVING att tdo 7 EDRARW Drive iii 6 140 145 BACKUP i zejshscccidstasiicsdoussigshac
82. 55 37H 87 57H 119 77H 24 18H 56 38H 88 58H 120 78H 25 19H 57 39H 89 59H 121 79H 26 1AH 58 3AH 90 5AH 122 7AH 27 1BH 59 3BH 91 5BH 123 7BH 28 1CH 60 3CH 92 5CH 124 7CH 29 1DH 61 3DH 93 5DH 125 7DH 30 1EH 62 3EH 94 5EH 126 7EH 31 1FH 63 3FH 95 5FH 127 7FH D decimal H hexadecimal Decimal expressions such as used for MIDI channel Bank Select and Program Change will be the value 1 greater than the decimal value given in the above table Since each MIDI byte carries 7 significant data bits each byte can express a maximum of 128 different values Data for which higher resolution is required must be transmitted using two or more bytes For example a value indicated as a two byte value of aa bbH would have a value of aa x 128 bb For a signed number 00H 64 40H 0 and 7FH 63 Le the decimal equivalent will be 64 less than the decimal value given in the above table For a two byte signed number 00 00H 8192 40 00H 0 and 7F 7FH 8191 For example the decimal expression of aa bbH would be aa bbH 40 00H aa x 128 bb 64 x 128 Hexadecimal notation in two 4 bit units is used for data indicated as nibbled The nibbled two byte value of 0a 0b H would be a x 16 b 218 lt Example 1 gt What is the decimal equivalent of 5AH From the above table 5AH 90 lt Example 2 gt What is the decimal equivalent of the 7 bit hexadecimal values 12 34H From the above table 1
83. 8 RHYTHM LR 7 After pressing ZERO to return to the time location 00 00 00 00 0 press REC and then press PLAY to start bounce recording 8 When you are finished recording press STOP During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 9 Lower all TRACK faders except those for Tracks 3 and 4 press PLAY and then check the sounds bounced to Tracks 3 and 4 The pan for tracks 3 and 4 where the music was bounced is set all the way to the left and right respectively 10 If you want to save the settings in the currently selected song hold down STOP and press REC During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Bouncing Directly to a CD R RW Disc Direct CD Bounce With the BR 900CD you can bounce data directly to a CD R RW disc instead of the audio tracks This is a convenient way to keep a copy of song sketches after recording them ote e The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used when tracks are bounced directly to a CD Only the audio tracks are bounced e Due to differences in the characteristics of CD R RW discs there is no way to ensure 100 error free writing For this reason the bouncing may be discontinued if an error occurs in writing to the CD R RW disc Never use this feature with your important r
84. Are you sure appears UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 31 Recording Playing Back a Song 4 To continue with the initializing press ENTER YES To cancel the operation press EXIT NO or UTILITY When ENTER YES is pressed initializing begins When the initializing has been completed Completed appears in the display Keep power on Song creating then appears in the display and a new song is automatically created In this case the data type selected is HiFi MT2 When creation of the song is finished the play screen returns to the display Depending on the capacity of the memory card initializing may take more than ten minutes to complete This is not a malfunction The progress of the initializing is shown in the display Do not turn off the BR 900CD until the initializing has been completed Nove Do not remove the memory card or turn off the BR 900CD while the display shows Keep power on Doing so can destroy the data on the memory card and or render the memory card itself unusable 3 Selecting the Song to Record When the memory card contains more than one song the song that was recorded last is automatically selected To record a new song follow the procedur
85. CURSOR JI gt to select LCD Contrast and adjust the contrast with the TIME VALUE dial IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 After completing the adjustment press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 186 Using a Foot Switch or Expression Pedal You can connect an optional foot switch such as the BOSS FS 5U or Roland DP 2 or expression pedal such as the Roland EV 5 or BOSS FV 300L to the FOOT SW EXP PEDAL jack on the rear panel allowing you to use your foot to control a number of functions MIDIOUT Foorsw USB DiGiTaLouT LINE OUT LINE IN EXP PEDAL OPTICAL the polarity switch shown in the following Foot Switch Expression Pedal FS 5U etc Roland EV 5 etc Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 FV 300L optional By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit With the EV 5 and FV 300L set the MIN volume to 0 You can also use an FS 6 optional for the foot switch If using an FS 6 connect to only one of the FS 6 s jacks either the A or B jack Additionally set the polarity switch to FS 5U The A
86. EFFECTS 2 Press CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor to CHO DLY or REV and press ENTER LOOP FX INPUT EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y LOOP FX INPUT EFFECTS ae eee IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to select the screen for setting the send level of each track appears When using CHO DLY LOOP FX REC MODE INPUT EET EFFECTS When using REV LOOP FX REC MODE INPUT O O O EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send level for each track Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track corresponding to the button pressed If you then press CURSOR lt the screen for setting the input source send level appears in the display if you press CURSOR gt the one for setting the Rhythm send level is displayed LOOP FX REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS ERE S LOOP FX INPUT
87. Keep power on appears in the upper line The power save function is especially helpful when the BR RA A of the display while the lower line shows what is being 900CD is running on battery power processed Perform the procedure given below to activate the power save function Deactivating the power save function 1 P UTILITY ress Press any of the panel buttons to deactivate power save 2 Press CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor to SYS After the power save function is deactivated the Play screen and press ENTER appears UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR g uoIp s 197 Utility Parameter List Utilities include the following e System parameters for setting functions affecting the entire BR 900CD e Sync parameters for setting synchronized performance functions e Scrub parameters for setting scrub functions About the System Parameters This section describes the System parameters 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to SYS and press ENTER 3 Using CURSOR lt J11 D select the System parameter then make the setting with the VALUE TIME dial LCD Contrast Valid Settings 1 21 Initial value 13
88. L50 Both Track 7 and Track 8 are panned left e When set to R50 Both Track 7 and Track 8 are panned right Recording Playing Back a Song Adjusting the tone Track EQ Track EQ is an independent two band equalizer featured on each track that allows you to adjust the high and low frequency tonal qualities separately 1 Press PAN EOQ LOOP PAN EQ EFFECTS 2 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to EQ and press ENTER The EQ settings screen appears REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR J gt and turn the TIME VALUE dial to turn each Track EQ on or off Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track corresponding to the button pressed 4 When changing the EQ settings press CURSOR lt 7 repeatedly to display the parameter screen then use the CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to change the setting s value REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR is For more on the settings content refer to Track EQ Parameter Functions p 112 5 When you have finished making the settings
89. MASTERING EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the patch number to which to write the new patch After you ve selected the destination press ENTER After the save has been completed you are returned to the Mastering Tool Kit selection screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Mastering Tool Kit Parameter Functions Algorithm EQI BCUTIF ENHI IINI EXP 5 COMP MIX LIM OUT Equalizer Bass Cut Filter Enhancer Input Expander Compressor Mixer Limiter Output Parameter List Equalizer On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off Input Gain 24 12 dB Sets the overall volume before passing through the equalizer Low Type SHELVG PEAK Sets the equalizer type shelving peaking for the lower range Low Gain 12 12 dB Sets the amount of boost or cut in the lower range Low Freq 20 Hz 2 0 kHz Sets the center frequency for the lower range Low Q 0 3 16 0 Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve for the lower range s center frequency 1 Low Mid Gain 12 12 dB Sets the amount of boost or cut in the mid low range Low Mid Freq 20 Hz 8 0 kHz Sets the center frequency for the mid low range Low Mid Q 0 3 16 0 Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve for the mid low range s center frequency
90. PLAY to start playback function p 78 to delete unneeded data from the memory card 5 Press REC to punch in at the location where you want to start recording Ma nua l ly Pu nc h i ng l n Out The BR 900CD starts recording 6 To punch out press REC or PLAY again Each time you press REC you punch in and punch out You can use the button on the BR 900CD or a foot switch to punch in or out y so if there is another location that you want to redo then When you are playing an instrument and performing the aes you can punch in again at that location using the same recording by yourself it may be difficult to punch in or out Ed procedure using the button on the BR 900CD If this is the case you can use a separately sold foot switch BOSS FS 5U Roland DP 2 7 Press STOP to stop recording etc and use your feet to punch in and out During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line When using manual punch in out you need to allow for an of the display while the lower line shows what is being interval of at least one second between the punch in and processed punch out points 8 Listen to the re recorded results Return the song to a point earlier than you re recorded and play it back Adjust the volume of track 1 using the TRACK fader 53 Re recording Only a Mistake Punch in out Manually punching in and out using a foot switch NEO In operating the foot sw
91. Phrase Trainer The Phrase Trainer records from the device connected to the input jacks e g CD players or MD player and then allows you to play back a part of that recording repeatedly to allow you to practice that portion again and again You can also slow down the playback to aid in copying fast phrases or remove the guitar solo sound to play along with only the backing instruments as a practice aid ore The Phrase Trainer can also be used with tracks 5 and 6 You cannot perform recording while you are using the Phrase Trainer Time Stretch or Center Cancel The following buttons are disabled while the Phrase Trainer is in use PAN EQ LOOP EFFECTS RHYTHM PAD The Rhythm does not sound when Phrase Trainer is on 1 Record the song you want to copy onto tracks 5 and 6 For how to record with the BR 900CD refer to 7 Basic Recording p 39 2 Repeat the portion of the song that you want to copy This will help you practice and copy a difficult phrase or guitar solo as you can select any portion of the song and have it repeated For how to repeat a portion of the song refer to Repeating Playback Repeat p 51 3 When using the Time Stretch and Center Cancel Function press PHRASE TRAINER to make the indicator light Each time you press PHRASE TRAINER the Phrase Trainer is on the PHRASE TRAINER indicator lights and off the indicator is off When you turn off both the Time
92. Pitch Correction p 116 g uoIp s Mixing the Output from an External MIDI Device with the Output from Your BR 900CD Audio Sub Mix The Audio Sub Mix function allows you to mix the signal input from LINE IN with the signal output to LINE OUT When performing synchronized playback using the BR 900CD and an external MIDI device you can use the Audio Sub Mix function to mix the output from the external MIDI device with that of the BR 900CD internally within the BR 900CD so you won t need an external mixer Also since you can output the signal from the MIDI device without having to first record it to a track on the BR 900CD you can use the BR 900CD tracks more effectively Sub Mixer OFF ZEO 190 Using the Audio Sub Mix function 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR 1 gt to move the cursor to SYS and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y
93. Play screen 138 the drum sounds 5 Press UTILITY Press CURSOR 4 lE gt to move the cursor to TONE and press ENTER Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to PAN and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the drum kit whose panning you want to change then press ENTER S1 5 Song Drum Kit 1 5 UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the drum sound whose panning is being changed and the pan setting UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR When you press RHYTHM PAD causing the indicator to light flash you can then set the drum sounds by tapping REC TRACK 1 6 Pressing ENTER sets this to C00 Center Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Section 5 Using the CD R RW Drive Creating Audio CD Precautions In addition to CD R discs you can also use CD RW discs when making audio CDs However it may not be possible for audio CDs created using CD RW discs to be played on standard CD players Furth
94. Refer to Mastering p 102 12 Turning Off the Power To turn off the power use the procedure described in Turning Off the Power p 28 Nove Before you turn off the BR 900CD make sure to first stop any recording If the BR 900CD is turned off during playback recording where the memory card is being accessed the recorded data mixer settings and effect patch data may be lost 13 Removing the Memory Card nore The power of the BR 900CD must be turned off before removing a memory card If a memory card is inserted when the power is turned on the data in the memory card may be destroyed or the memory card may become unusable 45 46 Section 1 Recording and Playback Recording Selecting the Recording Track 1 Press either 1 7 8 at REC TRACK to select the recording track If the button flashes in red that track is ready for recording a EN EN EB EN GSSSSS The status of each track can be determined from the indicator on the button Off No recorded data exists on the track Green Recorded data exists on track Red The track is selected for recording If a track with existing data is selected for recording the indicator will light alternately in orange and green If INPUT SELECT GUITAR BASS MIC2 or MIC are lit INPUT SELECT mr SIMIL or INPUT SELECT SIMIL OHS Since the input is mono the recording is normally performed
95. Send In Tr1 Tr6 Tr78 0 Rhy 0 0 100 Reverb Type Type HALL HALL ROOM Reverb Time Rev Time 2 0s 0 1 10 0 s Tone Tone 0 12 0 12 Effect Level E Level 50 0 100 Track EQ Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Equalizer On Off EQ Tr1 6 7 8 OFF OFF ON Equalizer Low Gain Lo G Tr1 6 7 8 0 dB 12 0 12 dB Equalizer Low Frequency Lo F Tr1 6 7 8 100 Hz 40 Hz 1 5 kHz Equalizer High Gain HiG Tr1 6 7 8 0 dB 12 0 12 dB Equalizer High Frequency HiF Tr1 6 7 8 1 0 kHz 500 Hz 18 kHz 208 Parameter List Recorder Parameter 1 Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Recording Track Track 1 6 Track 1 2 7 8 V Track V TRACK 1 1 8 Auto Punch On Off OFF OFF ON Auto Punch In Out G E Any time Locator Any time Repeat Any time The settable range for Auto Punch In Out Locator and Repeat will change slightly depending on the MTC Type sync parameter Song Parameter en Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Song Name SONG NAME SONG0000 8 characters Data Type Type HiFi MT2 HiFi MT2 STD LV1 LONG LV2 Song Protect Protect SW OFF OFF ON Digital Copy Protect Copy Prtct OFF OFF ON Phrase Trainer Time Stretch Time Strtch OFF OFF ON 3 Center Cancel CentrCncel OFF OFF ON 3 Center cancel Low Boost Low Boost 0 0 12 3 Center cancel Adjust C Adjust C00 L10 C00 R10 3 System Paramete
96. Speaker Simulator Noise Suppressor Delay MIC Compressor 4Band Equalizer Noise Suppressor Delay 15 VO AC SIM This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a vocal and electric guitar For the guitar you can make the electric guitar sound like an acoustic guitar GUITAR ASIM COMP NS DLY MIC COMP EQ INS DLY GUITAR Acoustic Guitar Simulator Compressor Noise Suppressor Delay MIC Compressor 4Band Equalizer Noise Suppressor Delay 16 VO ACOUSTIC This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a vocal and acoustic guitar For the guitar you can produce a warm sound as though a mic were being used even when an electric acoustic is connected by a direct line GUITAR ACP COMP INS MIC COMP NS GUITAR Acoustic Processor Compressor Noise Suppressor MIC Compressor Noise Suppressor 92 Insert Effect Parameter Functions Parameter List The trademarks listed in this document are trademarks of their respective owners which are separate companies from BOSS Those companies are not affiliated with BOSS and have not licensed or authorized BOSS s BR 900CD Their marks are used solely to identify the equipment whose sound is simulated by BOSS s BR 900CD Acoustic Guitar Simulator This simulates the sound of an acoustic guitar It allows you to use an electric guitar to produce sounds similar to those of an acous
97. This sets the display contrast Foot Switch Assign Foot SW Valid Settings PLAY PUNCH FX Initial value PLAY This sets the function for the foot switch an optional FS 5U or DP 2 connected to the FOOT SW EXP PEDAL jack PLAY Controls the recorder s PLAY and STOP functions PUNCH Controls Punch In Out FX Controls the insert effects On Off Audio Sub Mix Switch Sub Mixer Valid Settings ON OFF Initial value OFF This setting turns the Audio Sub Mix function output mix of the external inputs from LINE IN on and off Internal mic switch Mic Valid Settings EXTERNAL ONBRD EXT Initial value EXTERNAL Use this setting to input only the sound from the external mic connected to MIC 1 or to switch on the internal mic and input a mix of the sounds from the internal and external mics Phantom power switch Phantom SW Valid Settings ON OFF Initial value OFF This setting turns the phantom power on and off 198 AB Quantize AB Qtz Valid Settings ON OFF Initial value OFF This setting turns the Quantize function on and off Quantize is a function that enables you to set the start and end points in measure units when making the settings for repeat playback the repeated portion Remain Information Remain Inf Valid Settings ON OFF Initial value OFF This indicates the remaining amount of recording time available in the display during recording standby or while recordi
98. Tom 3 A2 45 Open hi hat A 2 46 Tom 2 C3 48 Crash cymbal C 3 49 Tom 1 D3 50 Ride cymbal D 3 51 Cowbell G 3 56 System Common Messages MIDI Time Code Quarter Frame Messages If the Sync parameter Sync Gen is set to MTC quarter frame messages of the time code type specified by MTC Type will be transmitted when the BR 900CD is running recording or playing The transmitted time counts are summed to SMPTE MTC Offset Time as the song top is 00 00 00 00 Status Second FIH mmH Onnndddd nnn Message type 0 Frame count LS nibble 1 Frame count MS nibble 2 Seconds count LS nibble 3 Seconds count MS nibble 4 Minutes count LS nibble 5 Minutes count MS nibble 6 Hours count LS nibble 7 Hours count MS nibble dddd 4 bit nibble data Oh FH 0 15 Bit Field is assigned as follows 216 Frame Count XXXYYYYY xxx Reserved 000 yyyyy Frame No 0 29 Seconds Count xxyyyyyy xx Reserved 00 yyyyyy Seconds 0 59 Minutes Count xxyyyyyy xx Reserved 00 yyyyyy Minutes 0 59 Hours Count XYYZZZZZ x Reserved 0 yy Time Code type The time code types defined by the MIDI specification correspond to the BR 900CD Sync parameter MTC Type as follows MIDI specification setting MTC Type setting 0 24 Frames Sec 24 1 25 Frames Sec 25 2 30 Frames Sec Drop Frame 29D 3 30 Frames Sec Non Drop Frame 29N or 30 zzzzz Hours 0 23 Song P
99. Track BQunocicinonconnnnooreennennnnees 110 COSM Comp compressor Limiter 94 Loop Effect Parameter Functions 111 Deseas 95 Parameter LiSt cccccccccccccoccccccccecececccseccscesecesceseceseceeeee 111 Detretter natal dae 95 CHORUS DELAY DBLN Doubling 111 DCL ay sisi cali ita 95 REVERB vanale Aide tevk ia en Sond noch 111 A AA 95 ENANA A he 95 10 Po Track EQ Parameter Functions 112 Parameter Disten a a ana aa atii 112 Fixing the Pitch of Vocals Pitch Correction ccccccccsseeeee 113 The Pitch Correction ssssssssssessesesessesssseressereseereseeees 113 Makeup of the Pitch Correction 0 0 113 Pitch Correction Patches 113 Precautions for Pitch Correction Usage 113 Using the Pitch Correction ccnenonincncononenennnnrnnnananao 114 Setting the Correction Method for Vocal Pitch Pitch Correction Edit ooocncnccicnicicanonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 115 Saving the Pitch Correction Settings Write 115 Making Detailed Settings for Pitch Correction Correction Event Map c ccccscessescseeseseseenens 116 Section 4 Using the Rhythm 119 Using the Rhythmm cccccccseeee 120 About the P tterns sses etessen eses 120 Types Of patteristoa 120 About the ArrangementS omoconcnooncncnnnnnnnnnrornnnnnnnoos 120 Types of arrangementS oconcncncnonnncnnenernrannnnnnnoos 120 Switching the Rhythm Mode cooooncococoncncnnnnoncnnnnnnoos 121 Recordin
100. VO GT AMP 18 DLY SLDN VO GT AMP 19 CMP METL VO GT AMP 20 EQ METAL VO GT AMP 21 DI H STD VO AC SIM 22 EQ S STD VO AC SIM 23 CM H JUM VO AC SIM 24 CM S JUM VO AC SIM 25 DL H ENH VO AC SIM 26 CM S ENH VO AC SIM 27 EQ H PZO VO AC SIM 28 DL S PZO VO AC SIM 29 CMP PZO1 VO AC SIM 30 DL PZO2 VO AC SIM 31 DIR SIM1 VO AC SIM 32 CMP SIM2 VO AC SIM 33 EQ SIM3 VO AC SIM 34 DL SIM4 VO AC SIM 35 CMP SIM5 VO AC SIM 36 COMP AC VO ACOUSTIC 37 COMP CLS VO ACOUSTIC 38 COMP DIS VO ACOUSTIC 39 COMP FAR VO ACOUSTIC 40 COMP DYN VO ACOUSTIC 41 COMP MIC VO ACOUSTIC 42 COMP DIR VO ACOUSTIC 43 NS VNTG VO ACOUSTIC 44 CMP CMP1 VO ACOUSTIC 45 DI COMP2 VO ACOUSTIC 46 CMP CMP3 VO ACOUSTIC 47 NS COMP4 VO ACOUSTIC 48 CMP CMP5 VO ACOUSTIC 49 COMP SML VO ACOUSTIC 50 COMP LRG VO ACOUSTIC 204 Mastering Tool Kit Patch List E MTK MASTERING TOOL KIT No Patch Name 01 Mix Down 02 PreMastr 03 Live Mix 04 Pop Mix 05 DanceMix 06 JingIMix 07 HardComp 08 SoftComp 09 CleanCmp 10 DanceCmp 11 OrchComp 12 VocalCmp 13 Acoustic 14 RockBand 15 Orchestr 16 LowBoost 17 Brighten 18 DJsVoice 19 PhoneVox Pitch Correction Patch List E PCR PITCH CORRECTION No Patch Name P01 Alto P02 Soprano P03 Tenor P04 Baritone P05 Machine 205 Arrangement Pattern List Preset Arrangement List Each of the preset Arrangement except M
101. a normal tape recorder erasing can be considered covering unwanted data by recording emptiness Do not leave a portion of less than 1 0 seconds in length after the erased portion If a portion that short does remain it will end up being silent The three types of Track Erase are given below Erasing the repeated portion AB Perform the procedure given below to erase the portion from the repeat start A to the repeat end B y _4 gt d _StJ_ Repeat Repeat Time Start A End B 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR TL gt to move the cursor to TRK and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR QU gt to move the cursor to ERS and press ENTER 73 Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing Erasing by specifying the time TME MES ME Perform the procedure given below to erase the portion o r r between specific times
102. are input jacks for analog audio signals These jacks are used to connect CD players and other audio devices and keyboards rhythm machines and other external sound modules 5 LINE OUT jacks These are output jacks for the analog audio signal You can connect tape recorders or other recording devices to record the output analog signal from the BR 900CD 6 DIGITAL OUT connector Optical connector for outputting digital audio signals The same sound that is output from LINE OUT is also output from DIGITAL OUT You can connect a DAT recorder or CD recorder to this connector and make digital recordings of the BR 900CD s output 7 USB connector This is the connector for connecting your computer to the BR 900CD with a USB cable LINE OUT LINE IN au 1 e ee SZ des ouch ON w PHANTOM 8 FOOT SW EXP PEDAL jack This is an input jack for connecting a separately sold foot switch BOSS FS 5U Roland DP 2 or expression pedal BOSS Roland EV 5 BOSS FV 300L By using this FOOT SW jack you can start stop playback punch in out and more When an expression pedal is used you can control the depth of insert effects with your foot IS Using a Foot Switch or Expression Pedal p 187 9 MIDI OUT connector Connector for sending MIDI data Connect it to the MIDI IN connector of an external MIDI device rhythm machine or sound module 10 POWER switch This is the power switch It
103. being written to audio CDs so that they are at least four seconds long 213 Error Messages Disc Not Ready Cause There is no CD R RW disc in the drive Solution Place a CD R RW disc in the drive Drive Busy Cause If this message appears after you have been using the memory card with the BR 900CD the data on the card has become fragmented causing delays in reading and writing data Or you could be using memory card with a slow processing speed In cases of unfavorable disc access conditions such as when track editing punch in out recording etc is used to connect phrases musical data of several seconds Solution 1 Reduce the number of tracks that are played back simultaneously Use track bouncing etc to combine tracks or erase data from tracks which you do not need to playback and then try the playback again Solution 2 Reduce the number of tracks that are being recorded simultaneously Solution 3 Reduce the Data Type STD LV1 or LONG LV2 and then try creating the song again Cause There is a problem with the CD R RW disc preventing audio playback Solution If the disc is dirty wipe the disc to clean it then try playing the disc again Event Full Cause The BR 900CD has used up all the events that can be handled by one song Solution Perform the Song Optimize operation p 78 What is an event The smallest unit of memory used by the BR 900CD to store recorded results on a mem
104. character 1 FX2 Level 0 100 Adjust the volume of the voice character 2 Dir Level 0 100 Adjust the volume of the direct sound Insert Effect Parameter Functions Wah The wah effect creates a unique tone by changing the frequency response characteristics of a filter Touch wah creates an automatic wah by changing the filter in response to the volume of the input Pedal wah lets you use an Expression pedal or the like to obtain real time control of the wah effect You can use this effect with the following algorithms when WAH is selected for the 4BAND EQ WAH Type setting COSM GTR AMP COSM BASS AMP COSM COMP GTR COSM COMP BSS BASS MULTI STEREO MULTI On Off OFF ON Turns the touch wah pedal wah effect on off Type Selects either touch wah TOUCH or pedal wah PEDAL TOUCH The effect will function as a touch wah PEDAL The effect will function as a pedal wah E When TOUCH is selected Polarity Selection for the direction in which the filter will change in response to the input UP The frequency of the filter will rise DOWN The frequency of the filter will fall Sens 0 100 This adjusts the sensitivity at which the filter will change in the direction determined by the polarity setting Higher values will result in a stronger response With a setting of 0 the strength of picking will have no effect Frequency 0 100 This adjusts the center frequency of the Wah effect
105. deleted Then press REPEAT again and register repeat start point A and end point B as desired There must be at least one second between repeat start point A and repeat end point B It is not possible to set the end point less than one second away from the start point If you press REPEAT at a position before the repeat start point A that earlier position is then set as the repeat start point A 3 If you want to save the settings in the currently selected song hold down STOP and press REC IS Saving the Current Settings to the Song Song Save p 79 During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 51 Repeating Playback Repeat Setting the Repeat Portion with Accurate Timing Normally the repeat start and end points are registered at the exact position where REPEAT is pressed This may make it difficult for you to set the repeat portion exactly as you desire If this is the case you can use the quantize function to have the time REPEAT is pressed be adjusted to the timing of the song The quantize function allows you to set the timing in one measure units Perform the procedure given below to use the quantize function 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR lt 1 gt to move the cursor to SYS and press ENTER UTIL
106. drive first save the song turn off the power to the BR 900CD connect the AC adaptor then turn the power back on Solution Wrong Disc Cause A disc other than the required CD R RW disc is placed in the drive Solution Place a CD R RW disc in the drive 215 DIGITAL RECORDING STUDIO Model BR 900CD Date Jan 11 2005 Version 1 00 MIDI Implementation 1 TRANSMITTED DATA This message is transmitted according to a SMF data regardless of the followings when the data is played Channel Voice Message Note On If the MIDI parameter RhyMIDI ch is set to 1 16 note numbers velocities corresponding to the Rhythm pattern will be transmitted on the MIDI channel that is specified for the Rhythm Status Second Third 9nH mmH 1H n MIDI Channel No mm Note No 0H FH ch 1 ch 16 00H 7FH 0 127 Il Velocity 01H 7FH 1 127 Note Off If the MIDI parameter RhyMIDI ch is set to 1 16 note numbers corresponding to the Rhythm pattern will be transmitted on the MIDI channel specified for the Rhythm Status Second Third 8nH mmH 1H n MIDI Channel No 0H FH ch 1 ch 16 mm Note No 00H 7FH 0 127 11 Velocity 40H 64 ONotes sounded by the Rhythm correspond to note numbers as follows Rhythm Tone Note Number Cross Stick G1 31 Metronome click A1 33 Metronome bell A 1 34 Kick C2 36 Snare D2 38 Tom 4 F2 41 Closed hi hat F 2 42
107. in an enclosed vehicle near a heating f coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft S duct on top of heat generating equipment or RD drinks etc to penetrate the unit are NI e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Humid or are e Immediately turn the power off remove the AC adaptor from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the e Exposed to rain or are e Dusty or are e Subject to high levels of vibration Information sheet when O e The AC adaptor or the power supply cord has Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is been damaged or level and sure to remain stable Never place it on e If smoke or unusual odor occurs stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces A Objects have fallen into or liquid has been ANA ET crios spilled onto the unit or Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with e The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise the unit Also make sure the line voltage at the has become wet or installation matches the input voltage specified on The unit does not appear to operate normally or the AC adaptor s body Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity or be designed for a different voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock exhibits a marked change in performance e In households with small children an adu
108. in out Before you begin recording you must register the locations at which punch in and punch out will occur automatically 1 Register the location where you want to punch in Move the location where you want to punch in and press AUTO PUNCH IN to register that location for automatic punch in At this time the AUTO PUNCH IN indicator lights telling you that the punch in position is registered AUTO PUNCH____ BOO DELETE gt If the AUTO PUNCH IN indicator is lit you will automatically move to the registered punch in time when this button is pressed 2 Register the location where you want to punch out Move the location where you want to punch out and press AUTO PUNCH OUT to register that location for automatic punch out At this time the AUTO PUNCH OUT indicator lights telling you that the punch out position is registered AUTO PUNCH____ ON OFF IIN OUT LOCATOR DELETE lm If the AUTO PUNCH OUT indicator is lit you will automatically move to the registered punch out time when this button is pressed MEM If you want to punch in out at a previously set locator point press LOCATOR to move to the locator point p 64 and press AUTO PUNCH IN or AUTO PUNCH OUT Re recording Only a Mistake Punch in out Erasing a registered auto punch in out location E To erase an auto punch in location press and hold AUTO PUNCH ON OFF and
109. inch A setting suitable for VO DRV vo drv Open back enclosure 12 inch A setting suitable for VO DRV BG STK Large Sealed enclosure 12 inch A setting suitable for BG LEAD bg stk Large sealed enclosure 12 inch A setting suitable for BG LEAD MS STK Large sealed enclosure 12 incl Asetting suitable for MS ms stk Large sealed enclosure 12 incl Asetting suitable for MS METAL Large dual stack 12inch Comments o unit ojo Io unit Io Uni ojo O units O units oy Re O units O units four units four units ojojojo four units E With COSM BASS AMP or COSM COMP BSS algorithms SP Simulator Speaker Microphone Cabinet Unit Setting AC Large sealed enclosure 15 inch two units Comments A setting suitable for AC A setting suitable for AC A setting suitable for AMG A setting suitable for AMG Large sealed enclosure 15 inch two units Large sealed enclosure 10 inch eight units Large sealed enclosure 10 inch eight units Mic Set CENTER 1 10 cm This simulates the microphone position CENTER simulates the condition that the microphone is set in the middle of the speaker cone 1 10 cm means that the microphone is moved away from the center of the speaker cone Mic Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the microphone Dir Level 0 10
110. is too smooth in some cases it may appear as if no correction has been applied For natural sounding pitch corrections set the value in a range between 20 and 40 4 5 Saving the Pitch Correction Settings Write Modified Pitch Correction settings are saved by writing them Press EXIT The Pitch Correction s patch selection screen will appear EFFECTS INPUT 6 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR To save your modified settings carry out the procedure described in Saving the Pitch Correction Settings Write below together under a new patch name You cannot write patches while songs are being recorded or played back Ifyou do not need to change patch name go to step 4 At the Pitch Correction patch selection screen press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to NAME and press ENTER The Patch Name Setting screen appears EFFECTS INPUT 6 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM ER Use CURSOR lt 1 gt and the TIME VALUE dial to enter the patch name Press ENTER to switch between uppercase and lowercase After you have completed entering the effect settings and patch name as desired press EXIT to return to the Patch selection screen Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to WRITE and press ENTER
111. it songs may not play back properly all the way to the end If you want to ensure that songs play back correctly finalize p 143 the disc MEM Songs recorded on an audio CD are often referred to as tracks Be careful to avoid confusing these tracks with the BR 900CD s audio tracks 1 Insert the audio CD into the CD R RW drive 2 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to AUDIO and press ENTER The Audio CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press CURSOR QU gt to move the cursor to PLA Y IMP and press ENTER The Audio CD player screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Creating Audio CD 5 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the song that you want to listen to INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 6 Press PLAY The message Now Playing will appear and playback of the audio CD will begin REC MODE I
112. may be dangerous in the event of lightning Inserting Batteries 1 Make sure that the power of the BR 900CD is turned off 2 Remove the battery cover on the rear panel When turning the unit upside down get a bunch of newspapers or magazines and place them under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls Also you should try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls get damaged When turning the unit upside down handle with care to avoid dropping it or allowing it to fall or tip over 3 Being careful not to reverse the polarity insert six AA dry cell batteries into the battery compartment BOSS recommends using longer life alkaline batteries Do not mix new batteries with partially used batteries and do not mix batteries of differing types Do not use rechargeable batteries 4 Close the battery cover When the battery power becomes low Battery Low appears in the display When this message appears replace the existing batteries with new ones as soon as possible 23 24 Connecting Peripheral Devices Make connections as shown in the diagram below When making any connections make sure that all devices are turned off CD Recorder etc BOSS Corporation move BR 900CD DC IN POWER USE BOSS PSC __ ADAPTOR ONLY E AC Adaptor PSC series f
113. nu ied ea Ro tie ieee 192 PICKUP o 93 PIEZO socks Ass oe i eRe Se ia 93 Pitch canciller 98 PITCH CORRECTION aa 114 Pitch Correction Pitch Correction Edituconi rias a 115 Pith Correction Pateh mirada icr ri 205 Pitch Shiferiaccusiinini aaae e iota ESEE ANAS 98 PEAY ui r e E a 29 143 152 PLAY EA E T EAA T T 187 Play Screen PLAY IMP usina Playback Audio CD e riosta 142 Dem0 SONS envidias 29 A ESTO 51 PLAYER osito non A A 96 Playing O 151 Poli A Re it A ee 101 Posti Eli minei Net 97 Power A oe See ee ess 28 Power Save ia 197 POWER Switch 32 cssicscssscasssesedistassaisceonssasszessdsacssccasvacagsacaessgess 22 28 PO Wer Ve ii tas 197 198 Pte Dita td 94 111 Pre Filter a aaa oa 97 POP dais 98 Preset Arrangement mommcconconnonccnnnncncnnninononanonarocnnanncnna 38 120 206 Preset Drum Kitts 134 Presets 36 84 113 Preset Patterns a ads 38 120 207 Preview 65 136 148 149 172 182 Preview SW iceasstassse dosssceediajeviisdassscdcbdassctde sodeabieaysieeh iagiscitzssyeade 199 Protecting REG MODE Mutaci n 40 45 50 REC MODE visitas dnote 21 39 58 102 REETRACK pura creia rosales 39 41 48 REC TRACK buttons ecmoccccncccnoncnconnnconncanonccconecionacinnnos 127 131 134 32 48 80 NAO 121 E EEEE E 39 Recording Standby screen ccscesessesseseseeseeessseseseeseeeeatees 123 126 Recording TIME iess aiie n don 32 RECOMER E A E E T O EE E E T E T 147 RECOVER is 147
114. of the late 70s to 80s characterized by a distinctive mid range MS 1 2 1 2 The sound of a large tube amp stack that was indispensable to the British hard rock of the 70 s and is used to this day by many hard rock guitarists A trebly sound created by using input I of the guitar amp A trebly sound created by using input I of the guitar amp The sound of connecting inputs I and II of the guitar amp in parallel creating a sound witha stronger low end than I SLDN A tube amp sound with versatile distortion usable in a wide range of styles METAL The sound of a large tube amp suitable for heavy metal METAL D A high gain and powerful metal sound Insert Effect Parameter Functions MH With COSM BASS AMP or COSM COMP BSS algorithms AC It produces the vintage sound of an early transistor amp AMG It produces the sound of a large double stack vacuum tube amp with ultra lows and a crisp edge Volume 0 100 Adjusts the volume and distortion of the amp Bass GUITAR AMP 0 100 BASS AMP 100 100 Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range Middle GUITAR AMP 0 100 BASS AMP 100 100 Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range Ifyou have selected MATCH or VO DRV as the type the middle control will have no effect Treble GUITAR AMP 0 100 BASS AMP 100 100 Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range Pre
115. optimum setting according to the threshold Thres and ratio Ratio settings In addition since lengthening the attack Attack setting may result in distortion a buffer margin of 6 dB is provided Adjust the Mixer level as needed Mixer Adjusts the volume of each frequency band Lo Level 80 6 dB Sets the volume level of the lower range after the signal passes through the expander and compressor Mid Level 80 6 dB Sets the volume level of the midrange after the signal passes through the expander and compressor Hi Level 80 6 dB Sets the volume level of the upper range after the signal passes through the expander and compressor Limiter This suppresses high level signals to prevent distortion On Off OFF ON Sets the limiter to ON or OFF Thres 24 0 dB Adjust this as appropriate for the input signal from your bass Attack 0 100 ms This sets the time it takes for the limiter to go into effect once the input level exceeds the threshold level Release 50 5000 ms Adjusts the time until when the limiter will turn off after the input level falls below the threshold level Output This makes settings that affect the overall output Level 80 6 dB Sets the volume level of the overall sound after the signal passes through the limiter Soft Clip Off On This suppresses noticeable distortion occurring with heavy use of the compressor limiter effect Dither OFF 24 8 BIT This prevents the act
116. pitch is shown in the upper left of the display and the note name in the right The lower part will display a tuning guide to indicate the difference between the input sound and the displayed note Reference Pitch Note Name v E m O E Oo E A Tuning Guide If the difference between the input pitch and the correct pitch is less than 50 cents the tuning guide will indicate the amount of the difference Watch the tuning guide Watch the tuning guide as you tune the instrument so that the vertical line is shown at the V mark Tuning an Instrument Tuner Tuning 1 Play a note using the string you are tuning The screen will indicate the note name that is closest to the pitch of the string you played Cleanly play a single note only on the string you wish to tune N Continue tuning until the pitch name of the string you are tuning appears in the display Normal tuning 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st string string string string string string string Guitar B E A D G B E Bass B E A D G 3 Watch the tuning guide as you tune the instrument so that the vertical line is shown at the Y mark Tf the pitch of the string is within 50 cents of the correct pitch the tuning guide will indicate the discrepancy between the actual and the correct pitches Your i
117. press EXIT or PAN EQ to return to the Play screen Adding width to the sound Loop Effect The BR 900CD features chorus delay and doubling any one of these three can be selected at any one time as loop effects and includes reverb as well Effective use of these allows you to add greater breadth to the sound What is a loop effect Effects connected to the send and return of mixer effects are called loop effects You can adjust the depth of the effect by changing the send level of each mixer channel equivalent to the tracks of the BR 900CD Since the send levels for each track are separate you can change the depth individually This allows you to for example have a deep reverb on the vocals and slight reverb on the drums or any such combination Opposed to insert effects p 35 which are applied to specific sounds loop effects are applied to the complete track You cannot use chorus delay and doubling simultaneously Any one may be selected while loop effects are in use 1 Press LOOP EFFECTS LOOP PAN EQ EFFECTS Si 2 Press CURSOR q lE gt to move the cursor to CHO DLY or REV and press ENTER LOOP FX REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y LOOP FX REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS O ee
118. previous state undo and redo functions is Canceling an Operation Undo Redo p 57 Quick movement to a point You can assign a marker to any point in a track that you wish locator function If you assign markers to locations such as the end of the opening or the beginning of a solo you will be able to move instantly to the point where you wish to begin listening Ss Registering Time Locator p 64 Equipped with chromatic tuner A0 to B6 sound range Your BR 900CD is also equipped with a chromatic tuner so that you can tune your guitar or bass while it is still connected to the BR 900CD p 188 Phrase Trainer function When you play back a song you have recorded from the CD player or the MD player you can slow down the tempo without changing the pitch Also you can remove the sound you hear at the center such as vocals and guitar solo from the song p 192 Full complement of input connectors jacks Your BR 900CD is equipped with the input jacks shown below GUITAR BASS This high impedance input jack allows you to directly connect your guitar or bass accepts 1 4 phone plugs MICI These jacks allow a mic to be connected Both a TRS phone jack and an XLR jack are provided Connect your mic here if recording vocals or narration A built in microphone is also included so you can perform recordings with the BR 900CD even when you don t have a microphone connected The
119. rate This is used for video audio devices and film in the US 1 Press UTILITY 6 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return 2 Press CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor to to the Play screen SYNC and press ENTER During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 7 Just as when you synchronize a MIDI sequencer using o external MTC when you use the MCK you can 7 synchronize the MIDI sequencer using the external N T2945 678mm LF MIDI clock y 8 Get the MIDI song data ready for playback When the BR 900CD begins playing the MIDI sequencer Mi will also begin playing in sync with it IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR What are drop and non drop formats There are two types of format used by NTSC video 3 Press CURSOR lt 1 gt to select Offset and turn cassette recorders non drop and drop With the non the TIME VALUE dial to set the time offset drop format the frames are continuous On the other hand in order to support NTSC color video the drop format drops the first two frames of every minute excluding minutes 10 20 30 40 and 50 UTIL In most video and audio production since formats with 6
120. required to finish importing the file During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 170 Loading Drum Sounds from WAV AIFF Files Tone Load You can import WAV and AIFF files on your computer and load these as drum sounds TONE LOAD ore The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used when tracks are bounced directly to a CD p 59 O Wave data in the following formats can be imported You cannot import wave data in other formats e WAV or AIFF format e Mono or Stereo e 8 bit or 16 bit e Sampling Rate 44 1 kHz O Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded O Extremely short waveform data less than approximately 100 msec cannot be loaded O The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be ignored O Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and the extension AIF to imported AIFF files O You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a single drum kit Example Kick 3 seconds snare 3 seconds crash cymbal 7 seconds Total 13 seconds Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as mono sounds with the left and right sides mixed 1 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB cable 2 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press UTILITY 3 Press CURSOR J Il gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears 4 Select BACKUP
121. screen When you press ENTER the display indicate Insert then return to the Recording Standby screen Erasing a Step This erases the content of the currently selected step The content of the following steps are brought forward to fill the erased step Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Intro verse Fin verse 4 Erase Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Intro Verse Verse No further data can be deleted when only Step 1 remains 1 Make sure performance of the song is stopped then press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is lit 2 Press EDITI The Arrangement Edit screen appears 3 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to STEP and press ENTER The Recording Standby screen appears 4 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to set the step to be erased RHYTHM A RI REC MODE CR OH CH O O SD El C KI w LL STEP 5 Press CURSOR gt repeatedly to move the cursor to ERASE and press ENTER To cancel the operation press CURSOR q repeatedly to return to the Arrangement Edit screen When you press ENTER the display indicate Erase then return to the Recording Standby screen Naming Arrangements You can edit the name of the currently selected arrangement You can use up to eight characters in naming arrangements 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly
122. song numbers nore Card Full may appear in the display when you use Song Recover in an attempt to load a song that was in the process of being recorded when the memory card became full Card Full was displayed If this occurs use All Recover to load the song Loading all saved songs to a memory card All Recover note Note that executing All Recover deletes all of the data existing on the memory card Be sure to back up any required data before executing All Recover 1 Insert a CD R RW disc containing backup songs into the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding 2 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to DATA and press ENTER The Data CD menu screen will appear 4 Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to RECOVER and press ENTER The Recover menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to ALL and press ENTER The message Are you sure will appear 6 Press ENTER YES The recovered songs will begin When the message Completed appears it indicates that the recovered songs has been successfully complet
123. that every MIDI device can handle every single type of MIDI message In reality two MIDI compatible devices can only exchange the MIDI messages that are supported by both The user s manual for any MIDI compatible device will contain a MIDI Implementation Chart and this chart allows you to quickly find out which MIDI messages the device in question can transmit and receive When two MIDI devices are to be used together you should compare their MIDI implementation charts to make sure that exchange of the required MIDI messages will be possible For more detailed information regarding the BR 900CD s MIDI characteristics refer to MIDI Implementation p 216 Synchronizing with MIDI Devices Using the Rhythm to Play an 4 Press CURSOR gt to select RhyMIDI ch External MIDI Sound Module Perform the procedure given below to use a MIDI sound module and choose the sounds you desire for the Rhythm o 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the BR 900CD and your 24 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR MIDI sound module as shown in the diagram Pa Oo o o 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the MIDI channel EA COT 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 16 o emoboooss Gece e U MIDI Sound Module MIDI IN If you select OFF note messages of the Rhythm will not be transmitted MIDI OUT 6 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to
124. the WAV and AIFF files on the memory card are displayed WAV files are indicated by the symbol W A indicates AIFF files IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 11 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the WAV or AIFF file with the drum sound to be loaded 182 MEMO You can preview the sound of the WAV or AIFF file to be loaded by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing ENTER 12 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the load destination song drum kit S1 5 Song Drum Kit 1 5 UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 13 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the load destination song drum sound then press ENTER The load is executed To cancel press EXIT UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed WAV and AIFF files in the TONELOAD folder are retained without being deleted even after this procedure is completed If these files are no longer needed connect the BR 900CD to your computer via USB and use the computer to delete the files Any files that are retained will use the required amount of memory on the memory card Using the
125. the cards e Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the contact portion of the cards e Do not bend drop or subject cards to strong shock or vibration e Do not keep cards in direct sunlight in closed vehicles or other such locations storage temperature 25 to 85 C e Do not allow cards to become wet e Do not disassemble or modify the cards Copyright e Unauthorized recording distribution sale lending public performance broadcasting or the like in whole or in part of a work musical composition video broadcast public performance or the like whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party We assume no responsi bility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Screen shots in this documents are reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation Windows is known officially as Microsoft Windows operating system Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc All product names mentioned in this document are trade marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Before Using CD R RW Discs Two different types of recordable disc c
126. the correction to end with the TIME VALUE dial Smth Note Time Correction Speed EFFECTS INPUT 6 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 9 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to NOTE and specify OFF 10 Have the Recorder play the song from the beginning The correction is first applied at the point in the song specified in Step 4 with the correction ending at the point specified in Step 8 11 To delete any unnecessary correction events move the cursor to the event and press DELETE MUTE The correction event is deleted nore You cannot delete the correction event at the beginning of the song If this correction event is unneeded rather than deleting it just set the function to OFF 12 Repeat Steps 3 11 as needed to specify the edited range 13 After you have completed entering the settings press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen Note You can only save a Correction Event Map to a single song Even if you switch the patch with the pitch correction the Correction Event Map remains unchanged 117 Section 4 Using the Rhythm Using the Rhythm The Rhythm is a dedicated Rhythm track that can not only play back Rhythm sounds as a guide during recording you can also use it to play internal Rhythm patterns and original user created Rhythm patterns and to play and record these patterns as
127. then press IN E To erase an auto punch out location press and hold AUTO PUNCH ON OFF and then press OUT When the settings are erased the AUTO PUNCH ON OFF IN and OUT indicators go out Ifyou want to save the auto punch in out settings in the currently selected song hold down STOP and press REC During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed How to record As an example of use the explanation below assumes you are using the auto punch in out to re record a portion of track 1 which is a track to which you have already recorded 1 Press REC TRACK 1 REC TRACK 1 lights alternately in orange and green 2 Place the fader for track 1 at the location shown below 3 Make sure that the AUTO PUNCH ON OFF indicator is dark If it is lit press AUTO PUNCH ON OFF to make the indicator go dark 4 Start playback and adjust the volume of the input source using the INPUT LEVEL knob Listen to the track you will be re recording and the input source and adjust the volume of the input source using the INPUT LEVEL knob so that it is the same level as the track 5 Move to a position before where you want to start re recording and press AUTO PUNCH ON OFF The indicator lights up showing that the auto punch in and out have been set 6 Press REC to place the BR 900CD in recording standby and then press
128. to be placed at the ending of a song Song patterns 001 S100 These are patterns whose data is rewritable and up to 100 different patterns for each song can be stored on memory cards BR 900CD Memory Card About the Arrangements Arrangements are sequences of patterns arranged in the order they are performed and with the tempo set Types of arrangements Preset arrangements PO1 P50 These are internal arrangements stored in the BR 900CD that have already been prepared for use There are 50 patterns categorized by musical genre such as rock and jazz You cannot change and overwrite Preset arrangement data In each Preset arrangement except for Metro 4 4 a BREAK rest of three measures is played after the END ending and then the V1 verse 1 is played repeatedly is Preset Arrangement List p 206 Song arrangements S01 S05 These are arrangements whose data is rewritable and up to5 different arrangements for each song can be stored on memory cards BR 900CD Memory Card Song Preset Arrangement Song Arrangement 120 Using the Rhythm Switching the Rhythm Mode The Rhythm mode switches each time ARRANGE PATTERN OFF is pressed ARRANGE PATTERN OFF Lit Arrangement Mode Performance and programming of arrangements is enabled Press PLAY to start the performance of the arrangement You cannot play back or record during programming ARRANGE PA
129. use the procedure below 1 2 Click the a icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message displayed there Task Bar 4 Task Tray Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears With Windows 2000 Me 1 2 3 In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk N Click the s icon in the task tray then click the O Stop USB Disk drive message displayed there ce e N Task Bar 4 4 Task Tray Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears 173 9 Press the BR 900CD s EXITI The USB screen returns to the display Ifyou press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER returns the USB screen to the display UTIL 10 When backup of the data is complete press EXIT to return to the Play screen At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer 174 Backing Up the BR 900CD s Data 1 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB Hin cable Reading backup data back into the BR 900CD from PC Recover 2 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press When restoring data backed up on a computer to the BR UTILITY 900CD drag t
130. value threshold You can get the same effect achieved with the compressor by setting the threshold at a low value The BR 900CD uses COSM technology to model four types of compressor limiter in which the compressor and limiter functions are combined On Off Sets the compressor limiter to ON or OFF Type Selects the compressor limiter type BOSS Cmp Models the BOSS CS 3 compact effects processor OFF ON D Comp Models the MXR dyna comp Rack160 Models the dbx 160 VtgRack Models the UREI 1178 Attack with BOSS Cmp D Comp 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the picking attack when the strings are played Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Sustain with BOSS Cmp D Comp 0 100 Boosts low level signals adjusting the time over which sounds are sustained Higher values deepen the effect resulting in a longer sustain Threshold with Rack160 0 100 Adjust this as appropriate for the input signal from your bass The compression effect is applied to input above the level set here The smaller the value set here the lower the level at which the limiter effect kicks in Input with VtgRack 0 100 Controls the input level Increasing the value will produce a deeper effect Ratio with Rack160 1 1 20 1 INF 1 with VtgRack 4 1 20 1 Adjusts the limiter compression ratio Higher ratio create a stronger compression effect Attack Time When set to VtgRack 0 100 This adju
131. will rewind while you hold down the button FF The song will fast forward while you hold down the button REPEAT You can specify a region that you wish to hear and hear it repeatedly p 51 This feature is useful if you want to repeatedly play back the recording between the punch in and out locations p 53 until you are satisfied or use the phrase trainer p 192 to try to copy a difficult phrase recorded from a CD or the like STOP Stops recording or playback of the song PLAY Plays back songs When REC is pressed and the REC indicator is flashing press PLAY to start recording During recording or playback the indicator on the button lights in green REC Recording This is the Record button In addition to the Recording operation it is also used for manual punch in out While in recording standby the indicator on this button flashes in red and during recording it lights in red 4 Track Fader section TRACK MIXER fader 1 6 7 8 For controlling the volumes of each track during playback Hereafter the TRACK MIXER faders shall be referred to as the TRACK faders RHYTHM fader Adjusts the volume of the Rhythm MASTER fader Controls the overall volume of the BR 900CD V TRACK Use this button to call up the screen for selecting a V Track IS What are V Tracks p 14 Changing V Tracks p 49 REC TRACK Recording Track buttons 1 6 7 8 Use these buttons to selec
132. wish to create a new effect sound you should first select an existing patch that is closest to the sound you want and then edit its settings If you wish to save the effect settings that you edited save them as a user patch or song patch 1 Press EFFECTS The Effect screen appears P Preset S Song U User Algorithm Name ls Number Patch Name EFFECTS INPUT EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Select an effect patch Use CURSOR gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the bank Preset Song User and patch number 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to EDIT and press ENTER The Edit Effect screen appears and the algorithm the connection sequence for the effects being used is displayed EFFECTS INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y EFFECTS INPUT EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR E When effect patches in the SIMUL bank are selected GTR and MIC appear Move the cursor to GTR to modify a guitar use effect or to MIC to modify an effect for use with a mic then press ENTER EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT 6
133. with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER The Idling screen appears in the display UTIL UTIL You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling screen is displayed Refer to p 212 for instructions on resolving this problem The BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon is added to the computer Ex Import the WAV or AIFF file 1 Click the BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon 2 Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the TONELOAD folder in the ROLAND folder UTIL When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF files the Idling screen returns to the display Quit the connection to the computer With Windows XP In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk Z UOID9G If this procedure fails to eject the disk use the procedure below 1 Click the Ss icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message displayed there Task Bar 4 Task Tray 171 2 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears With Windows 2000 Me 1 In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 9
134. write errors can occur as a result Notes When Using Mics When you insert a CD R RW disc to built in CD R RW drive When you insert a CD R RW disc to built in CD R RW drive lock the CD R RW disc at correct position according to Insert a CD R RW disc below Please be careful to lock a CD R RW disc correctly Unless it is possible that the disc tray is stuck and unable to remove a CD R RW disc Inserting a CD R RW disc 1 Press the eject button and open a disc tray 2 Pull outa disc tray 3 Locate the position of center hole of CD R RW disc at stopper of CD R RW drive 4 Press the CD R RW disc downward The CD R RW disc will be locked by 3 clips of the stopper As a certain amount of force must be applied for insertion always confirm that the CD R RW disc has been correctly inserted Failure to properly and fully insert a disc can result in an inability to carry out writing correctly 5 Press disc tray until it is locked in the BR 900CD Removing a CD R RW disc 1 Hold the stopper downward and remove a CD R RW disc from outer rim If a disc tray does not open If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive such as due to a power failure the disc tray cannot be opened by pressing the eject button In this case you can insert a piece of wire to force the tray open Emergency eject hole Make sure the BR 900CD s power has been turned OFF before attempting to use the eme
135. your recorder cassette tape recorder CD recorder etc and making a master tape or a master disc Recording to a Cassette Tape Recorder Analog Connection 1 Connect the BR 900CD s LINE OUT jacks to the cassette tape recorder s input jacks Cassette tape Recorder OOOO DOCOdOo 2 Put the cassette tape recorder in record mode 3 Press PLAY on the BR 900CD and start the playback of the recorded data Recording to a Digital Recorder Digital Connection 1 Connect the BR 900CD s DIGITAL OUT connector to the digital recorder s input connector Digital Recorder CD Recorder etc ra a o panaman 2 Set the digital recorder so it is ready to record digital signals 3 Put the digital recorder in record mode 4 Press PLAY on the BR 900CD and start the playback of the recorded data Disabling digital copying Digital Copy Protect When recording from the BR 900CD to a digital recorder you can prevent further digital copying of the master tape or disc to any other digital recorders 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR ll gt to move the cursor to EDT and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR
136. 0 Adjust the volume of the direct sound 100 Tremolo Pan Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter is set to TRM PAN On Off This parameter turns the tremolo pan effect on off Mode Selects tremolo or pan also selects how the effect is applied TRM TRI The volume will change cyclically Smooth change will be produced TRM SQR The volume will change cyclically Abrupt change will be produced PAN TRI The sound will be moved cyclically between left and right Smooth change will be produced PAN SQR The sound will be moved cyclically between left and right Abrupt change will be produced PAN TRI and PAN SQR are obtained with stereo recording using two tracks OFF ON Rate 0 100 Adjust the rate at which the effect will operate Depth 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the effect Voice Transformer This controls the formants allowing a variety of voice characters to be created This adds two voice characters with differing formants to the direct sound On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the voice transformer effect on off Formant 100 100 Adjust the formant of the voice character 1 Formant2 100 100 Adjust the formant of the voice character 2 FX1 Level 0 100 Adjust the volume of the voice
137. 0 REC MODE INPUT 6 M 24 EFFECTS ae 0 o A IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 6 Press CURSOR TH gt and the TIME VALUE dial to adjust each track s send level Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track corresponding to the button pressed The send level is the volume level of the signal sent from each respective track to each effect and you can change the amount of effect applied by adjusting the send level The send level for each track is also indicated in the lower row of the display LOOP FX 0 REC MODE INPUT 6 LI ILL CI IIA 24 EFFECTS C E OOO IN 123456 7 8 RHYTHM LR o Send level of the each tracks 7 After you have completed adjusting the send level press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen MEMO You can switch screens in the following sequence with the screen cycling to the next screen each time LOOP EFFECTS is pressed Loop Effects selection screen Send Level screen gt Type screen Play screen Recording Playing Back a Song 11 Bouncing Putting multiple tracks together 1 Press REC MODE repeatedly until BOUNCE is indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen Record
138. 00 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk 2 Click the Ss icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message displayed there Task Bar 4 4 Task Tray 3 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears Press BR 900CD s EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER and then EXIT returns the Play screen to the display UTIL At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer Press UTILITY Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to TONE and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 172 10 Press CURSOR q lE gt to move the cursor to CARD and press ENTER The names of the WAV and AIFF files on the memory card are displayed WAV files are indicated by the symbol W A indicates AIFF files UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 11 Turn the TI
139. 00 icon into the trash Press the BR 900CD s EXIT The USB screen returns to the display If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER returns the USB screen to the display UTIL 10 When backup of the data is complete press EXIT to return to the Play screen At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer Z UOID9G 183 184 Section 8 Other Convenient Functions Adjusting the Display Contrast Depending on where the BR 900CD is situated the display contents may be difficult to read If this is the case perform HINT If you press and hold UTILITY while turning the TIME VALUE dial you will be able to change the contrast in real time Choose the method that best suits the BR 900CD s setup the procedure given below to adjust the contrast 1 to 21 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR q Il gt to move the cursor to SYS and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press
140. 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM t R y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM t R 3 Press CURSOR COPY and press ENTER 11 to move the cursor to IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM L R y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM L R 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the copy destination drum kit then press ENTER P1 9 Preset Drum Kit 1 9 S1 5 Song Drum Kit 1 5 UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM t R 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the copy destination drum sound then press ENTER Select ALL if you want to copy all of the drum sounds in the kit UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the copy destination drum kit then press ENTER UTIL IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the copy destination song drum sound then press ENTER Copying is executed To cancel press EXIT UTIL
141. 2H 18 and 34H 52 Thus 18 x 128 52 2356 lt Example 3 gt What is the decimal equivalent of the nibbled expression OA 03 09 0DH From the above table 0AH 10 03H 3 09H 9 ODH 13 Thus the result is 10 x 16 3 x 16 9 x 16 13 41885 lt Example 4 gt What is the nibbled equivalent of the decimal number 1258 16 1258 16 78 10 16 4 14 0 4 From the above table 0 00H 4 04H 14 0EH 10 0AH Thus the result is 00 040E0AH MIDI Machine Control MMC Command Information Field Response Reference Commands Transmitted Command Action 01H STOP STOP 03H DEFERRED PLAY PLAY 06H RECORD STROBE REC PUNCH IN 07H RECORD EXIT PUNCH OUT ODH MMC RESET RESET 44H 01H LOCATE TARGET LOCATE MIDI Implementation Chart DIGITAL RECORDING STUDIO Date Jan 11 2005 Model BR 900CD MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 00 2 SYNC parameter Sync Gen MTC only Chan chang 110 3 SYNC parameter Sync Gen MCK only Channel Changed 1 16 RA 4 Transmitted according to SMF data when the data is played back Default Mode 3 Messages X Altered AAAA 31 33 34 36 38 41 42 A 45 46 48 51 56 1 True Voice HAHAHA Note ON Velocity Note OFF After Touch oo RR O x Pitch Bend Control Change Prog O 4 Change 2 True HAA EA EE t AAE System Exclusive Quarter Frame System Song Pos Common Song Sel Tune XXO0O ox wo N System Clock Real Time
142. 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 To continue with the optimization press ENTER YES The Song Optimize function is carried out When completed Completed appears in the display and you are returned to the Play screen To cancel the operation press the EXIT NO or UTILITY Depending on the situation an appreciable length of time may be required for Optimize to be completed This is not a malfunction Do not turn off the power until Optimize has completed After you execute Optimize it is not possible to undo redo to revert to the state before executing Optimize Naming Songs Song Name When a new song is created it is automatically given a name such as SONG 0001 With your BR 900CD you can use Song Name to give each song a name which helps you manage and organize your songs 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR ll gt to move the cursor to EDT and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor to NAM and press ENTER The name of the song Song Name appears in the display UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press CURSO
143. 6 TigtBass BASS SIM 27 ClearSky COSM GTR AMP 77 LoosBass BASS SIM 28 60s UK COSM COMP GTR 78 B SIM Ch BASS SIM 29 TubeStck COSM GTR AMP 79 UprtPhsd BASS SIM 30 StSustin COSM GTR AMP 80 G gt FRTLES BASS SIM 31 Country COSM COMP GTR 81 Natural ACOUSTIC GTR 32 ClapLead COSM GTR AMP 82 AcstSolo ACOUSTIC GTR 33 TURND211 COSM GTR AMP 83 MIC D AC ACOUSTIC GTR 34 80 sHard COSM GTR AMP 84 NICE ACS ACOUSTIC GTR 35 90 sMetl COSM GTR AMP 85 WIDE ACS ACOUSTIC GTR 36 Bubbling COSM GTR AMP 86 SLAPnPOP BASS MULTI 37 BIG FUNK COSM COMP GTR 87 PhasBass BASS MULTI 38 Dirty COSM GTR AMP 88 FLIPTOP COSM BASS AMP 39 MatchDrv COSM GTR AMP 89 SquezBas COSM COMP BSS 40 St AltLd COSM GTR AMP 90 StdoBass COSM COMP BSS 41 PhatPhas COSM GTR AMP 91 BassTube COSM BASS AMP 42 SocrFild COSM GTR AMP 92 PunkBass COSM BASS AMP 43 UK Gtr COSM COMP GTR 93 SUSTAIN COSM COMP BSS 44 DOWN 2D COSM GTR AMP 94 Big8 Stg BASS MULTI 45 CmpBilly COSM COMP GTR 95 FRETLESS BASS MULTI 46 JC Metal COSM GTR AMP 96 STADIUM COSM COMP BSS 47 LATE70 s COSM GTR AMP 97 OCTAVE BASS MULTI 48 EARY70 s COSM GTR AMP 98 NO FRET BASS MULTI 49 American COSM GTR AMP 99 DRV BASS COSM BASS AMP 50 Heavy COSM GTR AMP 202 Effect Patch List
144. 69 Using MET a 151 Loading Drum Sounds from WAV AIFF Files Playing SMFs using external MIDI instruments Tone Load viii ile ditt lene 171 SME Player 0c cts goaninseseouiiti see catscte testes 151 Using the BR 864 BR 532 s Data cociniononinononos 173 Loading drum patterns from the CD R RW drive With Macintosh SPOOOHOSOHOHHOHHS OOOOH HOEOOOOOCOE 1 75 rl a 152 a A Backing Up the BR 900CD s Data cocoa 175 Erasing Data from a CD RW Disc CD RW Erase w 153 Saving BR 900CD Track Data in WAV AIFF Format Importing Songs from CDs to Audio MANATEE EXpOrt sicaiccscucthioninennincatti 176 Tracks SOCOHHOHSHSHHOHOHSHSHOHSHSHHSHOHSHHHHHSOOHHHOHSOOOOEEOE 1 54 Loading WAV AIFF Files in BR 900CD Tracks WAV AITFE Import eccoconccininnonacinonanicnnnnacinananininonns 178 Importing SMFs and Creating Patterns 179 Loading Drum Sounds from WAV AIFF Files Tone Load raestier intactas 181 Using the BR 864 BR 532 s Data 183 12 Po Section 8 Other Convenient Functions 185 Adjusting the Display Contrast 186 Using a Foot Switch or Expression Pedal cccccccssseeee 187 When Using a Foot Switch onocononincnconinonononnnnnnnos 187 When Using an Expression Pedal 187 Tuning an Instrument Tuner 188 Changing to the Tuner cooococonconcnononcnnnnnenrnrnrnnnnnnoos 188 Explanation of the indications that appear while LUIS iaa ad daa 188 UDI cercos diia csast eden rrei indi drenan 189 Set
145. 708_8 WAV or TRO708_8 AIF Converting songs takes approximately the same amount of time twice as long in stereo to complete as it does to play the source song data When the conversion is complete the BOSS_BR 900 icon is added to the computer Ex 8 Export the WAV or AIFF file to the computer 1 Double click the BOSS_BR 900 icon 2 Drag the WAV or AIFF file in the USB folder in the ROLAND folder to the computer s folder and drop it in the folder When you have finished exporting the data the Idling screen returns to the display 9 Quit the connection to the computer 1 Drag the BOSS_BR 900 icon into the trash 10 Press the BR 900CD s EXIT The file format selection screen returns to the display The contents of the USB folder are automatically deleted the instant the EXIT button is pressed If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER returns the file format selection screen to the display UTIL At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer 11 Repeat Steps 4 9 as needed 12 When you have finished exporting the WAV or AIFF file s press EXIT several time
146. AR BASS MIC2 INPUT SELECT button changes you to a guitar bank patch and pressing LINE changes you to a line bank patch Banks are a collection of effect patches 35 Recording Playing Back a Song GTR Effect patches for use with guitars MIC Effect patches for use on the sound from the MIC input i e vocals LIN LINE Effect patches for use on the sound from CDs MDs and other external devices from the LINE input SML SIMUL Effect patches for recording vocals and a guitar together is Effect Patches and Banks p 84 2 Press CURSOR J 1 gt 1 to align the cursor up with the effect patch and turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the effect patch Preset patches P The preset patches contain preset data Their settings can be changed but you cannot create a new preset patch User patches U User patches can be rewritten and are stored in internal memory If you have created a patch that you would like to use for other songs as well it is convenient to store it as a user patch Song patches S Like user patches song patches can be written however the data for song patches are stored along with the song data to the memory card This is convenient when you have created a patch for a specific recorded performance and would like to store that patch together with the song BR 900CD Memory Card Song Preset Patch Song Patch 3 Press CURSOR 1 gt J to align th
147. BASS MULTI STEREO MULTI On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off Low Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer Lo M Gin 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer Lo M F 100 Hz 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer Lo M Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Lo M F A larger value results in a narrower range of change Hi M Gin 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer Hi M F 100 Hz 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer Hi M Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Hi M F A larger value results in a narrower range of change Hi Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the treble equalizer Level 20 20 dB This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage Flanger This produces a flanging effect that gives a sort of twisting Character to the sound This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter is set to FLANGER On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the flanger effect on off Rate 0 100 Determines the rate of the flanging effect Depth 0 100 Determines the dep
148. BR 864 BR 532 s Data You can use the BR 900CD to play BR 864 BR 532 data First be sure to back up the BR 864 BR 532 s ROLAND folder to the computer 1 Initializing the memory card on the BR 900CD p 196 2 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB cable 3 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press UTILITY 4 Press CURSOR JI gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears 5 Select BACKUP with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER The Idling screen appears in the display UTIL UTIL You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling screen is displayed Refer to p 212 for instructions on resolving this problem The BOSS_BR 900 icon is added to the computer Ex 6 Delete the BR 900CD ROLAND folder 1 Double click the BOSS_BR 900 icon and delete the ROLAND folder 7 Drag the previously backed up BR 864 BR 532 ROLAND folder to the BOSS_BR 900 icon and drop it there UTIL When you have finished backing up the data the Idling screen returns to the display Quit the connection to the computer 1 Drag the BOSS_BR 9
149. Channel 10 in the SMF is isolated and imported by the BR 900CD Note that the data on other channels is disregarded 1 Using a PC burn a CD R RW disc containing the SMFs you want to import 2 Insert this CD R RW disc into the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding 3 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press CURSORI N I gt to move the cursor to DATA and press ENTER The Data CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 152 Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange Data 5 Press CURSOR TL gt to move the cursor to SMF and press ENTER The SMF menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 6 Press CURSOR q TH gt to move the cursor to IMPORT and press ENTER The SMF import screen appears REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR If the SMFs are colle
150. ER The Song Protect screen appears UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Rotate TIME VALUE dial to select the ON 5 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen When a song is protected the display will show the song protect symbol MEAS REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Saving the Current Settings to the Song Song Save The BR 900CD can save the following contents as song data e Recorded data e Mixer settings Pan Track EQ etc e Insert Effect song patches e Mastering Tool Kit song patches e Pitch Correction song patches Rhythm Arrangements Rhythm Patterns e Loop Effects Tuner e Utility excluding LCD contrast These recorded data or mixer settings are not saved immediately after recording but are saved when songs are saved and when the screens are switched Ordinarily if a situation calls for it a message appears in the display prompting you to confirm that you want to save the data so you need not pay particular attention to this but if you want to save the settings to the song in its current state use the following procedure 1 Hold down STOP and press REC 79 Creating a Master Tape Disc This process involves recording the finished song to
151. FFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 86 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the number to which to write the new effect patch After you ve selected the destination press ENTER After the save has been completed you are returned to the Effect screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Using the Insert Effects Changing How the Insert Effects are Used According to the Mode By default the insert effect is inserted immediately after the input source The reason for this is to allow for the effects processed wet sound to be recorded and monitored However sometimes you want to change the connection order On the BR 900CD you can accommodate a wide variety of situations by changing the point to which the insert effects are connected Follow the procedure below to change where insert effects are connected 1 Press EFFECTS 2 Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to LOCAT and press ENTER EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y EFFECTS INPUT
152. H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 44H LOCATE MCP 06H Number of Bytes 01H TARGET sub command hrH mnH scH frH ffH Standard Time with Sub Frame F7H EOX End of Exclusive Message This message is transmitted when the song position moves 3 Supplementary material Decimal Hexadecimal table hexadecimal values are indicated by a following H MIDI uses 7 bit hexadecimal values to indicate data values and the address and size of exclusive messages The following table shows the correspondence between decimal and hexadecimal numbers D H D H D H D H 0 00H 32 20H 64 40H 96 60H al 01H 33 21H 65 41H 97 61H 2 02H 34 22H 66 42H 98 62H 3 03H 35 23H 67 43H 99 63H 4 04H 36 24H 68 44H 100 64H 5 05H 37 25H 69 45H 101 65H 6 06H 38 26H 70 46H 102 66H 7 07H 39 27H 71 47H 103 67H 8 08H 40 28H 72 48H 104 68H 9 09H 41 29H 13 49H 105 69H 10 OAH 42 2AH 74 4AH 106 6AH Td OBH 43 2BH 75 4BH 107 6BH 12 OCH 44 2CH 76 ACH 108 6CH 13 ODH 45 2DH 77 4DH 109 6DH 14 OEH 46 2EH 78 4EH 110 6EH TS OFH 47 2FH 79 4FH 111 6FH 16 10H 48 30H 80 50H 112 70H 17 11H 49 31H 81 51H 113 71H 18 12H 50 32H 82 52H 114 72H 19 13H 51 33H 83 53H TLS 73H 20 14H 52 34H 84 54H 116 74H 21 15H 53 35H 85 55H 117 75H 22 16H 54 36H 86 56H 118 76H 23 17H
153. ITAL OUT connector Optical type FOOT SW EXP PEDAL jack 1 4 inch phone type PHONES jack Stereo 1 4 inch phone type MIDI OUT connector USB connector 220 Specifications O Power Supply DC 9 V Supply AC Adaptor PSC series Dry battery x 6 O Current Draw 900 mA Average using AC adapter and CD R RW 300 mA When powered by batteries CD R RW drive not used Expected battery life under continuous use Alkaline 4 hours These figures will vary depending on the actual conditions of use Dimensions 351 W x 225 D x 69 H mm 13 7 8 W x 8 7 8 D x 2 3 4 H inches Weight 2 2 kg 4 lbs 14 oz excluding batteries Accessories AC Adaptor PSC series Demo Card Already inserted when the BR 900CD is shipped Owner s Manual Separate sheet About Memory Cards etc Roland Service information sheet Options Foot Switch FS 5U Pedal Switch DP 2 Roland Expression Pedal EV 5 Roland FV 300L nore In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 221 Symbols BANK A A AEE ANN 69 72 75 GUITAR ecc nono 88 159 199 159 199 158 199 158 199 BASS MULT aid ua 89 158 199 BASS SIM riara E R 89 Bass Sim latot sisik aese iaraa iat tet EE EES RERET OE EAER 93 Batte arenae aa 23 197 Battery Cover ii e 23 Battery io Wi n EE RA E ters E E EERS 23 AC Adaptor mesere e N E 22
154. Instruments Choose which jack you will use to connect your instrument Your BR 900CD is equipped with a number of input jacks to match the type of instrument that you will connect Select an instrument appropriate for your purposes MIC 2 GUITAR GUITAR BASS An electric guitar or bass can be connected to this jack Since this is a high impedance input a guitar or bass can be connected directly MICT These jacks allow a mic to be connected Both standard TRS and XLR jacks are provided The standard TRS type allows for both balanced and unbalanced connections If both jacks are being used the TRS jack is given priority Ifyou are recording an electric acoustic guitar using a shielded connection use the GUITAR BASS jack Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector p 191 MIC2 This jack allows a mic to be connected XLR jack is provided If the connection has been made to the GUITAR BASS and the MIC2 jacks the GUITAR BASS jack is given priority Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector p 191 LINE When connecting to the output of a CD player cassette player or other audio device or to a rhythm machine external sound module keyboard or other sound source use the stereo input jacks 33 Recording Playing Back a Song Press the INPUT SELECT button of the Turning on the internal microphone instrument that you want to record
155. LIBOSS BR IDOCOA Rs Owners Manual Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the BOSS BR 900CD Digital Recording Studio Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled e USING THE UNIT SAFELY page 2 3 e IMPORTANT NOTES page 4 5 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference E Printing Conventions in This Manual e Text or numerals enclosed in square brackets indicate buttons PLAY PLAY button REC REC button e Reference such as p indicate pages in this manual to which you can refer Copyright O 2005 BOSS CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of BOSS CORPORATION T a TT a GUITAR mic 2 mic1 LINE IN LINEOUT DIGIT USB FOOTS Power oc 7BASS xu XLR Sur INPUT DIGITAL RECORDING OBOSsSS suse I3fR 3O0CD GUITAR LINER TIME VALUE BASS MIC2 v v MEMORY CARD R RW PHRASE oer aN ran PAN EO ERRECTS T AN TRAINER oF oor EXIT ENTER MASTERING he Min MAX AUTO PUNCH ON OFF IN OUTP LOCATOR
156. LITY The Utility screen will appear Press CURSOR TL gt to move the cursor to SYS and press ENTER Press CURSOR 1 gt to select Phantom SW and turn the TIME VALUE dial to turn the setting ON UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR ON Phantom power will be supplied Note that when turned on phantom power will be supplied to all XLR connectors for MIC 1 and 2 OFF Phantom power will not be supplied Slowly raise the INPUT SENS knobs the MASTER fader and INPUT LEVEL knobs and confirm that an audio signal is being received from the condenser microphone s To turn off the phantom power repeat Steps 1 through 3 and then set Phantom SW to OFF in Step 4 ole Phantom power cannot be turned on or off individually for MIC 1 and 2 Phantom power is not supplied to the 1 4 phone jack for MIC 1 or to the GUITAR BASS jack The phantom power setting reverts to OFF whenever the BR 900CD is turned on Remember therefore to turn on this power supply whenever it is needed No supply of phantom power will be needed from the g uoIp s BR 900CD when using an external microphone pre amp or a dedicated external phantom power supply Ensure that phantom power is set to OFF in all such cases 191 Copying Difficult Songs Phrase Trainer Your BR 900CD features a built in
157. ME VALUE dial to select the WAV or AIFF file with the drum sound to be loaded MEMO You can preview the sound of the WAV or AIFF file to be loaded by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing ENTER 12 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the load destination song drum kit S1 5 Song Drum Kit 1 5 UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 13 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the load destination song drum sound then press ENTER The load is executed To cancel press EXIT UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed WAV and AIFF files in the TONELOAD folder are retained without being deleted even after this procedure is completed If these files are no longer needed connect the BR 900CD to your computer via USB and use the computer to delete the files Any files that are retained will use the required amount of memory on the memory card Using the BR 864 BR 532 s Data You can use the BR 900CD to play BR 864 or BR 532 data First be sure to back up the BR 864 BR 532 s ROLAND folder to the computer 1 Initializing the memory card on the BR 900CD p 196 2 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB
158. MFs Standard MIDI Files as song patterns For instructions on this procedure refer to p 169 or p 179 Note concerning creation of patterns O Maximum polyphony for patterns is five voices This means you can play up to five drum sounds with the same timing O Even if six or more drum sounds are input at the same time only five of the drum sounds will be sounded However the W signifying the entry in the matrix display remains as is O You cannot play the CLOSED HH and OPEN HH sounds at the same time However the W signifying the entry in the matrix display remains as is O When using cymbals and other sounds that have lengthy decay times if other sounds totalling five voices are input before the previous sound has completely vanished Sounds started previously may be cut off before they finish playing O You cannot switch to other screens while recording patterns except for the pattern record standby screen Creating Patterns in Realtime Recording 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is flashing INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Press EDITI 3 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to REAL and press ENTER REAL appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen The Recording Sta
159. MFs that satisfy the following conditions can be played in this way Format 0or1 File size 240 KB maximum Note that this will vary slightly based on the SMF content System Exclusive Packet sizes of 512 bytes or less 1 Connect a MIDI cable between the MIDI OUT port on the BR 900CD and the MIDI IN port on your external MIDI sound module i MIDI OUT i MIDI IN 2 Insert a CD R RW disc containing SMFs into the CD R RW drive The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding 3 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 151 Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange Data 4 Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to DATA and press ENTER The Data CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Press CURSOR TL gt to move the cursor to SMF and press ENTER The SMF menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6
160. NPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR The buttons work as shown below STOP Stop PLAY Play REW Rewind FF Fast forward 7 If you want to finish playback of the audio CD press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen 8 Press the CD R RW drive s EJECT button to eject the disc It may take a period of several seconds before the disc is actually ejected Nove When an audio disc is inserted into the CD R RW drive the message Now Checking may remain on the screen for a relatively long time This period of time is required for reading of the data stored on the audio CD and it is not the result of a malfunction Enabling Playback on CD Players Finalize If you intend to play a audio CD that was written using the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive on a standard CD player the audio CD must be finalized Audio CD R RW discs can be finalized at any time to enable playback on this type of player MEM What is finalizing In addition to the audio data itself other information describing the position and time of this data is also written to audio CDs This process is known as Finalizing If you finalize When finalization has been carried out you will be able to play your audio CD ona standard CD player Note however that you will no longer be able to add songs to a finalized CD Furthermore the finaliza
161. Note and specify the pitch you want to correct with the TIME VALUE dial Note OFF No correction is made after the specified point in the song The song is played using the original pitch AUTO After the specified point in the song all pitches are corrected in semitone increments C C A B The performance after the specified point in the song is adjusted to the specified pitch NEM The reference pitch for NOTE is determined by the tuner s reference pitch See Setting the Reference Pitch of the Tuner p 189 116 Fixing the Pitch of Vocals Pitch Correction 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Smth and specify the correction speed Smth Smooth 100 100 The value set here is added to the value for the Smooth patch parameter p 115 When set to 0 the correction proceeds at the rate set in the patch s Smooth parameter The correction is performed more rapidly the lower the value is compared to the value set for the patch while the correction is carried out more smoothly as the value increases relative to the patch s value nore Make this setting so that the sum is in the range from 0 to 100 No effect is achieved if the resulting value is lower than 0 or greater than 100 7 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to INSERT and press ENTER Another new correction event is inserted 8 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to TIME and specify the time at which you want
162. OFF Ga Ir ARRANGE Lit Arrangement Mode When you press PLAY to start playback or recording the Rhythm arrangement When STOP is pressed the Rhythm arrangement stops as well PATTERN Flashing Pattern Mode When you press PLAY to start playback or recording the Rhythm pattern When STOP is pressed the Rhythm pattern stops as well No sound plays if BREAK is selected for the pattern p 207 OFF Unlit The Rhythm is turned off When you adjust the volume of the Rhythm use the Rhythm fader Changing arrangements 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator lights up 5 ARRANGE PATTERN OFF 2 Select an arrangement Use CURSOR gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the Preset Song and number P Preset S Song Number Arrangement Name INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 37 Recording Playing Back a Song Preset Arrangements P The preset arrangements contain preset data Their settings cannot be changed and you cannot create a new preset arrangement Song Arrangements S Song arrangements can be written however the data for song arrangements are stored along with the song data to the memory card BR 900CD Memory Card Song Preset Arrangement 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Song Arrngement Cha
163. PLAY Recording automatically starts at the auto punch in location so start playing what you want to record At the point you specified for punch out the track will automatically change back to play mode Press STOP to stop recording During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Listen to the re recorded results Return the song to a point earlier than you re recorded and play it back Adjust the volume of track 1 using the TRACK fader 55 Re recording Only a Mistake Punch in out Repeatedly Recording Over the Same Location Loop Recording The repeat function p 51 allows you to play a certain portion of a song the loop portion over and over again If you used auto punch in out together with the repeat function the portion will be repeated so the result of the recording can be heard right away If the recording did not sound as you wished simply press REC and redo the recording Using the repeat function and auto punch in out together in this manner to repeatedly perform recording is known as loop recording For details on how to set the portion where recording will occur the portion between the punch in and punch out positions refer to Auto punching in and out above Setting the portion to be repeated Before you begin recording you will need to set the starting and ending position of t
164. PLAY The selected pattern is performed No sound plays if BREAK is selected for the pattern Changing the tempo of the arrangements or patterns You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or pattern being played by carrying out the following procedure while the Play screen is displayed The arrangement s tempo setting is temporarily disabled 1 Press CURSOR and align the cursor up with TEMPO in the display 2 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the tempo Tempo MES TIME REC MODE INPUT NENA MENA EFFECTS ERREN m j O CE TIO QOBA ODO OOO QM DAA IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHH The change in tempo is only temporary If you want to change the arrangement s actual tempo refer to p 123 Tempos cannot be saved to patterns Tapping to change the tempo of the arrangements or patterns You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or pattern by the timing with which you press TAP Tap on TAP four or more times to change the tempo of the arrangement or pattern The tempo becomes that in which you tapped O TAP TEMPO The change in tempo is only temporary If you want to change the arrangement s actual tempo refer to p 123 Tempos cannot be saved to patterns 122 Creating Original Arrangements You can create arrangements Song arrangements of up
165. PLAYER is selected Tuning 0 100 This is a parameter for RADIO It simulates the sounds that occur when you adjust the tuning frequency of an AM radio Wow Fit 0 100 This is a parameter for PLAYER It simulates the wow and flutter which occur when the speed of the turntable is not constant Noise 0 100 This simulates noise Filter 0 100 Adjusts the filter D E 100 0 0 100 This adjusts the volume balance of the direct and effect sounds 96 Insert Effect Parameter Functions E When DIGITAL is selected Pre Filter OFF ON This filter decreases digital distortion When turned off you can create an intense lo fi sound incorporating digital distortion Smpl Rate OFF 1 2 1 32 Modify the sample rate Bit OFF 15 1 Modify the number of data bits If this is turned off the number of data bits will be unchanged If an extremely low number of bits is selected loud noise may appear even when there is no sound depending on the input source In such cases raise the threshold of the noise suppressor Post Fltr OFF ON This filter decreases the digital distortion produced by lo fi By turning this off you can create an extremely lo fi sound Fx Level 0 100 Adjust the volume of the lo fi sound Dir Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound Modify Fil This is a filter featuring a wide range of possible settings modifiable filter Select different types to get a variety of different filter ef
166. Press ENTER Move Event is executed UTIL 14 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return i to the Play screen IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 72 Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing 5 Press CURSOR J gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V Track to move from and track V Track to move to 6 Press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the time of the beginning of the location T To where you want the data to be moved 8 When you are ready to execute the move press ENTER The display will ask Are you sure so that you can confirm the operation 9 Press ENTER Move Event is executed 10 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Erasing Data Track Erase Track Erase allows you to erase a specific part of data Even if data exists after the specified part it will not be moved forward to fill the gap left by the erasure Like
167. R YES Press EXIT NO to cancel deletion The data erasure will begin and the state of progress will be displayed When the message Completed appears it indicates that erasing has been completed 5 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen 6 Press the CD R RW drive s EJECT button to eject the disc be e Once erasing has been started it will not be possible to cancel this process e The amount of time required for erasing data will depend on the type of CD RW disc used and the volume of data that it contains e In certain cases a period of several seconds will pass before the disc is actually ejected 153 Importing Songs from CDs to Audio Tracks The BR 900CD allows you to import selected songs from a 4 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to PLA Y audio CD to audio tracks CD R RW Write IMP and press ENTER The Audio CD player screen will appear nove Important Notice e The BR 900CD and its CD R RW drive are designed to allow you to reproduce material for which you REC MODE INPUT 6 own the copyright or material for which you have iO IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR been granted permission to copy by the copyright owner Accordingly the reproduction of audio CDs 5 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the number of the or other copyrighted material without the song to be
168. R QU gt to move the cursor to the character you want to change 5 Rotate TIME VALUE dial to select the character You can switch between upper case and lower case characters by pressing ENTER 6 After the name is properly entered press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen Organizing the Songs You ve Recorded Protecting a Song Song Protect You can imagine situations where after taking care to create a song you accidentally overwrite it with a recording deleting the performance itself To prevent such accidents you can protect song data so that it cannot be rewritten accidentally Song Protect The following operations are not available when a song is protected e Editing a song name e Erasing a song Song Optimize e Editing a digital copy protect e Initializing the Rhythm arrangements patterns drum kits e Initializing effects song patches e Initialize All e Arrangement Pattern Edit e Importing SMFs e Writing effects to song patches 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to EDT and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR lt JI gt to move the cursor to PRT and press ENT
169. STOP PLAY SCRUB 3 Press PLAY The REC and REC TRACK buttons stop flashing in red and instead light solidly and recording starts Lit a gt 0 a E 899 299 888 888 REC STOP PLAY SCRUB 4 When you finish recording press STOP The REC TRACK button lights alternately in orange and green indicating that track contains recorded data You cannot play back sounds recorded for less than one second During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed The following operations cannot be used or are disabled while the recorder is in use during recording and playback Recording patterns Editing arrangements Selecting drum kits Switching to the USB screen Switching to the Tone Load screen Switching to the Song Selection screen Switching to the Song New screen Switching to the Song Information screen Switching to the Edit Song screen Track Editing Switching to the Sync screen Switching to the Initialize screen Operating the CD R RW Repeating Playback Repeat By using the Repeat function you can repeatedly play back a specified part Repeating playback allows you to check the mixing balance or perform loop recordings p 56 with the punch in out functions The position in the song where REPEAT is pressed first becomes repeat start point A and the position where it is pressed a seco
170. Stretch Function and the Center Cancel Function it doesn t light 192 Slowing Down the Speed Time Stretch The Time Stretch function allows you to slow down the speed of playback to a half of the normal speed without changing the pitch 1 Press PHRASE TRAINER 2 Press CURSOR q Ml gt to select TimeStrtch and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set ON MEAS TIME 0 INPUT 6 24 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR ON Slows down playback to one half without changing the pitch OFF Pitch and playback speed are not changed Canceling the Center Sound Center Cancel The Center Cancel function allows you to remove the central sound of the playback e g vocals or guitar solos This is helpful if you want to practice playing along with the backing instruments Depending on how the song was recorded it may not be possible to completely remove the central sound Sounds are played back in mono 1 Press PHRASE TRAINER 2 Press CURSOR q TL gt to select CentrCncel and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set it to ON MES TIME INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 123456 7 8 RHYTHM LR ON Removes central sound e g vocals or guitar solos OFF Normal playback Perform the procedure below if the central s
171. TER The Idling screen appears in the display UTIL UTIL You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling screen is displayed Refer to p 212 for instructions on resolving this problem The BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon is added to the computer Removable Disk Back up the data 1 Click the BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon 2 Drag the ROLAND folder to the computer s folder and drop it in the folder UTIL When you have finished backing up the data the Idling screen returns to the display HINT Reading backup data back into the BR 900CD from PC Recover When restoring data backed up on a computer to the BR 900CD drag the ROLAND folder to the BOSS_BR 900 icon or the Removable disk icon and drop it there overwriting it 6 Quit the connection to the computer With Windows XP In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk If this procedure fails to eject the disk use the procedure below 1 Click the a icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message display
172. TTREN OFF Flashing Pattern Mode Performance and programming of patterns is enabled Press PLAY to start the performance of the pattern You cannot play back or record during programming ARRANGE PATTERN OFF Unlit OFF The Rhythm does not play Recording Rhythm Performances When you want to record Rhythm performances be sure to record bounce in Bounce mode You can have only the Rhythm performance be recorded by bringing down all of the faders except the Rhythm fader For instructions on bounce recording refer to Putting Multiple Tracks Together Bounce p 58 Performing Arrangements and Patterns Selecting arrangements This procedure selects the arrangement to be played with the Rhythm 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is lit P Preset S Song Arrangement Number Name IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR INPUT EFFECTS 2 Select the arrangement Use CURSOR lt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the Preset Song and number P01 P50 Preset arrangements 1 50 S01 S05 Song arrangements 1 5 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Performing arrangements 1 Make sure performance of the song is stopped then press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is lit INPUT 6
173. URSOR lt JI gt to move the cursor to CPY and press ENTER The Copy Song screen appears UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR If Card Full appears If this message appears before the copy it means that there is insufficient space on the memory card to complete the copy Delete any unnecessary recording from the memory card 4 Press ENTER The copy is executed When the copy has been completed Completed appears in the display and you are returned to the Play screen Erasing Songs Song Erase Follow the procedure below to erase a song from the memory card 2 3 Press UTILITY Press CURSOR q ll gt to move the cursor to EDT and press ENTER i 6 24 IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR i 6 24 IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM L Press CURSOR 4 gt to move the cursor to ERS and press ENTER The Erase Song screen appears UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Turn the TIME VALUE dial and select the song to be erased After selecting the song to erase press ENTER Are you sure appears To continue with the e
174. UTILITY 3 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears 4 Select EXPORT with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER 176 UTIL UTIL 5 Press CURSOR lt Ml gt to select the file format then press ENTER WAV This is an audio format used primarily with Windows AIFF This audio format is used primarily with Macintosh 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V Track to be saved When saving in mono UTIL When saving in stereo Select the track combination 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 UTIL 7 Press ENTER Conversion of the WAV or AIFF file begins Files names are converted as shown below Mono Stereo Track 1 V Track 1 Track 1 2 V Track 1 TRO1__ _1 WAV or TRO102 _1 WAV or TRO1_ _ _1 AlF TRO102 _1 AIF Track 1 V Track 2 TRO1___2 WAV or TRO1___2 AIF Track 1 2 V Track 2 TRO102 _2 WAV or _ TRO102 _2 AIF Track 7 8 V Track 7 TRO708_7 WAV or TRO708_7 AIF Track 6 V Track 7 TRO6__ _7 WAV or TROG_ __7 AIF Track 6 V Track 8 TRO6__ _8 WAV or TROG_ __8 AIF Track 7 8 V Track 8 TRO
175. W disc in the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press CURSOR NI gt to move the cursor to DATA and press ENTER The Data CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press CURSOR J I gt to move the cursor to WAV and press ENTER The WAV AIFF menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press CURSOR J gt to move the cursor to IMPORT and press ENTER A list of the audio data files contained on the current CD R RW disc will appear If the WAV files are collected in a folder then the folder name is displayed To show the WAV files within the folder press ENTER REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR You can preview the sounds by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing ENTER You can stop the sound by moving th
176. Wait until this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding N Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to DATA and press ENTER The Data CD menu screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press CURSORI NI I gt to move the cursor to RECOVER and press ENTER The Recover menu screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Press CURSOR I J I gt to move the cursor to SONG and press ENTER The Song recover screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 6 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the song you want to recover and press ENTER The message Are you sure will appear 7 Press ENTER YES The recovered song will begin When the message Completed appears it indicates that the recovered song has been successfully completed NEI The recovered songs will be saved in sequence on the memory card using the available
177. a 107 A ria ha aaa dteceats 106 107 Heladio 106 107 Hi Thnes iii 106 107 HLFEML ascos ina lainenennsaisidasaa FIL MATE ii la HiFi MT2 High Frequentes inline High Gain rodada drid A daa High Mid Freq High Mid Gain High Mid O viviana riiai iaasa eis AO ceca High Dy Pe viii AAA E EM arias EMI sii Ad FHM csssinslas diodo dl Pia ia cai HUMBUCK cirio toria 93 l Idling screen IMPORT siirretiin e ld Importing SME iaa dida 169 179 Na 35 49 120 ON 109 A svagedzesasdhs seare ssa sevaibadectsalaseaascnisnasedeesedeshenesess 62 94 106 TINE sesgetepe ieee seek E E 31 194 196 Input Gain linia 105 INPUT LEVEL Kiop siii 35 INPUT SELEC P cinismo loss dust lapa did iio 39 48 INPUT SELECT button ii a da 34 Inputsensitivi a is 35 INSERT lit 124 Insert Elfen e E a aes 35 36 84 88 Inserting Loading Drum pattern culiacan iran 152 Drum sounds 171 181 Drum tones from the tracks ooocooccncnnocnnonononcnnncnoncorncannconnnnos 135 Song from CD R RW disc cocmcconccncnocnnnonannonnnanoncanncnnaniananon 154 Songs tomMeMory Card sisisi irte iii asia 147 WAV AIFF file ui 167 178 LOCA Td id Aidt ath E 87 114 Po eat Ge 64 Lot Ai 64 Locator Point we 64 LOF BOX is 91 Lo Fi BOX ii aa 96 LOM Fritz data cta ii N s 96 Lo Miri das 96 Lo MO inculca diia ios LONG LV2 A O LOOP EFFECTS A A 43 108 Loop Recording critica a da 56 LOW Boost iia ita 193 Low Pra A 105 LOW Gain asti
178. a digital connection 81 82 Section 3 Using Effects Using the Insert Effects The BR 900CD comes with five effects processors an insert effects loop effects Track EQ Pitch Correction and Mastering Tool Kit An insert effects loop effects and Track EQ can be used simultaneously and you can make settings for each effect as desired Here is an explanation of how to change the various parameters for the insert effects and how to then save those changes is Insert Effect Parameter Functions p 88 Loop Effect Parameter Functions p 111 Track EQ Parameter Functions p 112 Nn Insert effects are applied during recording in addition they are applied during the mixing of the various tracks as well For more details refer to Changing How the Insert Effects are Used According to the Mode p 87 Effect Patches and Banks The effects used by insert effects and the parameters of each effect are changed by calling up effect patches Your BR 900CD comes equipped with a number of preset effect patches for use with vocals and instruments These are grouped according to different input sources and each group is called a bank INPUT SELECT GUITAR BASS MIC LINE SIMUL Guitar Bank Mic Bank Line Bank Simul Bank GTR MIC LIN SML naar Pot Pot Pot Pot Patch P99 P40 P50 P50 iser uor uot uor uot Patch U99 u40 U50 U50 Sai s01 s01 s01 s01 Patch 99 s40 50 50
179. a volume pedal when Foot Volume p 96 is set to ON The expression pedal functions as a pitch shifter pedal when Type for the Pitch Shifter p 98 is set to PEDAL 187 g uoIp s Tuning an Instrument Tuner The BR 900CD has a built in chromatic tuner function that allows you to tune your instrument quickly The built in tuner supports both guitar and bass guitar As an example here we will explain how to use the tuner to tune your guitar Itis not possible to play back or record while using the tuner Check the following points before you begin e That your guitar is connected to the GUITAR BASS jack e That GUITAR BASS MIC2 indicator on the INPUT SELECT button is lit e That GUITAR BASS INPUT SENS is properly adjusted p 35 If GUITAR BASS MIC2 indicator is off press GUITAR BASS MIC2 to turn it on 188 Changing to the Tuner 1 Press TUNER to access the Tuner screen v Ol Ol LJ LJ C 2 To exit the tuner press TUNER once again or press EXIT to return to the Play screen NEI If you do not want to output the tuning sounds either turn down the MASTER fader You cannot switch from the Tuner screen to other screens except the Play screen Explanation of the indications that appear while tuning When the built in tuner of the BR 900CD is used the reference
180. ae a ia carta te 160 Backup isis aan tacos 145 Operating MMC compatible devices with the Backing up a song to a CD R RW disc one ata A a ao 160 time Song Backup cecoconcononononcncononcnenrnrrnnnnnnoos 145 Saving all of the songs on a memory card to a CD R RW dise All Backup econ 146 Section 7 Using USB 161 Loading Saved Songs to a Memory Card Recover 147 Before U sing USB Overview corso 162 Loading saved songs to a memory card one ata Compatible OS iia a cito 162 time Song RecoVer ccocinonoiononnninocncanioones 147 Composition of Data on Memory CardS 162 Loading all saved songs to a memory card Connecting a COMpUteT oococcoconincnnonininnanananananininnnos 163 All Recover Haan teen nen ee sence ee ssneneesensnessnsneessnsnsesseenes 147 Notes on Using Ur s ata a 163 Copying and Writing Waveform Data 148 With Windows 164 Copying waveform data from a computer to the A P Backing Up the BR 900CD s Data ccocinicinconinanannnns 164 audio tracks WAV AIEF Import ss 148 acang p te RCA TE i Saving BR 900CD Track Data in WAV AIFF Format Copying WAV AIFF files as drum sounds WAV ATEF Export cccccsscssssssssssssssesssssnsssssseseee 165 Tone TOA oea aea AA AA 149 Loading WAV AIFF Files in BR 900CD Tracks Copying audio track waveform data to WAV AIFF Import asian ona 167 computers WAV AIPE Export craiesnrioncisas 150 Importing SMFs and Creating Patterns 1
181. al sounds recorded to each track one at a time or listen to them at the balance you desire Press FF to fast forward the song and press REW to rewind the song Press ZERO to move to the time location 00 00 00 00 0 29 Listening to a Demo Song In addition to the procedures given above you can also change your current position in the song using the procedures given below Changing the current position Elapsed time display The value given at TIME in the display shows the elapsed time into the song using MTC MIDI time codes and is expressed as follows hours minutes seconds frames sub frames The time code specifications can differ depending on the device To synchronize operation with another device using MTC you will first need to match the time code specifications of both devices At the factory settings one second is set to 30 frames non drop p 158 Moving to the start of a play To move to the time where the first sound of a song is recorded press and hold STOP and press REW Each V Track of the selected track is checked and you move to the time of the first recorded sound for the song Press ZERO to move to the time location 00 00 00 00 0 Moving to the end of a play To move to the time where the last sound of a song is recorded press and hold STOP and press FF Each V Track of the selected track is checked and you move to the time of the last recorded sound for the song TIME
182. ality supported by the BR 900CD read MIDI Implementation p 216 Press CURSOR lt gt to select Sync Gen and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set MTC Make settings on your sequencer software Make the following settings on your sequencer software For details on making these settings refer to the manual for your sequencer software MTC receive MTC type same setting as the MTC Type selected on the BR 900CD MMC receive Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Section 7 Using USB Before Using USB Overview The BR 900CD is equipped with a USB connector which allows you to connect the BR 900CD directly to a computer making it easy to back up your important song data and exchange files between the BR 900CD and the computer What is USB USE short for Universal Serial Bus is a type of interface for connecting computers with a variety of peripheral devices Using USB allows you to connect different peripherals using a single USB cable and also provides rapid data transmission What s more you can connect and disconnect peripherals with the power on and the computer can automatically recognize when devices are connected you may need to make settings when connecting certain devices On the BR 900CD USB is us
183. amount of pitch change in semitone steps By selecting DETUNE you can add a slightly pitch shifted sound to the input sound producing a detune effect This effect can be used when the P Shift Type parameter is set to MANUAL D E 100 0 0 100 This adjusts the volume balance of the direct and effect sounds Separation 50 50 Adjusts the diffusion The panning of the direct sound and effect sound can be spread to left and right This will be effective when stereo output is used Preamp Adjust the distortion and tone of the guitar sound When all Bass Middle and Treble are set to 0 no sound may be produced depending on the Type setting On Off OFF ON Turns the preamp effect on off Type This sets the type of the preamp The distortion and tone characteristics of each amp are as shown below m With COSM GTR AMP COSM COMP GTR or VO GT AMP algorithms JC 120 The sound of the Roland JC 120 a favorite of pro musicians around the world CLEAN The sound of a conventional built in tube amp CRUNCH Allows you to obtain a crunch effect that creates a natural distortion MATCH A simulation of the latest tube amp widely used in styles from blues and rock VO DRV Allows you to obtain the Liverpool sound of the 60 s BLUES A lead sound with a rich middle ideal for Blues BG LEAD The sound of a tube amp typical
184. amp B jack cannot be used When Using a Foot Switch Use the following procedure to set the foot switch function 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to SYS and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt and select Foot SW UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Turn the TIME VALUE dial and select the foot switch function PLAY PUNCH FX The song will alternate between play and stop each time you press the foot switch Switches punch in and out alternately each time you press the foot switch The insert effect will alternate between on and off each time you press the foot switch Not operational while Pitch Correction is in use Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed When Using an Expression Pedal The expression pedal functions according to the effect settings as shown below Functions as a wah pedal when the Type for Wah p 101 is set to PEDAL Functions as
185. an be used with the BR 900CD namely CD R discs and CD RW discs What is a CD R disc CD R Compact Disc Recordable is a CD to which data can be written It is not possible to erase or move the data that has been written This type of disc should be used to create audio CDs that will be played on standard CD players Playback of CD RW discs will not be possible on this type of equipment In addition even if you have created an audio CD using a CD R disc playback will only be possible on players that support the playback of recordable discs What is a CD RW disc CD RW Compact Disc ReWritable is a CD that can be written and erased As a result this type of recordable disc can be used again and again While you can create audio CDs using CD RW discs it will not be possible to play these CDs on a standard CD player You will however be able to play these discs using the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive Handling the CD R RW disc drive Nore When you use the CD R RW drive you must use only the supplied AC adaptor The CD R RW drive cannot be used while running on battery power O Install the unit on a solid level surface in an area free from vibration If the unit must be installed at an angle be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible range O Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in th
186. appear If the WAV files are collected in a folder then the folder name is displayed To show the WAV files within the folder press ENTER INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR You can preview the sounds by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing ENTER You can stop the sound by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing ENTER once more You can press PLAY to preview the sounds and press STOP to stop the sounds 149 Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange Data 6 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the data files you 3 want to import and press ENTER Press CURSOR q lE gt to move the cursor to DATA and press ENTER The Drum kit select screen appears The Data CD menu screen will appear REC MODE o INPUT 6 REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS 24 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR EFFECTS IN 123456 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the dum kit and press ENTER 4 Press CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor to WAV and press ENTER The Drum sound select screen appears The WAV AIFF screen will appear
187. ards bought at a computer shop or ones previously used with a digital camera cannot be used as is with the BR 900CD These CompactFlash cards must first be initialized for use with the BR 900CD For more details regarding initializing see p 31 p 196 CompactFlash and are trademarks of SanDisk Corpo ration and licensed by CompactFlash association BOSS Corporation is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash and CF logo trademarks How to remove the card protector To prevent theft of the memory card CompactFlash the BR 900CD is shipped from the factory with a card protector R card Cover To remove the card protector use the following procedure 1 Make sure the card cover is closed then the BR 900CD over When turning the unit upside down get a bunch of newspapers or magazines and place them under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls Also you should try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls get damaged When turning the unit upside down handle with care to avoid dropping it or allowing it to fall or tip over 2 Using a coin or flathead screwdriver unscrew and remove the coin screw from the bottom panel 3 Pull out the card cover in the direction indicated by the arrow 4 To prevent loss of the card protector after it is removed place it as shown in the figure Insert the card protector in the slot as indic
188. ase you can slightly lower the faders of the playback tracks or pan the playback tracks to left or right and the sound you are playing to right or left to make it easier to hear yourself Ts Setting the positioning pan of the sound p 42 Changing the Position of the Input Sound Pan p 49 10 Adjusting the Sound for Each Track You can adjust the tone panning and volume balance for each track individually Setting the positioning pan of the sound 1 Press PAN EQ LOOP PAN EQ EFFECTS 2 Press CURSOR 1 gt to move the cursor to PAN and press ENTER The Pan settings screen appears REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt and turn the TIME VALUE dial to change each track pan settings Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track corresponding to the button pressed Pressing ENTER sets this to C00 Center 4 Press EXIT or PAN EQ to return to the Play screen ote Tracks 7 and 8 are stereo tracks and any pan settings that are made apply to both of the tracks as a pair e When set to C00 Track 7 is panned left and Track 8 is panned right e When set to
189. ata O V Tracks without data At this point the Mastering Tool Kit is automatically selected as the effect Press CURSOR 1 gt to move the cursor to the recording destination V track and turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the V Track Recoding distination MES TIME MASTERING 24 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR The REC TRACK button for the track selected as the recording destination flashes in red Press EFFECTS The Mastering Tool Kit selection screen appears in the display P Preset S Song U User Algorithm Name ae Number Patch Name EFFECTS REC MODE MASTERING EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the Preset Song User patch and number for the Mastering Tool Kit IS Mastering Tool Kit Patch List p 205 6 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen The overall volume is adjusted by the MASTER fader At this time raise the volume as high as possible without allowing the sound to distort 7 Press REC REC flashes in red and the BR 900CD enters the recording standby state STOP PLAY SCRUB 8 Press PLAY REC stop flashing in red and instead light solidly and recording starts Lit JE STOP PLAY REC SCRUB 9 When you
190. ated by the arrow 5 Turn the BR 900CD back over to its original position ote Should you remove the screws make sure to put them in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally Panel Descriptions Front Panel GUITAR MIC 2 MIC 1 LINE IN LINE OUT DIGITAL USB FOOT SW MIDI OUT POWER BASS XLR XLR AUDIO SUB MIX OUT AA EXPPEDAL LES OBOSS Su BR 3IDOCIO GUITAR MIC L LINE R TIME VALUE BASS MIC2 VOCAL h x 54 MEMORY CARD O 1 gt i C i 9 7 oO CJ Al UPPER EDIT Lower OFF MASTERING TOOLKIT ON OFF MIN OUT LOCATOR OOO af DELETE STOP SCRUB LINE 1 Input section For selecting the LINE jack stereo for the line inputs such SENS knob as keyboards or CD players Use this knob to adjust the sensitivity at the input jacks e g SIMUL GUITAR BASS MIC1 MIC2 and LINE By pressing GUITAR BASS MIC2 and MIC PEAK indicator simultaneously you can record from both inputs at the same ti E This indicator shows how strong the input level is at the aii various input jacks e g GUITAR BASS MIC1 and MIC2 Ifthe INPUT SELECT setting is changed the insert effect This indicator lights at a level 6 dB lower than where sound bank p 35 p 84 changes automatically distortion occ
191. ated on the disc Note that even if you press STOP at this point without bouncing any tracks the song cannot be deleted Press PLAY PLAY and REC light and bouncing to the CD R RW disc begins The sounds are written to the CD R RW disc exactly as they are played back Press STOP when you reach the end of the song Keep power on Closing Track appears in the display The message disappears indicating that the bouncing have been completed Several seconds may be necessary before you can proceed with the next operation To check the results of the bouncing play the disc back as an audio CD p 142 To enable playback of the bounced tracks on a conventional audio CD player finalize the disc p 143 ove Finalizing the CD R RW disc allows the content to be heard using a regular CD player but prevents any further bouncing or writing of tracks to the disc Do not finalize the disc if you want to bounce or write other tracks to it Selecting the Input Source and Bouncing the Recording to a CD R RW You can simultaneously select the input source sounds and record when bouncing directly to a CD just as you can when bouncing tracks in the normal manner 1 Carry out Steps 1 4 in Bouncing Directly to a CD R RW Disc Direct CD Bounce p 59 2 Press one of the INPUT SELECT buttons to select the input source you want The button for the selected input source lights up and the sounds of
192. ates the sound of a bass guitar Obtain the sound of a bass guitar while playing an electric guitar You should avoid playing chords when using the Bass Simulator BSIM COMP DEF NS FV MOD Bass Simulator Compressor Defretter Compressor Defretter Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Modulation Flanger Chorus Phaser Pitch Shifter Doubling Tremolo Pan 4 COSM COMP GTR This is a multi effect designed for electric guitar In addition to a COSM compressor limiter it uses a preamp and speaker simulator for a characteristic amp sound COMP PAMP SP EQ WAH LiNsI IFVI IDLY1 COSM Comp Limiter Preamp Speaker Simulator 4Band Equalizer Wah 4Band Equalizer Wah Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Delay 5 ACOUSTIC GTR This is a multi effect designed for acoustic guitar Even when an electric acoustic is connected at line level this provides a warm sound similar to what is obtained through a microphone ACP COMP EQ NS DLY Acoustic Processor Compressor 4Band Equalizer Noise Suppressor Delay 6 BASS MULTI This is a multi effect designed for bass guitar Appropriate for creating standard bass sound COM PORRO ENA EQU NS FV MOD DLY Compressor Defretter Compressor Defretter Octave Enhancer 4Band Equalizer Wah 4Band Equalizer Wah Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Modulation Flanger Chorus Phaser Pi
193. ator Point 1 At the Play screen move to the location where you want to register the locator point 2 Press LOCATOR When the LOCATOR indicator lights up registration is complete _ AUTO PUNCH___ ON OFF HAIN E OR OOO DELETE CoG Moving to the Locator Point 1 Press LOCATOR This moves you to the time in the song registered as a locator point Deleting a Locator Point 1 Press and hold AUTO PUNCH ON OFF then press LOCATOR The locator point is deleted Search for the Music s Start and End Scrub Preview Scrub function When editing a sound some times you need to know exactly where the sound starts or exactly where the recording with an auto punch in starts To enable you to find these points accurately the BR 900CD is equipped with the Scrub function When you use the Scrub function during playback called scrubbing the portion from your before or after the current location approximately 45 msec is played back and repeated Preview function With the Preview function you can playback the one second portion of the song before or after your current position By using this together with the Scrub function at the same time slowly moving your current position in the song it becomes easy to find the exact transition point from one Sound Data PREVIEW PREVIEW TO FROM Approx 1 0 msec Approx 1 0 msec phrase to the next Now Time v
194. built in microphone can be turned on or off p 34 Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector p 191 MIC2 This is XLR type microphone input connector If recording using two mics with one mic connected to the MIC 1 input connect the second mic here Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector p 191 LINE These jacks accept stereo input from keyboards CD players and other devices at line level RCA phono jacks The LINE OUT jacks stereo RCA phono jacks are also provided for output USB Connecting your computer here allows you to exchange data between the BR 900CD and a computer Two way power supply allows you to record anywhere You can use the BR 900CD powered by batteries six size AA dry cells or with the AC adaptor And thanks to its built in microphone you can make recordings anywhere and anytime you desire 15 Introduction to the BR 900CD Memory Cards Supported by Your BR 900CD The BR 900CD uses CompactFlash cards as the storage media for recording and playback The BR 900CD uses 32 MB to 1 GB CompactFlash cards with a 3 3 V power supply For more on supported memory cards CompactFlash for the BR 900CD refer to About Memory Cards separate sheet ove CompactFlash Type II cards are not compatible NEI CompactFlash cards are available at your nearest computer or digital camera shop Formatting the memory card CompactFlash CompactFlash c
195. contains data where the REC TRACK button is lit in green the indicator lights alternately in orange and green and the new music overwrites the previously recorded data 2 Adjust the faders so the tracks being played back are at a suitable level 3 Press REC REC flashes in red and the BR 900CD enters the recording standby state 41 Recording Playing Back a Song 4 Press PLAY The REC and REC TRACK button indicators change from flashing in red to being continually lit and recording begins PLAY lights up Only what you are currently playing is recorded to the new track The music that is being played back is not recorded Tf you use the INPUT LEVEL knob to turn down the volume of the input source during recording the sound will be recorded in the audio track at a low volume so that noise will be more apparent when you raise the volume of the audio track for playback If you want to lower the sound of the input source that you are monitoring lower the volume with the MASTER fader To change the volume of the music being played back use the TRACK fader for the respective tracks 5 When you finish recording press STOP You cannot play back sounds recorded for less than one second HINT Some tips for overdubbing When you record new material while listening to a recorded performance your playing may tend to be buried in the existing performances making it difficult for you to play In this c
196. copy to 6 Press ENTER IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the beginning of the portion S Start of data you want to copy 8 Press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 9 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the ending of the portion E End of data you want to copy 10 Press ENTER UTIL IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 11 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the time of the beginning of the location T To where you want the copied data to be placed 12 Press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 13 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the number of copies you want to be placed 14 When you are ready to execute the copy press ENTER The display will ask Are you sure so that you can confirm the operation 15 Press ENTER The copy is executed 16 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed uo
197. ct IMPORT with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER UTIL UTIL 5 Use CURSOR gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track and V track to be loaded then press ENTER When loading to the tracks in mono UTIL When loading to the tracks in stereo Select the track combination 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 UTIL 6 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to specify the measure or position in the track from which loading is to start then press ENTER Z UOID9G UTIL The BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon is added to the computer Ex 7 BOSS_BR 900 Removable Disk 167 7 Copy the WAV or AIFF files you want to import 1 Click the BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon 2 Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the USB folder in the ROLAND folder Only one file can be imported at a time in each import operation Do not drag and drop more than one file at a time UTIL
198. cted in a folder then the folder name is displayed To show the SMFs within the folder press ENTER 7 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the SMFs you want to import and press ENTER The screen for specifying the import destination pattern number appears 8 Use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the import destination pattern number and press ENTER Copying of the SMF begins When Completed appears the import is finished Erasing Data from a CD RW Disc CD RW Erase If you are using CD RW discs you will be able to erase unneeded data from the discs and reuse them for data storage ole e This process results in all data being erased from a disc e Data erasure is possible only with CD RW discs Data cannot be erased from CD R discs 1 Insert the CD RW disc to be erased into the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding 2 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to ERASE and press ENTER The message Are you sure will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press ENTE
199. dby screen appears RI CEN wv v Yv v R REC MODE CR HINT SD You can press REC MODE during Realtime REAL Recording to switch to Step Recording 4 Press CURSOR gt repeatedly to move the cursor to RHR and press ENTER The BR 900CD is put into Rehearsal mode Using this option allows you to switch to Step Recording temporarily when you want to change the set velocity or input drum sounds input with the wrong timing in Realtime Recording instructions for this procedure p 132 or to delete unneeded drum sounds instructions p 132 and then switch back to gt ES a Realtime Recording and continue recording the cn pattern a KI REAL 8 Set the tempo and Quantize values as needed 9 When you have finished inputting sounds move the i cursor to STOP and press ENTER RAMA oR You can also stop recording by pressing STOP KI REAL 128 Creating Original Patterns 5 Rehearse the performance by pressing the REC TRACK 11 16 You can switch the UPPER and LOWER drum sounds by pressing RHYTHM PAD At this point adjust Fader 1 to confirm the velocity status 6
200. ding on the capacity of the memory card initializing may take more than ten minutes to complete This is not a malfunction The progress of the initializing is shown in the display Do not turn off the BR 900CD until the initializing has been completed ore Do not remove the memory card or turn off the BR 900CD while the display shows Keep power on Doing so can destroy the data on the memory card and or render the memory card itself unusable Conserving Battery Power Power Save Your BR 900CD is equipped with a power save function that 3 Press CURSOR 11 gt to select PowerSave and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the time until the Power Save function is activated limits the current dissipation during use When the power save function is activated if no button or TIME VALUE dial on the BR 900CD is used for a certain amount of time the BR 900CD will enter the standby state and turn off the display backlight and button indicators Valid Settings OFF 1min 3min 5min 10min Also when in the standby state the display will appear as shown below i 6 24 ZS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR TIME 0 Ga A 4 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return en 2 to the Play screen IN 123456 7 8 RHYTHM LR p During updating
201. drive 3 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 140 Creating Audio CD 4 Press CURSOR lt TH gt to move the cursor to AUDIO and press ENTER The Audio CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Press CURSOR 1 gt to move the cursor to WRITE and press ENTER The Audio CD Write screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 6 Use the TIME VALUE dial to choose the track and V Track that you want to write and press ENTER The Write Speed screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 7 Use the TIME VALUE dial to set the write speed Alternatively if you want to use the write speed that is currently displayed proceed to Step 9 8 Press ENTER The message Are you sure will appear 9 Press ENTER YES The message Now Writing will appear and writing to the audio CD will begin When writing has been completed the message Finalize CD OK will be displa
202. e 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR lt 1 gt until FX Type or Type is displayed then turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the loop effect 43 Recording Playing Back a Song When using CHO DLY Select from CHORUS DELAY or DBLN doubling LOOP FX 0 REC MODE INPUT 6 24 EFFECTS O E OOOO IN 1234567 8AM LR When using REV Select from HALL or ROOM LOOP FX 0 REC MODE INPUT 6 a E E E 24 EFFECTS M ee ee IN 12345 67 BAHT LR 4 If you want to change the settings for the selected effect press CURSOR lt 11 D to select the parameter then change the setting s value with the TIME VALUE dial LOOP FX REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS NS O O O O O O 12345678 is For more on the settings content refer to Loop Effect Parameter Functions p 111 5 Press CURSOR lt 1 gt to display the Send Level settings screen When using CHO DLY LOOP FX INPUT EFFECTS CIL When using REV LOOP FX
203. e An error occurred while reading data from the CD R RW disc Solution This may be due to a low quality or dated disc Try using a new CD R RW disc Solution The Pitch Correction Map can contain a maximum of 99 steps Cannot Program Rhythm Off Cause The Rhythm is switched off so you cannot program it CD Write Error Solution Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF to select Cause An error occurred while writing data to the Arrange mode or Pattern mode CD R RW disc Solution This may be due to a low quality or dated disc Cannot Punch In for CD R RW Try using a new CD R RW disc Cause You cannot punch in when a CD is specified as Data Too Short ie Dounce destination Cause You have attempted to import a WAV AIFF Solution If using the punch in function specify a track as file shorter than one second or to load a WAV the bounce destination AIFF file shorter than 0 1 seconds using the Tone Load function Card Full Solution Make sure the WAV AIFF file to be loaded is at Cause It is not possible to record or copy due to small least one second in length or if using the Tone memory capacity Load function select a WAV AIFF file that is at Solution1 Back up the data you need to your computer p least 0 1 seconds in length 164 p 175 and delete unneeded data Cause You attempted to write an audio CD with a Solution2 Perform the Song Optimize operation p 78 track that is less than four seconds in length Solution Prepare tracks
204. e Audio CD standards require that one song be at least four seconds long If a specified track lasts less than four seconds the track cannot be written to the audio CD Nem What is finalization In addition to audio data information such as the position and time of this data is also written to audio CDs and this process is known as Finalizing If you intend to play your audio CD ona standard CD player it is important that finalization be carried out Once this has been done however you will not be able to add any more songs to the CD For this reason you should aim to carry out the finalization of a CD disc only when it is nearly full of songs If you don t finalize It will not be possible to play your audio CD ona standard CD player until it has been finalized however you can keep adding songs to the disc until this process is carried out The CD R disc that is not finalized during the writing process can be finalized later on For more details regarding methods for finalization after the writing of audio data refer to Enabling Playback on CD Players Finalize p 143 141 Creating Audio CD Viewing the Remaining Time for Recording on Audio CDs Use the following procedure to see how much time you have left for recording on an audio CD 1 Inserta CD R or CD RW disc into the CD R RW drive 2 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear INPUT 6
205. e cursor to PVW and pressing ENTER once more You can press PLAY to preview the sounds and press STOP to stop the sounds 148 Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange Data 7 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the waveform data files you want to import and press ENTER The screen for specifying the import destination appears REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 8 Use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the import destination track and press ENTER Copying of the waveform data begins When Completed appears the import is finished The waveform data is imported at the beginning of the tracks If you want to change the location at which this data is written use Track Edit p 70 to move the data after it has been imported Copying WAV AIFF files as drum sounds Tone Load ore O The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used when tracks are bounced directly to a CD p 59 O Wave data in the following formats can be imported You cannot import wave data in other formats e Use ISO 9660 Level 2 Mode 1 to write the data to the CD R RW disc e WAV or AIFF format e Mono or Stereo e 8 bit or 16 bit e Sampling Rate 44 1 kHz O Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded O Extremely short waveform data less than approximately 100 msec cannot be loaded O The loop poin
206. e cursor up with the patch number and turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the patch number 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Ss For more details regarding the use of insert effects refer to Using the Insert Effects p 84 MEMO Some effect patches are particularly effective for stereo recording For recording in stereo refer to Selecting the recording track p 39 gt Effect Patch List p 202 Algorithm List p 88 Recording without insert effects Press EFFECTS repeatedly to turn off the insert effects The indicator goes out and the sound will be recorded without insert effects HINT Selecting INPUT lt REC DRY gt as the point to which the insert effects are connected allows you to record the sounds without the insert effects while listening to the sounds with the insert effects applied is Changing How the Insert Effects are Used According to the Mode p 87 Recording Playing Back a Song 6 Using the Rhythm What is the Rhythm When you record itis convenient to use the built in Rhythm The Rhythm is a dedicated Rhythm track that can not only play back Rhythm sounds as a guide during recording you can also use it to play internal Rhythm patterns and original user created Rhythm patterns and to play and record these patterns as your own Rhythm part performances By using the Rhythm during recording you can use the track editor to
207. e environment can cause condensation to form inside the drive which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage CD R RW discs When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new environment allow a few hours before operating it O Avoid using the CD R RW drive in locations with high temperatures Failure to observe this precaution can result in the drive becoming unable to operate correctly or in write errors In addition this type of environment can also reduce the lifespan of the CD R RW drive Remove any disc from the drive before powering up or down O To avoid the risk of malfunction and or damage insert only CD R RW discs into the disc drive Never insert any other type of disc Avoid getting paper clips coins or any other foreign objects inside the drive O Do not touch the lens O When the lens is dirty clean the lens with a commercial lens blower O Ifa write error occurs carry out cleaning using a commercially available CD RW drive lens cleaner Note that some commercially available cleaners are intended for CD R drives while others are intended for CD RW drives Be sure to select a cleaner for CD RW drives Never use commercially available cleaner intended for standard CD players This type of cleaner cannot be used to clean the BR 900CD s write lens Even if the recommended type of CD R RW disc is used in a perfectly normal CD R RW drive the possibility of write
208. e given below Recording a new song Song New About data types When you record a new song the BR 900CD allows you to set the data type This enables you to select the combination of audio quality and recording time that is most suitable for the material you are recording The following data types can be selected The data type of a song cannot be changed after it is created HiFi MT2 multitrack 2 For high quality recordings This data type is recommended when you will be doing a lot of track bouncing Normally you should select this type Use this type for most of your recordings STD LV1 live 1 For recordings that will take longer than what can be provided with the MT2 data type This is the most suitable setting for recording live performances LONG LV2 live 2 Of the three data types this provides the longest recording time This is convenient when the card has little recording capacity Recording time The recording times possible for each data type on one memory card are given below when recording one track Data type Recording time times approximate HiFi MT2 STD LV1 LONG LV2 32 MB 16 min 19 min 24 min 64 MB 32 min 39 min 49 min 128 MB 65 min 78 min 98 min 256 MB 130 min 156 min 196 min 512 MB 260 min 312 min 392 min 1GB 520 min 624 min 784 min The recording times shown above are approximate Depending on the number of
209. e line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use This is normal and is nota cause for concern The use of an AC adaptor is recommended as the unit s power consumption is relatively high Should you prefer to use batteries please use the alkaline type When installing or replacing batteries always turn off the power on this unit and disconnect any other devices you may have connected This way you can prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not ex
210. e synchronizing with MTC has the other device been set to the same MTC type p 158 O Has the MIDI sequencer been set correctly O Is the MIDI sequencer ready to play back O Does the other device support the MMC commands of the BR 900CD Synchronization with the rhythm machine is lost O Is the connected rhythm machine receiving Song Position Pointer Certain rhythm machines are unable to receive Song Position Pointer while in Pattern mode Check the MIDI implementation for the rhythm machine you are using Problems with USB Idling screen not displayed O Is the USB cable properly connected O Is your computer s operating system compatible with the BR 900CD Windows Windows Me 2000 XP Macintosh Mac OS 9 1 x 9 2 x or OS X 212 Error Messages If you attempt an incorrect operation or if an operation could Card Read Error not be executed the display will indicate an error message Cause Memory card data cannot be loaded correctly Refer to this list and take the appropriate action Solution 1 Turn off the BR 900CD properly insert the memory card then turn the BR 900CD back on Battery Low Solution 2 Initialize the card p 196 Cause The batteries are depleted 6 x AA dry cell If the same message appears after you have taken the above batteries steps it is possible that the memory card is malfunctioning Solution Replace the batteries as soon as possible p 23 Card Write Error Blank D
211. e timing You can practice rehearse your performances along with Ex OLOSEG n i C D E the metronome before carrying out Realtime Recording SNARE J J During rehearsals the drum sounds are only played and are KICK z i not recorded to the pattern even if you press the track buttons e Q Quantize v m v v 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the O indicator is flashing Ki _ CIO e Q Quantize J Yy yvy yY Yy Y VY vv CH Eee SD C Ki ma On REC MODE INPUT 6 min 374 34 34 on oh EX geen L4 i LL a IN 12345 67 BRM LR ee 2 Press EDIT KICK e f e Q Quantize A A y y em O O O O O O O SD E KI M Y When using high resolution Quantize settings you may be unable to view the entire pattern from start to finish in the display at one time 3 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to REAL and In such instances a symbol appears indicating press ENTER that there is material not currently displayed REAL appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen a a e The Recording Stan
212. ear EFFECTS INPUT 6 IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to LOCAT and press ENTER EFFECTS INPUT 6 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Use TIME VALUE dial to select the track containing the solo vocal recording The following tracks can be selected at this time Tracks 1 through 6 Tracks 7 8 6 Start playback on the BR 900CD Pitches will be corrected in the solo vocal part as it is played Listen to the part to confirm that it is now completely in tune and if necessary adjust the volume of the part using the corresponding track fader Press STOP to end playback 7 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the patch number and select a patch using the TIME VALUE dial IS Pitch Correction Patch List p 205 8 Press a track button to select the track for recording the corrected vocal part The track button will turn red and start flashing to indicate selection as the recording track 9 Move the faders for all tracks except the track containing the solo vocal recording all the way down Note that this also applies to the Rhythm fader 10 Press ZERO to jump to the start of the song and then press REC REC will turn red and start to flash indicating that the BR 900CD is now ready for
213. ears next to the indication of the bank Be aware that if you select a new effect patch while TMP is displayed the altered effect patch is returned to its original settings and the changes are lost 85 Using the Insert Effects Saving Insert Effects Settings Write Follow the procedure below to enter a name patch name for an effect that you ve modified and save it as a new effect patch You cannot save an effect patch during the recording or playback of a song Tf you do not need to change patch name go to step 4 1 At the Effect screen press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to NAME and press ENTER The Patch Name Setting screen appears EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to enter the patch name Press ENTER to switch between uppercase and lowercase 3 After you have completed entering the effect settings and patch name as desired press EXIT to return to the Effect screen 4 Press CURSOR q TH gt to move the cursor to WRITE and press ENTER EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT E
214. ececcccccccecccceccccecesecscseceecesceecceceeceeee 88 Slow Attack acc isla 99 1 COSM GTR AMP o 88 Speaker Simulator ccc eee 100 2 ACOUSTIC SIM coords 88 Tremolo Pamimens naaa 100 UN 89 Voice Transformer mmmiccocoonoonooooonoorneseeereereoersos 100 4 COSM COMP GTR cerecececccceccececcccceceececececeeseees 89 DATE T A AA i 101 5 ACOUSTIC GTR viidiinnieitionnanaaunin 89 Mastering seessoesoessossossoosseesossoeese 102 6 BASS MT 89 Fditine th Mastering Tool Kien cc ite 3 103 7 COSM BASS AMP estadia 90 Saving the Mastering Tool Kit Settings Write 104 8 COSM COMP BSS 90 Mastering Tool Kit Parameter BANK MIG cocoa 90 FUNCTIONS ccccccccecocccccccccccceccccseceeee 105 A Ro Ay A einen aeria 105 LOS VOICE TRAN S asia 90 Parameter Lists enei re aaaea 105 11 COSM COMP VCL cococonnccnociniccnnnnnnnoncnninincnons 91 EQUALIZER accionada diia 105 BANK LINE 00icosoncosoos astas iiiad eiaei 91 Bass Cut Filtel ooo 106 PPE Mae i Enhancer ria 106 E A n apate aa A A aT 106 PANE SIMUL ariaa a 22 Expander inicial 106 A o e e COMPrESS Oese ninas aladas ande oa 107 TEEN EA ta Se M XET ee ne a Co ree er 107 T VOSA OUSUIE aanp aii ze Limiter o n 107 Parameter Distintas 93 E TE EE AA IAA 107 pc ennaa 3 Using the Loop Effocts Track EQ 108 Bass Simulator ooocnoonnoccncnncnnncoccnnnoncnncnnonnnnncnccnno 93 Acs e Loop PAETE ioti 108 A IanO lsat 94 Adjusting How the Loop Effect is Applied 109 COMPrESSO Bi sd 94 Setting the
215. ecorder is stopped before turning off the power to the BR 900CD Turning off the power while recording or playback is in progress may result in the deletion of song data mixer settings and or effect patch data 2 Turn off the power to each device in the reverse order used for powering up 3 Turn the BR 900CD s POWER switch off Play Screen The Play screen is the most fundamental screen of the BR 900CD and is the first screen that appears when the BR 900CD is turned on see below MEAS TIME REC MODE INPUT gt EFFECTS 28 Listening to a Demo Song Selecting a song Song Select Upon power up the song that was selected before the power was turned off is selected and the data of that song is loaded As soon as the data has been loaded the Play screen appears in the display To listen to a demo song follow the procedure given below 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR JI gt to move the cursor to SEL and press ENTER The Song Select screen appears UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL
216. ecordings 1 Prepare a blank CD R RW disc or a CD R RW disc to which data has been written on the BR 900CD but that is not yet finalized p 143 2 Place the CD R RW disc in the tray The CD R RW drive s indicator begins flashing Wait until the indicator stops flashing 3 Press REC MODE a number of times until the BOUNCE indicator lights The BR 900CD is switched to BOUNCE mode IES TIME REC MODE BOUNCE EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Use CURSOR lt 1 gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select CD MES TIME REC MODE BOUNCE EFFECTS IN 12345678 LR Ifyou wish to mix an input source as part of the bounce recording press INPUT SELECT to select the desired input source See Selecting the Input Source and Bouncing the Recording to a CD R RW p 60 59 Putting Multiple Tracks Together Bounce 5 Press REC The CD R RW drive s motor begins spinning Now Checking appears in the display The message disappears approximately ten seconds later indicating that preparations for bouncing have been completed Note In contrast to normal recording you cannot press REC manual punch in after first pressing PLAY The moment REC is pressed a region with a minimum of one song is cre
217. ection Event Map screen you can input the time at which you want the pitch correction to start as 5 well as the pitch Taken together this timing and pitch data is referred to as a correction event Correction Next event Pitch start point start point Correction t M E a fever cnc e eee eo pitch Vocal pitch e Time You can make corrections freely at the desired points in the song by arranging correction events in the sequence they occur The sequence of correction events with the information they contain is called a correction event map Initially only one correction event AUTO is input at the beginning of the correction event map AUTO After the specified point in the song all pitches are corrected in semitone increments Use CURSOR to move the cursor to INSERT and press ENTER A new correction event is inserted EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT 6 IN 123456 7 8 RHYTHM LR Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Time and specify the time at which you want the correction to start with the TIME VALUE dial Smth Note Time Correction Speed EFFECTS INPUT 6 IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR You cannot change the time of the correction event at the start of the song Use CURSOR to move the cursor to
218. ed 147 Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange Data 3 Copying and Writing Waveform Data Note This procedure requires a computer equipped with a drive capable of writing to CD R RW discs If you have a computer equipped with a CD R RW drive you can use CD R RW discs to transfer waveform data between multiple BR 900CDs 4 You can for example use these discs to copy waveform data created with the audio software on your computer and then paste the data to audio tracks You can also take audio track data recorded with the BR 900CD and copy it to your computer for editing Copying waveform data from a computer to the audio tracks WAV AIFF Import nore O To be eligible for import waveform data must meet the 5 following criteria In most cases you will not be able to import other kinds of data e Use ISO 9660 Level 2 Mode 1 to write the data to the CD R RW disc e WAV or AIFF format e Mono or Stereo e 8 bit or 16 bit e Sampling Rate 44 1 kHz Audio data must be at least one second in length Name waveform data using less than eight letters followed by a three character extension O The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be ignored 1 Using a PC burn and finalize a CD R RW disc containing the waveform data that you want to import For instructions on how to write waveform data to CD R RW discs refer to your computer and CD R RW drive owner s manuals Place the CD R R
219. ed there Task Bar 4 4 Task Tray 2 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears With Windows 2000 Me 1 In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk 2 Click the a icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message displayed there Task Bar 4 3 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears 7 Press the BR 900CD s EXIT The USB screen returns to the display 164 If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER returns the USB screen to the display UTIL 8 When backup of the data is complete press EXIT to return to the Play screen At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer Saving BR 900CD Track Data in WAV AIFF Format WAV AIFF Export You can convert the BR 900CD s track data into WAV or AIFF files and save these on your computer After converting your mastered tracks to WAV or AIFF files you can easily use your computer to create audio CDs with the data as well as load the data into audio applications Resolving insufficient memory issues when exporting WAV AIFF When exporting WAV or AIFF files memory cards must
220. ed BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89 336 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit differe
221. ed for the following tasks O Backing up the BR 900CD s data O Saving BR 900CD track data in WAV AIFF format WAV AIFF Export O Loading WAV AIFF files in BR 900CD tracks WAV AIFF Import Importing SMFs and creating patterns Loading drum sounds from WAV AIFF files ore Realtime audio signals and MIDI messages cannot be handled via the BR 900CD s USB connector Compatible OS Windows Windows Me 2000 XP Macintosh Mac OS 9 1 x 9 2 x Mac OS X Driver The BR 900CD uses a standard DRIVER that is found on OS The DRIVER will be installed automatically once connected with Computer via USB Composition of Data on Memory Cards The folders and files created are as shown below Root Directory E ROLAND Folder BRO Folder Disk Information SONG0000 Folder Song Information Effect Parameter Sequence Data Sequence Data Drum Kit Sound Parameter Song Parameter Recorded Data Recorded L Data Recorded R data Wave Data SONG0001 Folder i The folders are created each song TONELOAD Folder L__ WAV AIFF File SMF Folder L SMF File USB Folder L WAV AIFF File ROLAND Folder The structure of the files and folders on the BR 900CD is as follows BRO Folder Song data recording data song arrangements patterns drum kits effect song patches and song information are saved to each song folder TONELOAD Folder WAV and AIFF files loaded for use as drum sounds will be saved here
222. edit in units of measures synchronize outputs with an external device and perform other useful operations For more details refer to Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing p 67 and Synchronizing Playback with a MIDI Sequencer p 158 You can also change the tempo or Rhythm pattern during a song For more details refer to Section 4 Using the Rhythm p 119 The Rhythm features two modes Pattern mode and Arrangement mode Pattern Mode You can perform patterns and create your own original patterns Arrangement Mode You can perform arrangements and create your own original arrangements Patterns and arrangements are composed as shown below Pattern These are drum performance phrases from one to several measures in length Internal patterns preset patterns include prepared patterns for intros verses fill ins and endings Arrangement Patterns arranged in the order they are performed for example intro verse fill in and ending and played at the selected tempo comprise a song intro Verse Fil Verse Ending MEMO The Rhythm is preset with a wide variety of arrangements including the sound of a normal metronome For more details regarding the preset arrangements refer to Arrangement Pattern List p 206 Playing the Rhythm Each time you press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF of the Rhythm the status changes as shown below 5 ARRANGE PATTERN o
223. eeeeseeteseteteeeeeneeenees 207 Parameter List cccccccsscssscesses 208 Troubleshooting cccccccscscseeee 21 1 Error Messages ccccccccccccccccseseee 213 MIDI Implementation ooooooo 216 MIDI Implementation Chart 219 Specifications scccccccccccescscccsees 220 Index AA OO 222 Track Sheet ccccccccsccccscccserees 230 13 Introduction to the BR 900CD Features Simple operation The BR 900CD is designed to be operated as easily as a cassette tape recorder even by beginners The BR 900CD allows anyone to readily enjoy the benefits of digital recording as soon as it s taken out of the box So you ll surely have listened to the demo songs if not gone ahead and produced an entire audio CD all on your first day with your new unit In addition it comes equipped with a CD R RW drive making it easy to keep recorded works stored on audio CDs Digital audio workstation All processes are fully digital In addition to a digital mixer and digital recorder the BR 900CD contains five digital effects processors Itis possible to perform all steps needed for recording including editing bouncing tracks using effects and mixing down entirely within the digital realm so there is no deterioration in the signal quality Using the USB connector also allows you to save the song data you create to a computer Equipped with V Tracks The BR 900CD has eight audio recording
224. eens appear In this case pressing ENTER and then EXIT returns the Play screen to the display UTIL At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer 8 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is flashing REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 9 Press EDIT 10 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to SMF and press ENTER The names of the SMFs on the memory card are displayed iin wv v M v 11 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the SMF to be imported then press ENTER Np When importing GM GS XG compatible SMFs MIDI Channel 10 is generally assigned as the channel used for rhythm performances Thus only the data on MIDI Channel 10 in the SMF is isolated and imported by the BR 900CD Note that the data on other channels is disregarded 12 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the import destination song pattern then press ENTER The import is executed With some SMF files a considerable amount of time may be
225. efer to Changing How the Insert Effects are Used According to the Mode p 87 3 Press STOP 4 Press REC MODE repeatedly until BOUNCE is indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen The INPUT SELECT indicator goes out and the input source is automatically muted This prevents the input source from being mixed in and recorded during bounce recording If you wish to mix an input source as part of the bounce recording press INPUT SELECT to select the desired input source At this time you can apply loop effects p 108 to the sound of the input source 5 If you want to mix in the sound of the Rhythm as well increase the Rhythm fader If you do not want to record the Rhythm lower the fader Putting Multiple Tracks Together Bounce 6 Use CURSOR lt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the recording destination track V Track Here set this to 34V2 V Track 2 of Tracks 3 and 4 Recording destination BOUNCE EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR E V Tracks with recorded data O V Tracks without data When bouncing while recording in mono If you turn the TIME VALUE dial at this time the screen for specifying the track for mono recording is displayed REC MODE BOUNCE EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7
226. en will appear The CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS INPUT 6 IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 150 Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange Data 8 Use the TIME VALUE dial to set the write speed and press ENTER The message Are you sure appears Note The range of available write speeds can sometimes be limited by the type of media being used In such a case the BR 900CD will allow you to select only the supported speeds 9 Press ENTER YES again Writing to the CD R RW disc begins When Completed appears the writing is finished The following files will have been written to the CD R RW disc in ISO9660 Level 2 Mode 1 format Track 1 V Track 1 Track 1 V Track 2 Track 1 V Track 3 TO1___01 WAV or TO1___01 AIF TO1___02 WAV or TO1___02 AIF TO1___03 WAV or TO1___03 AIF T02__07 WAV or T02__07 AIF T02__08 WAV or T02__08 AIF Track 2 V Track 7 Track 2 V Track 8 T0304_01 WAV or T0304_01 AIF T0304_02 WAV or T0304_02 AIF Track 3 4 V Track 1 Track 3 4 V Track 2 T0708_07 WAV or T0708_07 AIF T0708_08 WAV or T0708_08 AIF Track 7 8 V Track 7 Track 7 8 V Track 8 10 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen 11 Press the CD R RW drive s EJECT butto
227. epth of the Chorus effect Pre Dly 0 5 50 0 ms Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the direct sound has been output E Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect sound E When DELAY is selected Dly Tme 10 1000 ms This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well E Level 0 100 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound Rev Send 0 100 Adjust the volume of the reverb that is applied to the delayed sound E When DBLN is selected Dly Tme 0 5 50 0 ms This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed E Level 0 100 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound REVERB Reverberation or reverb is the effect caused by sound waves decaying in an acoustic space or a digital simulation thereof This decay occurs because sound waves bounce off many walls ceilings objects etc in a very complex way These reflections coupled with absorption by various objects dissipate the acoustic energy over a certain period of time called the decay time The ear perceives this phenomenon as a continuous wash of sound Type This selects the Reverb Type ROOM Simulates the reverberation in a small room HALL Simulates the reverberation in a conc
228. er Z UOID9G UTIL When you have finished backing up the data the Idling screen returns to the display 175 Saving BR 900CD Track Data in WAV AIFF Format WAV AIFF Export You can convert the BR 900CD s track data into WAV or AIFF files and save these on your computer After converting your mastered tracks to WAV or AIFF files you can easily use your computer to create audio CDs with the data as well as load the data into audio applications Resolving insufficient memory issues When exporting WAV AIFF When exporting WAV or AIFF files memory cards must have enough free space to hold the files If too little memory is available and the Card Full error message appears there are two approaches you can take to overcome the problem Deleting unneeded data from the memory card 1 Back up the data on the card see p 175 2 Erase unneeded songs see p 77 3 Also erase track data other than that for the tracks you want to export see p 73 4 Export the data 5 Restore the backed up data to the BR 900CD see the Step 5 HINT on p 175 Using a high capacity memory card For more on supported memory cards CompactFlash for the BR 900CD refer to the separate sheet About Memory Cards 1 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB cable 2 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press
229. er A da 21 Display ivi AAA As Display Contrast Dither ss ces sesteaa sac sscansey daseesvaibatevsiacipeaadhdovansdeosedabertestasaacascesis E OT Dram y A a A DUM SOUS italia obdonsdeduse E E a E niini Dynamic microphone iia ed 191 E E a eee See 120 dogs pau ste a iia 94 95 111 123 126 130 134 dit 85 103 115 Edit Effect Screen ici ini 85 Editing Insert effects Mastering Tool Kit Track cidad dpi A OT Effect Patch A EN 85 EFFECTS climalit 35 85 87 Effects aiii iio es eget 35 E aaa 43 110 Equalizer iia iia 43 96 105 ERASE cua 124 125 133 138 153 Erasing Arrangement ii ia 125 Data from a CD RW e 153 DrUM SOUMdsS dia 138 EXPO a 106 EXPORT incitar 150 165 176 Expression Pedal siii titi 27 187 EXTERNAL oeiras ia rana snena S E EEA caian ESAE 34 External MIDI Device iii lts 190 F FOOT SW EXP PEDAL 00 A ae ee Aes 187 FOOT S5W EXP PEDAL jack unas ias 22 Foot Within 27 54 187 Foot Volume asii 96 A de asain dag iadligi anniek Alesina 100 PM ie 100 Formatting Memory card 224 G SN 97 99 106 A a A e Es 140 Grotind terminal it idos 23 GTR fea Aa a dee E N 36 85 202 GUITAR BASS cui a 33 GUITAR BASS jack cc isccceceussidehedesssceeasdisecsessipsoseseisscedbided dgacendass 22 GUITAR BASS MIC2 csscsscssessessesscsssesesssesesssereeeee 34 39 48 84 44 108 111 pilas 20 aer 127 130 Sl cai 106 107 nia 112 e Hee 112 putada 96 A d
230. er MIDI device you will need to set both devices to the same MTC type I Synchronizing Playback with a MIDI Sequencer p 158 5 REC MODE The recording mode is indicated here 6 Level Meter During play mode the volume levels of instruments being input and volume levels of each track are displayed The levels displayed are the levels after the adjustments are made with the INPUT LEVEL knob and TRACK fader i e post fader You can select the level meter to display each type of level being set 21 Panel Descriptions Rear Panel 05 _ EXP PEDAL FE DCIN POWER MIDI OUT FOOTSW USB DIGITAL O oum de ADAPTOR ONY 4 N225 J 1 GUITAR BASS jack High impedance input jack to directly connect your guitar or bass 2 MIC2 jack XLR types These jack allows a mic to be connected XLR jack is provided The BR 900CD can supply phantom power to a condenser microphone connected to this connector p 191 If the connection has been made to the GUITAR BASS and the MIC2 jacks the GUITAR BASS jack is given priority 3 MIC1 jacks TRS XLR types These jacks allow a mic to be connected Both standard TRS jacks p 26 and XLR jacks are provided The BR 900CD can supply phantom power to a condenser microphone connected to this connector p 191 If microphones are connected to both jacks the TRS jack is given priority 4 LINE IN jacks These
231. erformance data with other MIDI compatible devices even if they are of a different type or brand MIDI Connectors MIDI messages i e the data handled by MIDI are exchanged using the following three types of MIDI port MIDI IN This connector accepts the MIDI messages arriving from other MIDI devices MIDI OUT All the MIDI messages from the BR 900CD are sent out from this connector MIDI THRU This connector re transmits all the MIDI messages that arrive at the MIDI IN connector Note The BR 900CD is equipped with a MIDI OUT port but not with MIDI IN and MIDI THRU ports 156 MIDI Channels The MIDI standard allows data to be exchanged among multiple MIDI compatible devices using a single MIDI cable and this is made possible by what are known as MIDI channels In simple terms a MIDI channel is quite similar to a TV channel For example you can change TV channels to watch programs from a variety of broadcasters In this type of situation information is communicated only when the channel on the transmitting end matches the channel on the receiving end Likewise with MIDI as well if the transmitting device is for example set to MIDI channel 1 MIDI messages will be received only if the MIDI channel on the receiving end is also set to 1 MIDI Implementation Charts MIDI makes it possible for a vast range of electronic musical devices to communicate with each other However this does not mean
232. ermore even when CD R discs are used for this purpose playback will not be possible on CD players that do not support this type of media You should therefore confirm that the CD player to be used is compatible with CD R discs Note that the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive can play commercially produced audio CDs CD R discs and CD RW discs Nore When you use the CD R RW drive you must use only the supplied AC adaptor The CD R RW drive cannot be used while running on battery power Setting the Time Between Songs Pre Gap Often when you are playing audio CDs on standard CD players you will see a countdown in the form of 3 2 1 on the player s display before songs start This duration is referred to as a Pre Gap and it can be freely set during the CD creation process to allow song lengths to be adjusted without having to record silence at the end of each 1 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to AUDIO and press ENTER The Audio CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR I J I gt to move the cursor to GAP and press ENTER The pre gap s
233. errors cannot be completely eliminated Please be aware that this type of problem can still occur as a result of variations in CD R RW drives and CD R RW disc manufacturing differences Handling CD R RW discs In addition to the following precautions please also read the instructions provided with the CD R RW discs O DO NOT play a CD R RW disc CD R RW disc on which song data has been backed up on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result O Upon handling the discs please observe the following O Do not touch the recorded surface of the disc O Do not use in dusty areas O Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed vehicle Keep the disc in the case Compatibility of CD R RW discs and drives Ensure that the recommended type of CD R RW discs are always used Failure to observe this precaution can lead to an increase in the frequency of write errors O Even when the recommended type of disc is used there is still a possibility that write errors can occur Please be aware that this type of problem can still result from variations in CD R RW drives and CD R RW disc manufacturing differences O The usage of discs with printable labels is not recommended even if these discs are of the recommended type Certain storage conditions can cause discs with printable labels to warp and
234. ert hall Rev Time 0 1 10 0 This parameter adjusts the duration time of the reverb Tone 12 12 Adjusts the tone E Level 0 100 This adjusts the volume of the reverb sound Track EQ Parameter Functions Parameter List This is a two band equalizer that is independent for each track ore If you adjust the equalizer while listening to the sound you may notice a clicking noise This is not a malfunction If the noise is objectionable make adjustments while the sound is not playing On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off LoG 12 12 dB This sets the gain 12 to 12 dB for the low range equalizer shelving type LoF 40 Hz 1 5 kHz This sets the center frequency 40Hz to 1 5 kHz for the low range equalizer shelving type HiG 12 12 dB This sets the gain 12 to 12 dB for the high range equalizer shelving type HiF 500 Hz 18 kHz This sets the center frequency 500 Hz to 18 kHz for the high range equalizer shelving type 112 Fixing the Pitch of Vocals Pitch Correction The Pitch Correction The term Pitch Correction is used to describe a group of effects that are used on recorded vocal tracks to fix incorrect pitches When compared with guitars pianos and other musical instruments the human voice generally produces a relatively unstable tone And when recording unprepared vocalists this can often lead to considerable difficulties in the for
235. esolving this problem The BOSS_BR 900 icon is added to the computer Ex 5 Import the WAV or AIFF file 1 Click the BOSS_BR 900 icon 2 Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the TONELOAD folder in the ROLAND folder UTIL Z UOID9G When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF files the Idling screen returns to the display 6 Quit the connection to the computer 1 Drag the BOSS_BR 900 icon into the trash 181 7 Press BR 900CD s EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER and then EXIT returns the Play screen to the display UTIL At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer 8 Press UTILITY 9 Press CURSOR lt 1 1 gt to move the cursor to TONE and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 10 Press CURSOR q TH gt to move the cursor to CARD and press ENTER The names of
236. ete any unneeded rhythm patterns p 133 MIDI Buffer Full Cause Excessive number of MIDI messages being output Solution 1 Either decrease the tempo of the Rhythm or reduce the number of Note messages p 123 p 126 Solution 2 Set the RhyMIDI ch to OFF p 157 No Card Cause You have tried to operate the recorder or access the memory while the memory card CompactFlash is not inserted or is not inserted properly Cause The memory card has been removed after selection of data on that memory card Solution Turn off the BR 900CD properly insert the memory card then turn the BR 900CD back on No File Cause The file you are trying to import with WAV AIFF SMF import or Tone Load was not found Solution Have the file you want to import ready No Song Cause There are no songs on the memory card Solution Create a new song p 32 Cause Incorrect data is in the song folder or the necessary data is not present Solution Restore the data backed up on the computer to the BR 900CD In this case restore each ROLAND folder to the BR 900CD p 164 p 175 Error Messages Not Available in Mastering Mode Cause You cannot carry out this operation with MASTERING selected as the recording mode First press the REC MODE button to switch the recording mode to INPUT or BOUNCE then proceed with the operation Solution Not Blank Disc Cause The CD R RW disc alread
237. etro4 4 is set so that a three measure BREAK followed by V1 verse comes after the E ending Arrangement Initial Starting measure BREAK Name Tempo F1 V2 ROCK1 ROCK2 ROCK3 ROCK4 ROCK5 ROCK6 HdRck1 HdRck2 HdRck3 HdRck4 HdRck5 HEAVY1 HEAVY2 HEAVY3 HEAVY4 HEAVY5 POP1 POP2 POP3 POP4 POP5 POP6 POP7 POP8 BALLAD1 BALLAD2 BLUES1 BLUES2 BLUES3 BLUES4 R amp B1 R amp B2 R amp B3 R amp B4 R amp B5 JAZZ1 JAZZ2 JAZZ3 FUSION1 FUSION2 HipHop1 HipHop2 FUNK HOUSE Cntry1 Cntry2 Other1 Other2 Other3 Metro4 4 o ROOM ROOM ROOM ROOM ROOM STD 2 ROOM HARD ROOM ROOM ROOM HARD HARD HARD ROOM ROOM ROOM STD1 ROOM ROOM ROOM STD 1 STD 2 STD 1 ROOM STD 2 STD 2 STD 1 STD 2 STD 1 STD 1 STD 1 STD 2 STD 1 STD 1 JAZZ JAZZ JAZZ STD2 ROOM HIP HOP 808 HIP HOP HOUSE JAZZ JAZZ REGGAE STD 2 ROOM STD 1 o o o oOo amp O OININ o a4 a N _ _ OD N N Zz a Bl a Nn OSO OZ GOO SS SO Zoo o DO OF PO PO CO CO DP VININ O1 O1 O1 a a O1 O1 CO OT OT CO a PO PO OT O1 BY GO GD CG G C CG AA A A O1 PO BR OT G O1 PO G1 A NN 9 9 9 8 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 8 8 5 5 12 10 8 8 6 8 12 8 5 7 12 12 5 9 10 4 6 6 5 9 7 5 oO
238. etting screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Use the TIME VALUE dial to specify a gap time between songs in seconds 5 Press EXIT NEM If silence is included at the end of your finished song the pre gap time will be added to the length of this section and as a result the gap between songs will be longer than expected when the CD is played back on a CD player For details regarding the deletion of silence from the end of songs refer to Erasing Data Track Erase p 73 Writing Songs to Discs Have on hand the disc you want to burn as an audio CD You can write the data to any of the following discs e CD R or CD RW disc with no data written to it blank disc e Discs that have song data that was written to them using the BR 900CD but which still have space available for further recording and have not yet been finalized MEM Methods for creating audio CDs With the BR 900CD only the currently loaded song is written to the audio CD If you want to include other songs on your CD they will each have to be loaded and written in sequence When you use this method individual songs can be added to a disc one at a time until it is full This method is called Track At Once 1 Load the song that you want to write 2 Insert an unrecorded CD R or CD RW disc into the CD R RW
239. ettings 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 Quantize This sets the resolution for the steps being input J Quarter note 96 Na Sixteenth note triplet 16 2 3 Quarter note triplet 64 Thirty second note 12 D Eighth note 48 D3 Da Eighth note triplet 32 HI 1 A Sixteenth note 24 Numerals in parentheses indicate the clock The lower Thirty second note triplet 8 the value set the finer the resolution each beat becomes Ex d Here you can input sounds in eighth note lengths M y vy v v v iv R REC MODE cR STEP RHYTHM RI REC MODE CR OH CH sD KI STEP Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to REC and press ENTER Step Recording starts You can also start recording by pressing REC Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to the measure beat and clock then turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the time at which the drum sound is to be input Measure Beat Clock ii Y v Y M R REC MODE CR STEP Creating Original Patterns 7 Set the velocity how hard the note is played for the sounds to be input from the current point by adjusting Fader 1
240. excitement and impact Moreover in the low frequency range to which the human ear is not very sensitive the sound actually produced might be perceived as being somewhat low in volume even though the meter shows that it s at the maximum level This also makes it difficult to create powerful sounds With the Mastering Tool Kit however you can smooth out the differences in volume that occur over the course of a song while also correcting the balance in the low end We recommend mastering with the Mastering Tool Kit in the final stage of creating songs IS Mastering p 102 Mastering Tool Kit Patch List p 205 Procedure 1 Press REC MODE repeatedly until INPUT is indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press REC REC flashes in red and the BR 900CD enters the recording standby state Flash a 900 900 900 pse gogo 299 ammm 900 000 L 900 NU STOP PLAY REC SCRUB Press PLAY The REC and REC TRACK buttons stop flashing in red and instead light solidly and recording starts Lit gt 900 900 900 800 888 200 TOP PLAY REC S SCRUB When you finish recording press STOP The REC TRACK button lights alternately i
241. f OFF ON This parameter turns the chorus effect on off Rate 0 100 Adjusts the rate of the Chorus effect Depth 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the Chorus effect Pre Dly 0 5 50 0 ms Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the direct sound has been output E Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect sound Compressor This corrects differences in input to create a steadier more even volume balance This is used to extend the sustain of input sounds and conversely to shorten sustain and emphasize the attack portion of sounds Another use of compression is as a limiter which prevents distortion by suppressing only volume peaks On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the compressor effect on off Sustain 0 100 This adjusts the depth of the effect Higher settings values result in longer sustain times Set this to a lower value when using compression for the limiter effect Attack 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume COSM Comp compressor Limiter The compressor corrects differences in input to create a steadier more even volume balance It is used to extend the sustain of input sounds and conversely to shorten sustain and emphasize the attack portion of sounds The limiter is an effect that prevents distortion by suppressing input signals that exceed a set
242. feature you can change the sound from a pickup on an electric acoustic guitar into a richer sound similar to that obtained by a microphone placed near a guitar Best results will be achieved when stereo recording On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the acoustic processor effect on off Body 0 100 This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body That is it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical characteristics of acoustic guitars Mic Dist 0 100 This simulates the distance between the microphone capturing the sound of an acoustic guitar and the guitar itself Level 0 100 This adjusts the volume of the acoustic processor Bass Simulator Simulates the sound of a bass guitar Obtain the sound of a bass guitar while playing an electric guitar You should avoid playing chords when using the Bass Simulator On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the bass simulator effect on off Charct LOOSE TIGHT Bass tone characteristic is set When LOOSE is selected as if the string gauge was getting thicker Level 0 100 This adjusts the volume of the bass simulator 93 Insert Effect Parameter Functions Chorus A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader Best results will be achieved when stereo recording This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter is set to CHORUS On Of
243. fects OFF The modify filter will not be used LPF The effect will function as a low pass filter BPF The effect will function as a band pass filter HPF The effect will function as a high pass filter Cutoff F 0 100 Adjust the cutoff frequency Resonance 0 100 Adjust the resonance Gain 0 24 dB Adjust the volume level of the sound that has passed through the modify filter Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Since it suppresses the noise in synchronization with the envelope of the sound the way in which the sound decays over time it has very little effect on the sound and does not harm the natural character of the sound On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 Octave This adds a note one octave lower creating a richer sound On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the octave effect on off Oct Level 0 100 This adjusts t
244. files O You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a single drum kit Example Kick 3 seconds snare 3 seconds crash cymbal 7 seconds Total 13 seconds O Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as mono sounds with the left and right sides mixed Loading from the tracks This loads sounds recorded to the tracks as drum tones HINT Wh It can be convenient to use the scrub punch in and locator functions to set the range containing the drum sounds you want to load ahead of time You can use the scrub function to repeat playback and locate the point from which loading is to start the start point and press AUTO PUNCH IN then after determining the point at which loading is to finish the end point press LOCATOR to register the range to be loaded Using this technique of setting the start point with AUTO PUNCH IN and the end point with LOCATOR allows you to set the range to be loaded very rapidly 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR lt 1 gt to move the cursor to TONE and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR q to move the cursor to TRACK and press ENTER UTIL
245. finish mastering press STOP During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Editing the Mastering Tool Kit Settings To create a new patch select the patch that most closely resembles the sound you have in mind from the effects patches already stored in the unit then edit its settings If you wish to save the effect settings that you edited save them as a user patch or song patch 1 Carry out Steps 1 3 from p 102 and switch to Mastering mode 2 Press EFFECTS MASTERING TOOL KIT The Mastering Tool Kit selection screen appears P Preset S Song U User Algorithm Name E Number Patch Name EFFECTS RR i REC MODE MASTERING EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the Preset Song User and number 4 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to EDIT and press ENTER The display switches to the Mastering Tool Kit Edit screen which shows the algorithm the effects used shown in the sequence they are connected EFFECTS REC MODE MASTERING EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y EFFECTS REC MODE MASTERING EFFECTS
246. from and track V Track to copy to 6 When you are ready to execute the copy press ENTER The display will ask Are you sure so that you can confirm the operation 7 Press ENTER The copy is executed 8 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Moving Data Track Move Track Move allows you to move a specific portion of data to a different location After the data is moved the location it was in will be left empty The three types of Track Move are given below Moving the repeated portion AB Perform the procedure given below to move the portion from the repeat start A to the repeat end B Ex 1 Moving to the same track Repeat Repeat TO Time Start A End B Ex 2 Moving to another track Repeat Repeat TO Time Start A Start B 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR TL gt to move the cursor to TRK and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM L R y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing 3 Press CURSOR lt TH gt to move the cursor to MOV and press ENTER UTIL
247. g Rhythm Performances ocnenonoonommmm mo 121 Performing Arrangements and Patterns 121 Selecting arrangements mmmeccncncncononennnrncarnnnnnnoos 121 Performing arrangement 121 Selecting patterns oooonicononcnncncnnocnnnnrnenarocarnnnnnnoos 122 Performing Patterns ccccccccesseeeseeeeneeeees 122 Changing the tempo of the arrangements or Patter S ocococconononononnnnoncnnnnonononononnnnn coronan nn coronan nono 122 Tapping to change the tempo of the arrangements OF patterns 122 Creating Original Arrangements 123 Inserting a Step er n eE 124 AAA tiain ateei isaiah 124 Naming ArrangementS cecoconononcnnoncarannronnrnconraranos 124 Copying Arrangements mcococoncnonncnncnnnnnnrirnnnnnnnoos 125 Erasing Arrangements cccsescseccsseesesesssceneeeeeees 125 Creating Original Patterns 126 Note concerning creation of patterns 126 Creating Patterns in Realtime Recording 126 Rehearsing recordings ccceccsesseeeseeteteseees 128 Deleting unneeded drum sounds 129 Changing the metronome volume 0 129 Creating Patterns in Step Recording c c omooo m 130 Changing the velocity cconccinoncncononeneononrananarnos 132 Deleting unneeded drum sounds 000 132 Naming Patterns ocoonononincnnnnenennornrarennrarararararananoso 132 Copying Patterns ccocococicinicinononecnononininanonanananananonoso 133 Erasing Patterns ococcconononinonnoroncnr
248. g any connections make sure that this pin assignment is compatible with that of all your other devices HOT COLD GND HOT COLD GND 26 Connecting Peripheral Devices When using the FS 5U foot switch sold separately set the polarity switch as shown below If the polarity switch is not set correctly the foot switch may not operate properly Polarity Switch You can also use an FS 6 optional for the foot switch If using an FS 6 connect to only one of the FS 6 s jacks either the A or B jack Additionally set the polarity switch to FS 5U The A amp B jack cannot be used Tf using an expression pedal EV 5 or FV 300L set the MIN volume level to 0 Inserting a Memory Card Insert the memory card CompactFlash with the gold colored contacts facing downward the side without contacts should be facing upward Carefully insert the memory card all the way in until it is firmly in place Do not touch the contacts of the memory card or allow them to become dirty Before inserting the memory card be sure to first turn off the BR 900CD If a memory card is inserted when the power is turned on the data in the memory card may be destroyed or the memory card may become unusable 27 Turning On Off the BR 900CD Turning On the Power Once the connections have been completed turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices i
249. g the import source track V Track At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer 10 Repeat Steps 4 8 as needed 11 When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF file s press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen Importing SMFs and Creating 5 Import the SMF 1 Click the BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk Patterns ae o icon You can import SMFs Standard MIDI Files stored on 2 Drag the imported SMF to the SMF folder in the memory cards as song patterns You can easily increase your ROLAND folder collection of song patterns by creating SMFs on your computer or other device and copying them to memory cards LIC O You cannot import SMFs containing more than 999 m measures Add the extension MID to SMFs you are importing When you have finished importing the SMF the Idling Use file names containing eight alphanumeric sareen retiris to the display characters 6 Quit the connection to the computer With Windows XP 1 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 cable icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk 2 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press If this procedure fails to eject the disk use the procedure below UTILITY 1 Click the a ic
250. gged from the outlet OS ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING 7 e Before using this unit make sure to read the e Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord S CAUTION instructions below and the Owner s Manual nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock e Do not open or modify in any way the unit or its hazards AC adaptor Y saver darias cadens ilatina androide ricardo tines cesa AAA gt This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be S e Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts capable of producing sound levels that could within it except when this manual provides S cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for specific instructions directing you to do so Refer a long period of time at a high volume level or at all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland a level that is uncomfortable If you experience Service Center or an authorized Roland any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should distributor as listed on the Information sheet immediately stop using the unit and consult an ME EE E NEE EE O A E T E T E E E E E audiologist e Never use or store the unit in places that are A enn nen enennens e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct e Donot allow any objects e g flammable material sunlight
251. gt ST STEREO MULTI 29 FAST FLG VOCAL MULTI 29 SLOW PAN STEREO MULTI 30 SLOW CHO VOCAL MULTI 30 FASTPAN STEREO MULTI 31 SLAPBACK VOCAL MULTI 31 CHRS DLY STEREO MULTI 32 BigEQ DL VOCAL MULTI 32 CHRS TAP STEREO MULTI 33 BalladFx VOCAL MULTI 33 PH SLPBK STEREO MULTI 34 PTCH 1 2 VOCAL MULTI 34 FLNG TAP STEREO MULTI 35 PTCH 1 2 VOCAL MULTI 35 LoCmbFIlt STEREO MULTI 36 CM DS EH VOCAL MULTI 36 HiCmbFlt STEREO MULTI 37 CM EH EQ VOCAL MULTI 37 120 RMOD STEREO MULTI 38 CM DS EQ VOCAL MULTI 38 PAN DLY STEREO MULTI 39 CM EQ DB VOCAL MULTI 39 ST TREM STEREO MULTI 40 CM EQ DT VOCAL MULTI 40 120 SLIC STEREO MULTI 41 20sRadio LO FI BOX 42 40sRadio LO FI BOX 43 60sRadio LO FI BOX 44 PHONGRPH LO FI BOX 45 Vntg45 s LO FI BOX 46 CLASC LP LO FI BOX 47 VntgSmpl LO FI BOX 48 1985Smpl LO FI BOX 49 R ModSmp LO FI BOX 50 2 BIT DS LO FI BOX 203 Effect Patch List E SML SIMUL No Patch Name Algorithm 01 EQ JC VO GT AMP 02 DELAY JC VO GT AMP 03 CMP TWIN VO GT AMP 04 EQ twin VO GT AMP 05 CMP SMAL VO GT AMP 06 EQ CRNCH VO GT AMP 07 EQ MATCH VO GT AMP 08 DL match VO GT AMP 09 EQ VO VO GT AMP 10 COMP vo VO GT AMP 11 CMP BLUS VO GT AMP 12 CMP BG VO GT AMP 13 DELAY bg VO GT AMP 14 DL MS 1 VO GT AMP 15 DL ms 1 VO GT AMP 16 DL MS1 2 VO GT AMP 17 CM amp EQ ms
252. h the BR 532 61 Displaying the Song Information 62 Displaying the Remaining Available Recording Section 2 Editing 0 000 O3 Registering Time Locator 64 Registering a Locator Point oooconicininonincnnornncnraroonoso 64 Moving to the Locator Point oooinicccoonininnonrnnoonos 64 Deleting a Locator Point oooconoconconincnnnonnonenencnnrarannanaoos 64 Search for the Music s Start and End Scrub Preview cccccccccseceesceses OD Scrubbing to Find the Music Starting Ending Point 65 Changing the Scrub Points ooccnicinoncnconenenennrnrnnanaoos 66 Enabling Use of the Preview Function with REW AIG Bruc liinda idas 66 Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing cccccccccocccscccceeee OF Copying Data Track Copy ocococicicicocanicinnnnaricanononoso 67 Copying the repeated portion AB o oc o 67 Copying by specifying the time TME MES 68 Copying a complete track ALL cee 69 Moving Data Track Move cocococicicicococicnnnoniniranononoss 70 Moving the repeated portion AB 0004 70 Moving by specifying the time IME MES 71 Moving a complete track ALL oconicicicocionones 72 Erasing Data Track Erase ocoiiniciconicnnnonirirnnononoso 73 Erasing the repeated portion AB 00000 73 Erasing by specifying the time TME MES 74 Erasing a complete track ALL 0 0 75 Exchanging Data
253. hat is mistaken As an example of use the explanation below assumes you Changing to recording during the playback of a song is are manually punching in and out to re record a portion of referred to as punching in and changing from recording to track 1 which is a track to which you have already recorded playback is referred to as punching out 1 Press REC TRACK 1 Therefore punch in at the location where you want to begin REC TRACK 1 lights alternately in orange and green the re recording and punch out at the location where you 2 Place the fader for track 1 at the location shown below want the re recording to end Playback Playback 1 1 1 1 Time Start Punch In Punch Out Stop PLAY REC REC STOP 3 Start playback and adjust the volume of the input source using the INPUT LEVEL knob Listen to the track you will be re recording and the input With your BR 900CD you can choose from manual or automatic punching in out You can use the Undo function p 57 to revert to the i j source and adjust the volume of the input source using the INPUT LEVEL knob so that it is the same level as the The data prior to punch in out will remain on the memory track condition before re recording card without being erased If this data is no longer needed in o D 4 Move to a position before where you want to start re order to use the memory card effectively use the song optimize A recording and press
254. he ROLAND folder to the BOSS_BR 900 icon and drop it there overwriting it 3 Press CURSOR 4 Il gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears PP 6 Quit the connection to the computer 4 Select BACKUP with the TIME VALUE dial then 1 Drag the BOSS BR 900 icon into the trash press ENTER The Idling screen appears in the display 7 Press the BR 900CD s EXIT The USB screen returns to the display If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the A computer the following screens appear In this case pressing ENTER returns the USB screen to the display UTIL UTIL 8 When backup of the data is complete press EXIT to return to the Play screen You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling At this point you can safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer screen is displayed Refer to p 212 for instructions on resolving this problem The BOSS_BR 900 icon is added to the computer Ex 5 Back up the data 1 Double click the BOSS_BR 900 icon 2 Drag the ROLAND folder to the computer s folder and drop it in the fold
255. he MODULATION Type parameter is set to SLOW ATCK On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the slow attack effect on off RiseTme 10 2000 ms This adjusts the time needed for the volume to reach its maximum from the moment you begin picking Level 0 100 Adjust the volume of the slow attack sound 99 Insert Effect Parameter Functions Speaker Simulator This simulates the characteristics of various types of speakers When the output of the BR 900CD is connected directly to a mixer etc this can be used to create the sound of your favorite speakers system On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the speaker simulator effect on off Type Selects the type of speaker that will be simulated On Mic simulates the sound when a dynamic microphone is used and Off Mic simulates the sound when a condenser microphone is used E With COSM GTR AMP COSM COMP GTR or VO GT AMP algorithms SP Simulator Speaker Microphone Cabinet Unit Setting SMALL Small open back enclosure 10 inch MIDDLE Open back enclosure 12 inch JC 120 Open back enclosure 12 inch two uni Roland JC 120 Simulation TWIN Open back enclosure 12 inch two uni i Asetting suitable for CLEAN twin Open back enclosure 12 inch Asetting suitable for CLEAN MATCH Open back enclosure 12 inch Asetting suitable for MATCH match Open back enclosure 12 inch Asetting suitable for MATCH VO DRV Open back enclosure 12
256. he drive unit Note that it will only be possible to eject the CD R RW disc while the BR 900CD is powered up Display TIM doo O REC MODE 7 un OL L CI C C 4 8 INPUT ISA OOO 5 6 7 EEE EENE EFFECTS EA OO L LJ LAL C OO N 2 3 RHYTH Displays the menu screen parameter setting screen or other information depending on the type of settings being made If the screen is difficult to view see Adjusting the Display Contrast p 186 1 MEAS MEASURE Displays the current position within the song Indicated from left to right are the measure beat and clock 2 TEMPO The Rhythm tempo is indicated here 3 TIME Displays the time of the current position of the song hours minutes seconds Note If excessive force is used to extract a disc you risk causing damage to the drive 4 Emergency eject hole This hole is used when the disc tray must be opened in an emergency It must not therefore be used on a regular basis and should be treated as a last resort only when the disc cannot be ejected in any other way p 7 4 FRAME Displays the frame number of the current position of the song At the factory settings one second is set to 30 frames non drop This is one type of a specification known as MTC MIDI Time Code and when you use the BR 900CD to play in synchronization with anoth
257. he pattern in the currently selected step Starting Measure Set the measure where the pattern that is selected by the current step will start playing Step 1 Step 2 Intro Verse 1 measure 1 measure Strating Measure 001 002 003 Set the starting measure to 3 in step 2 Step 1 Step 2 Intro Verse 2 measures 1 measure Strating Measure 001 002 003 The starting measure for step 1 is always set to 001 This cannot be changed You cannot set a starting measure that is equal to or earlier than the starting measure that is set for the previous step You cannot set a starting measure that is beyond the starting measure of the next step Pattern Number Select the pattern Set the patterns for each step as shown in the figure below Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Intro Verse Fill 2 measures 1 measure 1 measure Starting Tempo 120 0 Tempo 110 0 Tempo 110 0 Measure 001 003 004 When an arrangement is played from within the Play screen the arrangement plays all the way to the end and then the performance of the pattern set in the last step is repeated Thus by setting the preset pattern P327 BREAK for the last step you can have a rest be played repeatedly which makes it seem as if the performance of the arrangement has stopped Step 1 Step 2 Step Step P327 DN Enana BREAK Time Signature Set the time signature of the pattern that is selected by the current step Tempo
258. he portion to be repeated The portion to be repeated should contain the portion that you wish to re record the portion between the punch in and punch out points Repeat l Playback Playback D I I I I i i i y Time Repeat Start Punch In Punch Out Repeat End A B If the portion to be re recorded is not fully contained in the repeat portion the recording may not start or end as desired How to record As an example of use the explanation below assumes you are using the auto punch in out to re record a portion of track 1 which is a track to which you have already recorded 1 Press REC TRACK 1 REC TRACK 1 lights alternately in orange and green 2 Place the fader for track 1 at the location shown below 3 Use the repeat function p 51 to repeat the playback of the song and adjust the volume of the input source using the INPUT LEVEL knob Listen to the track you will be re recording and the input source and adjust the volume of the input source so that it is the same level as the track 4 Press STOP 5 Press AUTO PUNCH ON OFF The indicator lights showing that the auto punch in and out have been set 6 When you are ready to record press REC then press PLAY to begin recording After you press PLAY you can record from the time the first punch in is reached until the time the punch out is reached Re record the portion as desired When the song is repeated you can check the res
259. he tracks was too high O Is a mic with high output impedance connected directly to the BR 900CD The BR 900CD is designed with a wide margin of headroom Also since the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks are low impedance inputs the recording level may be too low depending on the response of some mics In such cases connect the mic via a mic preamp to the LINE IN jacks on the BR 900CD before recording Cannot digitally record to an external device O Does the sampling rate of the BR 900CD match that of the digital audio device Set the digital audio device to a sampling rate of 44 1 kHz O Does the digital signal format match Your digital audio device may use a non standard digital signal format Connect the BR 900CD to a digital audio device that supports CP 1201 or S P DIF 211 Troubleshooting Problems with the Memory Card Unsupported Card is displayed O Do you have a compatible CompactFlash memory card inserted in the BR 900CD O Is the memory card fully and securely inserted Memory card data was damaged If memory card data has been damaged the following causes are possible Please initialize the card once again p 196 O Was the power turned off while the recorder was operating O Was astrong physical shock applied to the memory card O Could the power have been turned off while the memory card was being accessed O Was the card initialized on a PC or digital camera Problems with the CD R RW Dr
260. he volume of the sound one octave below Dir Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound Phaser By adding varied phase portions to the direct sound the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter is set to PHASER On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the phaser effect on off Rate 0 100 This sets the rate of the Phaser effect Depth 0 100 Determines the depth of the Phaser effect Manual 0 100 Adjusts the center frequency of the phaser effect Resonance 0 100 Determines the amount of resonance feedback Increasing the value will emphasize the effect creating a more unusual sound 97 Insert Effect Parameter Functions Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter is set to PITCH SFT On Off This parameter turns the pitch shifter effect on off Type Selects either manual pitch shifter MANUAL or pedal pitch shifter PEDAL MANUAL This is a simple pitch shifter PEDAL The effect will function as a pedal pitch shifter The effect of the wah OFF ON pedal can be obtained by operating the Expression pedal For a detailed explanation see When Using an Expression Pedal p 187 Pitch 24 DETUNE 24 Adjusts the amount of pitch shift the
261. hile running on battery power The CD menu screen will appear Saving Recorded Songs to a q CD R RW Discs Backup a EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Although the songs you ve recorded and created are stored on the memory card all of this data would be lost in the 3 Press CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor to unlikely event that the memory card was damaged For this DATA and press ENTER reason we recommend that you also save your songs on CD The Data CD menu screen will appear R RW discs Backup Once songs have been backed up in this way it will also be possible to read them from the CD R RW discs into another BR 900CD REC MODE INPUT 6 E Precautions for backup errecTs di IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR e Ifa CD R disc selected for backup already contains data the message Not Blank Disc will appear and backup 4 Press CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor to will not be possible Always use an empty disc for this BACKUP and press ENTER operation If on the other hand you are using a CD RW The Backup menu screen will appear disc that already contains data the message Erase Disc will be displayed If you then press ENTER YES the BR 900CD will begin erasing data from this
262. his button is used to make settings for the Mastering Tool Kit 3 REC PLAY section AUTO PUNCH This button is used to make settings for the automatic punch in out function ON OFF This turns the auto punch in out function on off When this is on the button indicator will light IN For setting the auto punch in location Press this button to set the punch in point When set the indicator on this button will light After the punch in location is set you can press this button to automatically move to the punch in location Press this button while holding down ON OFF to clear the set punch in location OUT For setting the auto punch out location Press this button to set the punch out location at the current location in the track When set the indicator on this button will light After the punch out location is set you can press this button to automatically move to the punch out location Press this button while holding down ON OFF to clear the set punch out location LOCATOR Use this button to store any location that you desire Then by pressing this button you can automatically move to that location When a location is set the indicator on this button will light and you will jump to the location each time this button is pressed Press this button while holding down AUTO PUNCH ON OFF to clear the set location ZERO Moves you to the time location 00 00 000 0 REW The song
263. his sets the time it takes for the lower range compressor to go into effect once the input level exceeds the Lo threshold level Lo Release 50 5000 ms This sets the time it takes for the lower range compressor effect to stop once the input level falls below the Lo threshold level Mid Thres 24 0 dB This sets the volume level at which the midrange compressor goes into effect Mid Ratio 1 1 00 1 16 0 1 INF This sets the ratio of suppression of the midrange output when the input level exceeds the Middle threshold level Mid Attack 0 100 ms This sets the time it takes for the midrange compressor to go into effect once the input level exceeds the Middle threshold level Mid Release 50 5000 ms This sets the time it takes for the midrange compressor effect to stop once the input level falls below the Middle threshold level Hi Thres 24 0 dB This sets the volume level at which the upper range compressor goes into effect Hi Ratio 1 1 00 1 16 0 1 INF This sets the ratio of suppression of the upper range output when the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level Hi Attack 0 100 ms This sets the time it takes for the upper range compressor to go into effect once the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level Hi Release 50 5000 ms This sets the time it takes for the upper range compressor effect to stop once the input level falls below the Hi threshold level With the compressor the level is automatically adjusted to the
264. hus producing a relatively attack less sound similar to a fretless bass Depth 0 100 This controls the ratio of harmonics Increasing the value will increase the harmonic content and therefore will create a more unusual sound Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the defretter sound Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound On Off This parameter turns the delay effect on off Type This Parameter selects the type of delay SINGLE This is a simple delay TAP The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels This will be effective when stereo recording Dly Tme SINGLE 1 1400 ms TAP 1 700 ms This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well E Level 0 120 Adjusts the volume of the delay sound OFF ON Doubling By adding a slightly time delayed sound to the direct sound this produces the impression that multiple sources are sounding together a doubling effect Best results will be achieved when stereo recording This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter is set to DOUBLING On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the doubling effect on off Dly Tme 0 5 50 0 ms This parameter adjusts the delay time
265. i e the interval for which sound is delayed Separation 50 50 Adjusts the diffusion The panning of the direct sound and effect sound can be spread to left and right This effect is obtained with stereo recording using two tracks 8 E E Level 0 120 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound Enhancer By adding sounds which are out of phase with the direct sound this effect enhances the definition of the sound and pushes it to the forefront On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the enhancer effect on off Sens 0 100 Adjusts the manner in which the enhancer will be applied relative to the input signals Freq 1 0 10 0 kHz Adjusts the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be applied The effect will be made apparent in the frequencies above the frequency set here Mix Level 0 100 Adjusts the amount of phase shifted sound of the range set by Frequency that is to be mixed with the input Lo Mix Lvl 0 100 Adjusts the amount of phase shifted sound of the lower range that is to be mixed with the input The frequency range in which the effect is applied is fixed Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the enhanced sound 95 Insert Effect Parameter Functions Equalizer A 4 band equalizer You can use this effect with the following algorithms when 4BAND EQ is selected for the 4BAND EQ WAH Type setting COSM GTR AMP COSM BASS AMP COSM COMP GTR COSM COMP BSS
266. ial aseaea cedeearsseeseduasseseess Song Pattern siryen ne an ar R Ea E E ERNE Song Protect Song Recover Song Select nyerne she sess bars Song Select screen si ss scadslovesslesetilicveeis cacestossseacsiesisscedbedeleeeceniiis 29 Speaker Simulator aa 100 Stereo recording SS TO Ud as bas Time between songs Pre Gap ocorconcocnncnnannorinnaranrananrannarancaranonos 140 Mt AAA E 123 127 130 Time Stretch ii its 192 TimeStrich ad 192 TME MES smc ni ica 68 71 74 TMP cuca disdavons sateus sapsneisduaaucacgabedes da didas 85 MOD et 199 VO GT AMP iia AS A a 92 VOCAL MU T er aa aa ripio piba loader 90 VOICE TRANS vesia es 90 Voice Transformer nv AA 100 Voltiies curia ia ake 99 Vite Rack iii A A 94 PA I TAE EEES AE AEE ES 49 V Track V Track Selection screen esccesecseecseeeseeeseecsceeseeeseeesereneeeeesees 49 Track AtOnce 4 vide Ae ee een ees 140 Track COPY seedivedecccis tied a R tied W Track Editing W a a ET 101 A A rarer IEE VEL emer eee emt as 148 150 165 176 Frack Erase 5 201 igsssisads tetsazisteditiassatsceshisessnegnseseisanadeadet squsensgatencades WAV ATEF Export ovvio 150 165 176 Track Exchange ii a 76 WEY RIPE A EN 171 181 TRACK fader idad is 18 29 WAV ATEF Import wosssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssen 148 167 178 TRACK MIXER tion nta 18 WAVARE men screen nan annae ana 148 Track MOV EA ta 70 A O O 162 164 Windows 2000 5053 casa2ssdevsaidperisd speed i
267. ic Di aa 93 Mic Level aida liar 100 MIC jack iii di 22 Microphone pre amp emi ia 191 Mid Attack 106 107 Mid Levels did 107 A cas 106 107 Mid Release caca 106 107 Mid Thies unicos lin 106 107 Middle ni citas 99 MIDE ns aieri re ia Ao MIDE channel isis dai MIDI connector MIDI Implementation Chart eomocccccononnnnnnnnnincnnanonnnrancnrancarnranino 156 MIDTIN 20 das 156 MIDIOU Tia adas 156 MIDI OUT connector aan 22 MIDESequencer ri en Aan eee lee kd 158 MIDI Sound Module 20 0 ceeeeseesseceeeseceseeeseeeseeeseesseeeseesseeeaeons 157 MIDI THRU Guia adas 156 Mix Level iia alada 95 MIL AD nu nai in 106 MIXET aid dai 107 MOVING ata td 30 To Locator dardos 64 Tr cd 70 72 MS ia lios 98 MIE a 158 159 MIC TYPE ascii ti ia 158 199 MIR a ara 205 Mitin io ie 41 N NAM soina a e E teaser see E R 78 NAME Sia sies sercntiidsd sesh nn ni a ri 86 104 115 124 132 Naming Arrangement diciendo 124 Patteri a 132 ON 78 NEW oo as oia 33 IOT E E A A ia Da 96 INOis SUpPressOr esisin areta RA EE tees E EE TR 97 Mh Ko ee cies eds 116 PANYEO it Ss 42 43 49 110 PAN COR dd co ess lilas aati 100 PAN ee ero 100 A E A E 37 120 122 126 169 179 Pattern Mode nia onan 37 120 Pattern Name dica iia ada 132 Phantom power ssissiscesessisiaiesibaesecsiacceisssteesessdgisetatsaderscadabssets 7 191 Phantom SW iii dnde Axis 191 198 Phaser tale trials 97 PHRASE TRAINER O iat 192 Phrase Trainer
268. ill be achieved In the following situations the Pitch Correction may not be able to accurately detect the pitch and normal operation will not be possible When other sounds are mixed in with the solo vocal part When the volume of the vocal part is excessively loud or quiet When the vocal part contains a lot of sibilance or is very breathy such as a singer that whispers or one with a husky voice When the vocal part contains an excessive number of different pitches such as fast deep vibrato or fast speech When the part is sung with a very low voice containing a lot of harmonics Ifthe BR 900CD is frequently incorrect when detecting the pitch either change the Type setting for the pitch correction function In certain cases this will reduce the number of incorrect detections 113 Fixing the Pitch of Vocals Pitch Correction Using the Pitch Correction Let s now use the BR 900CD s pitch correction feature to clean up some mistakes in a solo vocal part Using this feature we will be able to correct pitches in real time and in semitone units 1 Before using pitch correction record a solo vocal track to work with 2 Press REC MODE several times until the BOUNCE indicator lights up The BR 900CD will now enter Bounce mode 3 Press PITCH CORRECTION This button will light up to indicate that the Pitch Correction is turned on The Pitch Correction patch selection screen will app
269. imported permission of the copyright owner and the circumvention of technologies such as SCMS which prohibit second generation and later copies constitutes copyright infringement and may incur penalties even in cases where such reproduction is ye for your own personal use and enjoyment private EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR use Consult a copyright specialist or special publications for more information regarding the 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to IMP and acquisition of copyright permission from copyright press ENTER holders The BR 900CD does not allow you to import all songs from a audio CD at once Songs must be The screen for specifying the import destination appears imported one at a time REC MODE INPUT 6 1 Insert a audio CD into the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive Sn EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until mus indicator stops flashing and turns off before 7 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the destination proceeding track for import and press ENTER 2 Press CD R RW The message Now Importing will appear and import The CD menu screen will appear
270. in poor insulation and lead to fire Periodically wipe away such dust with a dry cloth Also disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time e Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit A AX CAUTION Never handle the AC adaptor body or its output plugs with wet hands when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit Before moving the unit disconnect the AC adaptor and all cords coming from external devices Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet If used improperly batteries may explode or leak and cause damage or injury In the interest of safety please read and observe the following precautions p 23 e Carefully follow the installation instructions for batteries and make sure you observe the correct polarity e Avoid using new batteries together with used ones In addition avoid mixing different types of batteries e Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time e Ifa battery has leaked use a soft piece of cloth or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the discha
271. ing Destination TIME REC MODE BOUNCE EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR E V Tracks with recorded data O V Tracks without data IS What are V Tracks p 14 2 Use CURSOR 1 D and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V track to which you want to record MEMO You can also select the CD R RW drive as the recording destination For more details refer to Bouncing Directly to a CD R RW Disc Direct CD Bounce p 59 3 Press REC REC flashes in red and the BR 900CD enters the recording standby state goo 200 i 09 999 Soo yr ooo 388 ae jp slp T STOP PLAY SCRUB 4 Press PLAY The REC and REC TRACK buttons stop flashing in red and instead light solidly and recording starts Lit n gt o e 809 399 808 800 REC STOP PLAY SCRUB 5 When you finish recording press STOP During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed MEMO To prepare for further recording after the bouncing has been completed the BR 900CD automatically switches to an empty V Track at the bounce destination MEI After bouncing down to two tracks you can use the Mastering Tool Kit to eliminate discrepancies in volume levels throughout the song and to achieve the proper low end balance
272. ion of muting sounds from being too noticeable 107 Using the Loop Effects Track EQ Here is an explanation of how to change the various When using REV parameters for the loop effects chorus delay doubling Select either HALL or ROOM reverb gt For an explanation of loop effects refer to Loop Effect Parameter Functions p 111 L 0 0 O O A A A 24 MEMO A E T Loop effects do not have patches Loop effect settings are f 4 To change the settings for the selected effect press saved along with the song data If you want to save the settings in the currently selected song CURSOR lt 1 D to select the parameter and turn the hold down STOP and press REC TIME VALUE dial to change the set value Selecting the Loop Effect REC MODE You cannot use the chorus delay and doubling effects INPUT 6 together You must choose only one BEREEUTS eG A 1 Press LOOP EFFECTS IF For a description of the parameters for each effect refer to 2 Press CURSOR q TH gt to move the cursor to CHO Loop Effect Parameter Functions p 111 DLY or REV and press ENTER 5 When you finish making settings
273. is button and pressing the REC TRACK button 5 TIME VALUE dial You can use this dial to shift the current position within a song e g fast forwarding and rewinding It is also used to change the values of the various function settings UTILITY This button calls up various functions offered by your BR 900CD such as track editing song management and memory card Operations UNDO REDO For undoing the last performed recording or editing operation and returning the data to its previous state By pressing this button once again you can bring back the canceled recording or re execute the editing operation p 57 EXIT NO Press this button to return to the previous screen or cancel the last entry ENTER YES Press this button to confirm a selection or a value being entered CURSOR buttons Press these buttons to move the cursor within the screen 6 CD R RW The BR 900CD uses this drive unit to read from write to and play CD R RW discs Rhythm section Here you can make settings for the Rhythm function ARRANGE PATTERN OFF Pressed to cycle the Rhythm function through the available selections Arrangement Pattern gt Off EDIT This calls up the screen for programming arrangements and patterns RHYTHM PAD This button switches the TRACK button functions to Rhythm input is Section 4 Using the Rhythm p 119 PHRASE TRAINER Use this button to perform the settings f
274. isc Cause An error occurred while writing data to the q i memoty card Cause Disc in the CD R RW drive contains no data Solution The memory card must be initialized p 196 Solution Load a CD R RW disc that has data written on it Also the song data you had been attempting to save will be lost Cannot Edit Quantize is Low Cause During Step Recording of a pattern the Quantize CD Full setting is too coarse so multiple entries are Cause 1 The CD R RW disc is full and no more data appearing at the same point in the matrix can be written to it Solution Fine the Quantize setting p 130 Cause 2 When creating an audio CD the total time of the tracks exceeds the capacity of the CD R RW disc Cannot Edit This is a Preset Solution Either reduce the amount of data to be written Cause Preset data is selected you cannot edit this data or place a new CD R RW disc in the drive and start the procedure over again CD Medium Error Solution Copy the song data and then edit that Cannot Erase Cause There is a problem with the CD R RW disc Cause No further steps can be erased Alternatively the disc on the CD R RW drive Solution The Pitch Correction Map must contain a is unreadable minimum of one step Solution 1 Confirm that the correct type of disc is placed in the CD R RW drive Cannot Insert Solution 2 Use a new CD R RW disc Cause No further steps can be inserted CD Read Error Caus
275. issdesegaseiscssusdacsocssasdebadictasendsdiensavasneassssaigasaidacesse 96 105 Low Mid Freq ita Sareea 105 Low Mid Galisteo teary 105 Limitet saesson a E E E EGET E EEA E A E E AE ENE ee SE NRE TRE EA LINE cena oblidat da LINE IN jacks LINE OUT jackson iii bits 22 Eo Attack Ae 106 107 O dag E EEEE 112 DOS ETE EE EEE 112 Lo Level iia E S 107 Lo Mix Evl ieni asee tad 95 Lo Rata E a es 106 107 Lo Release iuris 106 107 Lo THiS a3 04 sh cask E E E S T A E ESET LO FEML LO MALE LOAD E EATON E OENE OO E MacOS I LXer ei a e ESS 162 MacOS IZ Raa sean Sess E EA N EE 162 MacOSX r dai Ai 162 Macintosh sonas 162 175 MANUAL 0 98 A RO 96 97 Manually Punching In Out coomcccoccnnancnnnnannnrinnananrannnrannarinrarnnrnnnos 53 MASTER siii Esa sae eia a RaR la riain MAS iii dis MASTER fader Master Tape DISC esin er a e A aeiscaeen cio MASTERING viii aaa A Mastering SCION ennn e e E EEEE Ea EES Mastering Tool Kit conoonnnconccnocnncnoanoanoonornornnnnnnnnrnnonnnnnos Mastering Tool Kit Patch MER taa 158 MPA S a a laredo a e O SAE scbsbenseeatnasseaoess 21 Measure ii ER 127 130 MEMORY CARD ctricos tii 20 Memory Cardin Ae lali 5 16 27 31 Composition of data meri a 162 Remaining Memory siiski ra a tAE SEA aE SE a 62 Saving MEMO me e e E EEE EE EE 78 METAL siae aoaaa anaa E O S E SAE 98 METAL Di N e V ESS 98 Metronome avril tit n 129 Mio a 34 39 MIC pirt at 20 36 48 85 203 NA 7 198 M
276. itch during playback of a song manual patch in and out press the foot switch once to punch in then press it again to punch out In order to use a foot switch When you are using a foot switch BOSS FS 5U Roland DP 2 etc to punch in and out connect the foot switch to the FOOT SW jack on the BR 900CD and change the function of the FOOT SW jack by following the procedure given below 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to SYS and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR gt and select Foot SW IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial and select PUNCH PUNCH IN OUT 5 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Auto Punching In and Out Automatically punching in and out at predetermined locations or times in the song is referred to as auto punching in out When you want to punch in and out at accurate times or when you want to concentrate on playing rather than punching in and out manually the auto punch in out function is very useful Specifying the area for auto punching
277. ive Cannot remove the CD R RW disc O Is the power turned on The CD R RW disc cannot be removed unless the power is turned on O Is a screen for reading from or writing to CD R RW discs showing in the display It is not possible to eject the disc when you re in a screen for reading writing CD R RW discs Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen then press the EJECT button again Cannot read from write to CD R RW discs O Is the BR 900CD in a level position O Was astrong physical shock applied to the CD R RW drive Is the disc correctly placed in the CD R RW drive Are you using the right type of CD R RW disc 000 Are you using a CD R disc that has already been written to or a CD RW disc that may be too old Is the CD R RW drive being force ejected Pressing a straightened paper clip or similar object into O the emergency eject hole in the CD R RW drive s front side forces ejection of the CD R RW disc However the CD R RW drive may not operate correctly after this is done Should this be the case turn off the power then turn it back on again Synchronization Problems Cannot Synchronize When using MTC to synchronize the BR 900CD with a MIDI sequencer the BR 900CD must be the master device O Is the MIDI cable connected correctly O Is the MIDI cable broken O Has the sync generator been set to the desired synchronization procedure MTC or MIDI Clock p 158 O Ifyou ar
278. l begin to be applied Mix Lvl 24 12 dB Sets the volume of the effect sound Input This divides the original sound into three frequency ranges low mid and high Gain 24 12 dB Sets the overall volume level before the signal passes through the expander compressor Dly Time 0 10 ms This sets the amount of time by which the source input sound is delayed SplitL 20 800 Hz This sets the frequency in the lower range at which the source sound is split into three separate ranges SplitH 1 6 16 0 kHz This sets the frequency in the upper range at which the source sound is split into three separate ranges 106 Expander This expands the dynamic range at a fixed ratio On Off OFF ON This setting turns the expander on off Lo Thres 80 0 dB This sets the volume level at which the lower range expander goes into effect Lo Ratio 1 1 00 1 16 0 1 INF This sets the ratio of increase in output of the lower range when the input level falls below the Lo threshold level Lo Attack 0 100 ms This sets the time it takes for the lower range expander to go into effect once the input level falls below the Lo threshold level Lo Release 50 5000 ms This sets the time it takes for the lower range expander effect to stop once the input level exceeds the Lo threshold level Mid Thres 80 0 dB This sets the volume level at which the midrange expander goes into effect Mid Ratio 1 1 00 1 16 0 1 INF This set
279. lt should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit e Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through e Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information sheet e Batteries must never be recharged heated taken apart or thrown into fire or water e DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result gt 9 AX CAUTION e The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation e Always grasp only the output plug or the body of the AC adaptor when plugging into or unplugging from this unit or an outlet e Any accumulation of dust between the AC adaptor and the power outlet can result
280. lume Modulation Flanger Chorus Phaser Pitch Shifter Doubling Tremolo Pan Delay Insert Effect Parameter Functions 11 COSM COMP VCL This is a multi effect designed for vocals The COSM compressor limiter is perfect for creating a basic COMP LIMHDESHENH EQ NS FV DLY COSM Comp Limiter sound De esser Enhancer 4Band Equalizer Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Delay BANK LINE 12 STEREO MULTI This algorithm connects seven types of effect all in full COMP IRAN PIE GIWAHN Eiusj tev IM0D DLY Compressor stereo Ring Modulator 4Band Equalizer Wah 4Band Equalizer Wah Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Modulation Flanger Chorus Phaser Pitch Shifter Doubling Tremolo Pan Delay 13 LO FI BOX This allows you to simulate sounds that appear to be playing on an AM radio the sounds of old records played on an old fashioned gramophone and even extreme deformations of the sound produced by a Lo Fi Digital LOFI NS Lo Fi Box Noise Suppressor 91 Insert Effect Parameter Functions BANK SIMUL 14 VO GT AMP This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a vocal and electric guitar For the guitar you can produce an amp sound using a preamp and speaker simulator GUITAR COMP PAMP SP NS DLY MIC COMP EQ INS DLY GUITAR Compressor PreAmp
281. m from the BR 900CD using the procedures described here For details on the MMC functionality supported by the BR 900CD read MIDI Implementation p 216 Operating MMC compatible 3 devices with the BR 900CD This section explains how to make settings for synchronizing the playback with a computer based sequencer program that supports MMC and MTC Make connections as shown in the diagram below MIDI IN MIDI OUT The BR 900CD will be the master for MMC and MTC Follow the procedure given below to operate the play stop fast forward and other functions of a sequencer program with the BR 900CD 160 Press UTILITY Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to SYNC and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press CURSOR lt 1 1 gt to select MMC Master and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the MMC mode UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR OFF ON MMC will not be transmitted MMC information is sent The BR 900CD becomes the master of the external MIDI instrument For details on the MMC function
282. m of notes sung out of tune and poor sound quality When properly used the BR 900CD s Pitch Correction will help to ensure that your vocal tracks will always sound great Makeup of the Pitch Correction This effect is intended for use with the playback of recorded audio tracks and cannot be used on input sources The Pitch Correction and audio tracks are connected as shown below Chorus Delay Send CHORUS L DELAY R M Track Pan PITCH E Track CORRECTION EQUALIZER R MIX REVERB L mix Reverb Send Pitch Correction Patches In the case of pitch correction you can set up the way in which the effect is to be applied and can then save these settings A group of such settings is referred to as a Patch At the time of purchase a total of 5 pitch correction patches i e preset patches will be stored in the BR 900CD In addition 5 song patches can be set up for use within a specific song Precautions for Pitch Correction Usage e When you are using the Pitch Correction you will not be able to use insert effects or the Mastering Tool Kit e The Pitch Correction is intended for use with recorded vocal tracks and it cannot be applied to input sources or the Master output e These effects will function when applied to solo performances other than vocals however the fundamental differences between the character of the human voice and that of musical instruments makes it highly unlikely that the desired result w
283. mpo current setting 25 0 250 0 Starting Measure current setting 001 001 999 Pattern current setting P001 327 S001 100 Drum Kit Drum Kit STD1 STD2 ROOM HARD JAZZ HIP HOP HOUSE REGGAE 808 SongKitl 5 Pattern Parameter Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Measure 1 current setting 1 1 999 Time Signature 1 current setting 4 4 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 Tempo 3 current setting 25 0 250 0 Quantize 3 current setting A d De di Ss A Da HI Click 3 Click 3 0 3 210 Troubleshooting If the BR 900CD does not function as you expect please check the following points before assuming that a malfunction has occurred If this does not resolve the problem contact a nearby Roland service center or your dealer Problems with the Sound No sound O Is the power of the BR 900CD and of the connected equipment turned on O Are the audio cables connected correctly O Are any audio cables broken O Has the volume of the connected amp or mixer been lowered O Has the MASTER fader or headphone volume of the BR 900CD been lowered Is a memory card inserted OO Has the wrong card been inserted You can use commercially available CompactFlash cards as memory cards for the BR 900CD The 3 3 V type with the capacities of 32 MB to 1 GB can be used O Are you attempting to play back a short phrase of less than 1 0 seconds Phrases of 1 0 seconds or less cannot be pla
284. n 11 When you have finished inputting sounds move the cursor to STOP and press ENTER You can also stop recording by pressing STOP Changing the velocity During Step Recording when you move the cursor to a point in the matrix display where a drum sound has been input the velocity value appears in the position where the time signature is normally indicated At this point you can change the velocity by adjusting Fader 1 STEP Deleting unneeded drum sounds You can use either of the two following methods to delete unneeded drums sounds in Step Recording Method 1 1 Move the CURSOR to the point in the matrix display where a drum sound you want to delete has been input then press ENTER Method 2 1 When you hold down DELETE MUTE and press one or more track buttons for the tones you want to delete You can delete the unneeded drum sound at the current measure beat and clock OOOO rh SNARE CLOSED HH OPEN HH CRASH RIDE CK COWBELL M1 TOM2 TOM3 TOM4 lt Pm You can use up to eight characters in naming patterns You can not change the Preset Pattern name Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is flashing Press EDIT Press CURSOR to move the cursor to NAME and press ENTER The Change Pattern Name screen appears
285. n After specifying the time in the procedure above a may appear to show that there is a discrepancy between the actual current position and the position displayed If you specify the locations using measures specify the locations at each screen using the TIME VALUE dial to eliminate the discrepancy HINT You can also enter the time using LOCATOR ZERO STOP REW STOP FF and AUTO PUNCH IN OUT Copying a complete track ALL Perform the procedure given below to copy the complete recorded data from one track to another 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to TRK and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM L R y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR QU gt to move the cursor to CPY and press ENTER 69 Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM L R 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select ALL and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Use CURSOR gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V Track to copy
286. n orange and green indicating that track contains recorded data You cannot play back sounds recorded for less than one second During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Recording Playing Back a Song How the Tracks Are Organized The BR 900CD features eight audio tracks that can be used for recording and playback Tracks 1 through 6 are independent mono tracks Tracks 7 and 8 are linked as stereo tracks Tracks 7 and 8 are fixed as left and right tracks respectively while fader movements Loop Effects and other processes are applied in common to both tracks These two tracks thus make a convenient bounce destination p 58 Tracks 7 and 8 also become dedicated mastering tracks during mastering p 102 In addition to and separate from the audio tracks the BR 900CD also includes dedicated stereo tracks for playback of the internal rhythms p 37 8 Playing Back Recorded Music 1 Press ZERO to move to the time location 00 00 00 00 0 sacs 2 Press PLAY Use the TRACK faders to adjust the volume separately for each track Silencing the sound of specific tracks Track Mute During playback hold down DELETE MUTE and press a REC TRACK button that is lit in green and orange alternating or green The REC TRACK button will change to blinking in orange or green and the sound of that track will be muted sile
287. n pedal Roland EV 5 or BOSS FV 300L sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Use a cable from Roland to make the connection If using some other make of connection cable please note the following precautions e Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For infor mation on cable specifications contact the manufac turer of the cable IMPORTANT NOTES Handling CD ROMs e Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner Before Using Memory Cards CompactFlash Using Memory Cards e Carefully insert the Memory card all the way in until it is firmly in place e Never touch the terminals of the Memory card Also avoid getting the terminals dirty e This unit s memory card slot accepts CompactFlash memory cards Microdrive storage media by IBM are not compatible e CompactFlash cards are constructed using precision components handle the cards carefully paying particular note to the following e To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity be sure to discharge any static electricity from your own body before handling
288. n the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices 1 Before you turn the power on make sure of the following points O Are all external devices connected properly O Is the volume on the BR 900CD and all other devices completely lowered O Is the memory card inserted The BR 900CD is shipped with a memory card already inserted in the slot 2 Lower the MASTER fader on the BR 900CD 3 Turn on the devices connected to the input jacks i e GUITAR BASS MIC 1 MIC 2 or LINE IN 4 Turn on the POWER switch located on the rear panel l BOSS Corporation move BR 900CD DCIN POWER Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before switching on power Even with the volume all the way down you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on but this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally 5 Turn on the device connected to the output jack i e LINE OUT or DIGITAL OUT Nove If you are using the AC adaptor make sure that the AC adaptor does not become unplugged during operation If the AC adaptor becomes unplugged accidentally the recorded data may become damaged Turning Off the Power 1 Make sure that playback of the song is stopped ote Always make sure that the r
289. n to eject the disc 12 Use the application on your computer to copy the data from the CD R RW disc Note e Ifa CD R disc that already has data written to it is loaded the message Not Blank Disc appears and you cannot proceed with the export Be sure to use only blank discs e Ifa CD RW disc that already has data written to it is loaded the message Erase Disc appears Pressing ENTER YES here begins erasure of the disc After the disc has been erased the export process will continue e When a mono track is specified as the source for exporting the data is written as a mono waveform file When a stereo track is specified the data is written as a stereo waveform file e Tracks 7 8 are fixed as a permanent stereo pair and so cannot be specified as mono tracks e To quit writing to the disc while writing is still in progress press EXIT NO When the message Cancel appears press ENTER YES writing is cancelled it may take some time after you press EXIT NO for the message to appear However no guarantee can be made for the utility of the content up to the time writing is cancelled e It will not be possible to reuse a CD R disc for which writing was canceled before completion Using SMF Playing SMFs using external MIDI instruments SMF Player You can use the BR 900CD to read SMFs from CD R RW discs and play these files using MIDI instruments connected to the MIDI OUT port Any S
290. nced If you repeat the same operation the button will return to its previous lit state and the sound of that track will once again be heard GOOQ0OE lt h DELETE 1 MUTE 9 Overdubbing Recording an additional performance while listening to an existing performance The tracks for which the REC TRACK button is lit in green or alternately in orange and green are tracks that already have data recorded on them The process of listening to a previously recorded performance while you record additional material on another track is called overdubbing By recording the bass guitar and vocals on different tracks you can then adjust the volumes of each instrument with respect to one another change the left right sound balance exchange data and perform other operations 1 Press one of REC TRACK 1 7 8 to select the track to which to record By selecting a different track to record from the track that you previously recorded you can record a new part while listening to the previously recorded part The status of each track can be determined from the indicator on the button Off No recorded data exists on the track Green Recorded data exists on the track Red The track is selected for recording If a track with existing data is selected for recording the indicator will light alternately in orange and green Ifyou choose a track to record that already
291. nd time becomes repeat end point B The portion between the two points is then repeated during playback Repeat i Time _AREOO gt Repeat Start Repeat End A B Press REPEAT again to cancel the repeat function and delete the start and stop points Setting the Repeat Portion 1 Enter the repeat start point A Move to the position where you want the repeat to start and press REPEAT ca lt P gt CI O O The position is set as repeat start point A The REPEAT indicator begins to flash telling you that the repeat start point A has been registered If you wish to re do the registration you can cancel the registered location by pressing REPEAT when the current location is the same as the repeat start point A If the current location is beyond the repeat start point A press REPEAT twice to cancel the registration The REPEAT indicator goes out and the registered repeat start point A and end point B are deleted 2 After registering the repeat start point A register the repeat end point B Move to the position where you want the repeat to end and press REPEAT ca A O o That position becomes repeat end point B The REPEAT indicator lights telling you that the repeat end point B has been registered To re do the registration press REPEAT once again The REPEAT indicator goes out and the registered repeat start point A and end point B are
292. ndby screen appears Measure Tempo REC MODE Time Signature Quantize 126 Creating Original Patterns 4 Use CURSOR and the TIME VALUE dial to set the measure beat and click from which to start recording of the pattern Measure This sets the number of measures in the pattern to be recorded Valid Settings 1 999 Tempo When recording this sets the tempo for confirming the pattern Valid Settings 25 0 250 0 The tempo setting here is exclusively for confirmation of the pattern recording This tempo is not stored in the pattern you cannot make any individual tempo settings for the patterns themselves Time Signature This sets the time signature i e the beat for the pattern to be recorded Valid Settings 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 Quantize This sets the recording quantization Setting Quantize lets you to have the sounds being input conform to preset note lengths thus eliminating discrepancies in the input timing Press HI you want to keep the timing used to input the sounds Valid Settings J Quarter note A3 Sixteenth note triplet J3 Quarter note triplet Thirty second note d Eighth note dg Thirty second note triplet dg Eighth note triplet HI Sixteenth note 5 Press CURSOR JI gt to move the cursor to REC and press ENTER The count in is played and then Realtime Recording
293. ng is in progress Power Save Mode PowerSave Valid Settings OFF 1 3 5 10 min Initial value OFF This setting turns the Power Save function on and off Power Save is a function that reduces power consumption through such power saving measures as switching off the display s illumination if no operation is performed for a set period of time for one three five or ten minutes This is effective in preventing excess battery drain About the Sync Parameters This section describes the Sync parameters 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR lE gt to move the cursor to SYNC and press ENTER 3 Using CURSOR 11 D 1 select the Sync parameter then make the setting with the VALUE TIME dial Sync Generator Sync Gen Valid Settings OFF MTC MCK Initial value OFF This sets the synchronization signals output from the MIDI OUT connector OFF No synchronization signal is output from MIDI OUT MTC MTC synchronization signals are output from MIDI OUT MCK MIDI CLOCK synchronization signals are output from MIDI OUT MMC Master Valid Settings ON OFF Initial value OFF This setting determines whether or not the Master MMC code is output from the MIDI OUT connector Utility Parameter List MTC Type Valid Settings 30 29N 29D 25 24 Initial value 30 This sets the type of MTC output from the MIDI OUT connector 30 30 frames per second non drop format This is used by a
294. nging your song to completion INPUT BOUNCE MASTERING 1 Guitar 1L 147 2 Bas gt 2D Rk gt 2 _n 3 L_Vocal_ Mixing down to two tracks Finishing the song with levels optimized 8 Keyboard 39 Recording Playing Back a Song INPUT Only the instrument sounds or other input sources are recorded to the tracks Sounds played back from other tracks are not recorded BOUNCE As the sounds on different tracks are played back they are recorded together onto another track In Bounce mode you can play back eight tracks simultaneously and record them all to a single separate V Track When the input source is selected with INPUT SELECT you can also include those sounds in the recording You can further include the sounds from the Rhythm in the recording as well You can also select the CD R RW drive as the recording destination p 59 MASTERING Here you apply the Mastering Tool Kit to the two tracks to which other tracks have been bounced to finish up with a song with levels volume optimized The Rhythm cannot be used in this mode What is a Mastering Tool Kit When creating an audio CD from your recorded songs or recording to an MD or similar media the overall volume needs to be restrained so that even the loudest portions of the songs are handled appropriately on the CD or MD However this often results in an overall lowering of the volume resulting in a CD or MD that lacks
295. nging patterns 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is flashing ARRANGE PATTERN OFF 2 Select a pattern Use CURSOR gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the Preset Song and number P Preset S Song Number Pattern Name REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Preset Patterns P The preset patterns contain preset data Their settings cannot be changed and you cannot create a new preset pattern Song Patterns S Song patterns can be written however the data for song patterns are stored along with the song data to the memory card Memory Card BR 900CD 3 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Changing the tempo of the arrangements or patterns You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or pattern being played by carrying out the following procedure while the Play screen is displayed The arrangement s tempo setting is temporarily disabled 1 Use CURSOR and align the cursor up with TEMPO in the display 2 Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the tempo Tempo MES TIME REC MODE INPUT LLL MENA EFFECTS MENA m a O O O O a I 3 5 7 A L O O E CIO N 2 4 6 8 RHYTH The change in
296. ngly or vocals are sung loudly Adjusting the input level Adjust the volume of the input source for recording 1 Lower the MASTER fader 2 Turn the INPUT LEVEL knob to its center position and then slowly increase the MASTER fader 1 INPUT LEVEL 1 At this time use the INPUT LEVEL knob to adjust the input level so that the level changes in the 12 between 24 and 6 0 dB range of the IN level meter The volume level is adjusted with the MASTER fader and INPUT LEVEL knobs Level meter display This shows the volume levels for each track MEAS E REC MODE LJ ae Cl 0 00 ome nn Ree le 24 EFFECTS CIC nee e IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR IN The level meter shows the input from INPUT 1 8 The level meter shows the output of Tracks 1 8 RHYTHM The level meter shows the output of Rhythm LR The Level meter shows the post MASTER fader output level When monitoring the sound with headphones use the MASTER fader to adjust the volume to the level you desire 5 Using Insert Effects The BR 900CD comes with five onboard effects processors an insert effect loop effects track EQ pitch correction and mastering tool kit Below is an explanation of the operations related to the insert effects What is an insert effect An effect added directly to a specific signal with the BR 900CD this refers to the inst
297. no UTIL Z UOID9G When saving in stereo Select the track combination 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 165 7 Press ENTER Conversion of the WAV or AIFF file begins Files names are converted as shown below Mono Stereo Track 1 V Track 1 Track 1 2 V Track 1 TRO1__ _1 WAV or TRO102 _1 WAV or TRO1___1 AIF TRO102 _1 AIF Track 1 V Track 2 TRO1___2 WAV or TRO1___2 AIF Track 1 2 V Track 2 TRO102 _2 WAV or TR0102 _2 AIF Track 7 8 V Track 7 TR0708_7 WAV or TR0708_7 AIF Track 6 V Track 7 TRO6__ _7 WAV or TRO6__ _7 AIF Track 6 V Track 8 TRO6__ _8 WAV or TROG_ __8 AIF Track 7 8 V Track 8 TRO708_8 WAV or TRO708_8 AIF Converting songs takes approximately the same amount of time twice as long in stereo to complete as it does to play the source song data When the conversion is complete the BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon is added to the computer Saa BOSS_BR 900 Removable Disk Export the WAV or AIFF file to the computer 1 Click the BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon 2 Drag the WAV or AIFF file in the USB folder in the ROLAND folder to the computer s folder and drop it in the folder UTIL
298. nrnooso 35 Recording without insert effectS iimmmmo 36 6 Using the Rhythm oooocococincnccnnnnnnncnonenencnnrnrannonaoos 37 Playing the Rhythm oooconcoconinononcnncncnenrnrnrnnnnnnrnoso 37 Changing arrangementS cmecencncncononcneneninannnnnnnnnaso 37 Changing patterns ccoonconononnnnnnnnnenerrerrnnnnnnnoso 38 Changing the tempo of the arrangements or PATLEITS cemer nae ETA T En 38 Tapping to change the tempo of the arrangements Or patterWMS oonoonconcncnnnonnnrnrannnrnnnns 38 7 Basic Recording sssini issirinkti 39 Selecting the recording traCK ooonmmmm m m 39 About the recording REC modes c ucocoo o 39 Procedure amoniesninnrss nan 40 8 Playing Back Recorded Music ocococcnononcnnoncncnnnaoos 41 Silencing the sound of specific tracks Track Mute sinisin ennpa tii 41 9 Overdubbing Recording an additional performance while listening to an existing performance 08 41 10 Adjusting the Sound for Each Track 42 Setting the positioning pan of the sound 42 Adjusting the tone Track EQ oconononinconincninnnnoo 43 Adding width to the sound Loop Effect 43 11 Bouncing Putting multiple tracks together 45 12 Turning Off the Power eee 45 13 Removing the Memory CaldAcoconcnconcninnnnnnnnnnnos 45 Po Section 1 Recording and Playback 47 Recording oocmmsssss 48 Selecting the Recording Track oooinonemnmmmm m 48 Changing V T
299. ns 00000000000000000000000000 1 7 Front Panels cui cda 17 ReariPa elnintt a area newest estaales 22 Inserting Batteries esere aen ao 23 Quick Start ccccccccccccsccccccees 2D Connecting Peripheral Devices 26 Inserting a Memory Card moooconenincncncnncnnennnncornnnnnnnnoos 27 Turning On the Power coococoncononcnonononncnnrnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnoos 28 Turning Off the POWeD ccccccecestetstetesesteteeseeees 28 Listening to a Demo Song 29 Selecting a song Song Select oconocicininonononionos 29 Playing back a song occococcnnonononononncncnnonnnrarnnnnnnnnoos 29 Changing the current position 30 Recording Playing Back a Song 31 1 Preparing the Memory Card cooconininincnnrnnannononnas 31 2 Turning On the Power oocncinicnonnnnnnnininoncnrnnncnnnns 31 Formatting the memory card Initialize 31 3 Selecting the Song to Record ou 32 Recording a new song Song New 32 4 Connecting Instruments cmconicncinnnnnoninnnnnnnnncninns 33 Choose which jack you will use to connect your istrument cater eet eeret diese dete 33 Press the INPUT SELECT button of the instrument that you want to record 00 34 Turning on the internal microphone 34 Adjusting the input sensitivity oocononcncoincncnannos 35 Adjusting the input level onocninoninionmm m 35 5 Using Insert Effects eects eeeeeeeeees 35 Switch effect patches cocococonininoncononenenenirnnan
300. nstrument is tuned above the displayed note Your instrument is tuned the displayed note 4 Repeat steps 13 to tune each of the strings Tf you are tuning a guitar that has a vibrato arm tuning one string may cause other strings to drift In this case you should first tune the strings approximately so that the correct note name is displayed and then re tune each string 189 Setting the Reference Pitch of the Tuner The reference pitch refers to the frequency of the A4 key i e the A key at the center of a piano keyboard from the instrument that serves as the reference pitch during performances e g piano On the BR 900CD you can set the reference pitch of the tuner to any value between 435 and 445 Hz This was set to 440 Hz when the unit was shipped from the factory 1 Press TUNER to access the Tuner screen 2 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the reference pitch Calib Calibrate 435 445 Hz 3 To exit the tuner press TUNER once again or press EXIT to return to the Play screen NEM The reference pitch set here is used as the reference pitch for
301. nt from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement Model Name BR 900CD Type of Equipment Digital Recording Studio Responsible Party Roland Corporation U S Address 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 Telephone 323 890 3700 LIBOSS BOSS Corporation 2SX
302. nte 162 Windows Mei 162 Windows Bit ear 162 Wow Flt sie eau ae Raids 96 Writing Insert effects iii 86 Mastering Tool Kit csi secsscsstesiisescesiasvessesanscesepataccuibedesseesenee 104 Pitch Correction iii 115 Audio CD iii 140 Wayeform data ahii ia 148 U X U A O oaaae r ee E eae 76 U UNDO REDO Z U ZERO isa iio 30 U U USB Folder aio 163 USB reia 164 User Patch UTILITY v WM A AAA A 120 Melodia S EA anes 127 131 132 Meninas tad 120 VODRV ias 98 VOFAG SIM ii tao sr 92 VOFACOUSTIC ut ii 92 229 pues Au EINEN puss AJH puss AJH puss AJH puss Au CIERRE puss AJH puss My puss Au puas A10 0H9 puss A10 OHO puas A10 0H9 puss A10 OHO puas A10 0H9 puss A10 OHO puas A10 OHO puas A10 0H9 yBIH 03 yBIH OF yBIH 03 yBIH 03 yBIH 03 yBIH 03 yBIH 03 odua NYALLVd odua J30NVyJYyUV S MOVdL v MOVaL MOVal aweN uos co oMIVIL 1994S AL dDOO6 JE IWHLAHY 8 Z MOVAL d 9 MWOVdL CIT sly jo9 0 d For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is colour
303. on in the task tray then click the 3 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to USB Stop USB Disk drive message displayed and press ENTER there The USB screen appears 4 Select BACKUP with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER The Idling screen appears in the display Sani Task Bar 4 4 Task Tray 2 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware dialog box that appears UTIL With Windows 2000 Me 1 In My Computer right click on the BOSS_BR 900 icon or Removable disk icon to Eject the disk 2 Click the a icon in the task tray then click the Stop USB Disk drive message displayed UTIL m m there You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling screen is displayed Refer to p 212 for instructions on i resolving this problem Task Bar 4 Task Tray The BOSS_BR 900 or Removable disk icon is 3 Click OK in the Safe To Remove Hardware added to the computer dialog box that appears amp a B BR 900 isk lt OSS_BR 900 Removable Disk 169 Z UOID9G 7 Press BR 900CD s EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen If you press EXIT without quitting the connection to the computer the following scr
304. or reggae REC TRACK 3 TOM1 808 Set based on the renowned Roland REC TRACK 4 TOM2 TR 808 rhythm machine REC TRACK 5 TOM3 S1 5 REC TRACK 6 TOM4 SongKit1 5 Original drum kits assigned to each song p 135 134 Using the Drum Kits 5 Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen Drum kits are stored to each individual arrangement separately Example Arrangement Drum Kit ROCK 1 ROOM ROCK 2 ee STD 2 Creating Original Drum Kits Tone Load With the BR 900CD you can create original drum kits not only with the internal drum sounds but by loading drum sounds from external sources as well There are four ways to load drum tones Loading from the tracks Loading from other drum kits Loading from WAV AIFF files p 171 p 181 O Loading from WAV AIFF files on CD R RW p 149 whe The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used when tracks are bounced directly to a CD p 59 O Wave data in the following formats can be imported You cannot import wave data in other formats e WAV or AIFF format e Mono or Stereo e 8 bit or 16 bit e Sampling Rate 44 1 kHz O Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded O Extremely short waveform data less than approximately 100 msec cannot be loaded O The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be ignored O Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and the extension AIF to imported AIFF
305. or the phrase trainer function When using the phrase trainer you can turn on or off the center cancel function for removing vocals at the center or the time stretch function for slowing down playback is Canceling the Center Sound Center Cancel p 192 Slowing Down the Speed Time Stretch p 192 19 Panel Descriptions 9 PAN EQ Pressed to access a screen where you can set the pan left right location of the sound for the playback of each track or for the input sound p 42 p 49 This also adjusts the tone Low High for each track p 42 p 110 LOOP EFFECTS Use this button to call up the screen for setting the send level of each track respective to the loop effects p 43 p 108 switching between reverb and chorus setting the various parameters and more is Using the Loop Effects Track EQ p 108 Loop Effect Parameter Functions p 111 PITCH CORRECTION Use this button to turn on and off the Pitch Correction This function adjusts the pitch of recorded vocals is Using the Pitch Correction p 114 REC MODE Recording Mode This button is used for selecting the recording mode IS Basic recording p 39 p 48 Bounce Putting multiple tracks together p 45 p 58 Mastering p 102 11 MEMORY CARD indicator This indicator will light up whenever data is being read from or written to a memory card Nore Never t
306. ororarnnnnrorararannraranoso 133 Using the Drum Kits 0c ccc000 134 Performing the Drums ooococononcnccnnnnnnnnnnrnnncnnarnnnnaoos 134 Selecting Drum Kits ccccceccccesceeenetesesesnenenens 134 Creating Original Drum Kits Tone Load 135 Loading from the tracks ooococcconencmnmmmmm mm 135 Copying drum sounds from other drum kits 137 Changing the position pan of the drum sounds 138 Po Section 5 Section 6 Using MIDI 155 ING TNE zee ree MIDI Fundamentals LAAZIZI 1 56 Creating Audio CD Cocccccccccccccccccoocce 140 What is MIDI ic iia eTa 156 Pr od a 140 MIDI Connector ssssseescssseeeesseessseessssecessneesesnees 156 Setting the Time Between Songs Pre Gap 140 MIDI Channels ocococncconocinonannconinnnnanannnnnncnnononananancnnns 156 me 7 MIDI Implementation Charts ooocicicocacicacininonanicnoso 156 Writing Songs to DISCS onoincncononononcnncncnenannrnrnnannos 140 Viewing the Remaining Time for Recording on Synchronizing with MIDI Devices 157 Audio CDS ani id nido 142 Using the Rhythm to Play an External MIDI Sound Playing Back Audio CDS cocaina 142 Module cc tata la iii 157 Enabling Playback on CD Players Finalize 143 A PA O aa y Synchronized playback with the BR 900CD Using the CD R RW Drive to Exchange A A AS 158 Da ooncononncononnconcnncnnccanonccaconccaconos 145 Setting the MTC offset cesses 159 Saving Recorded Songs to CD R RW Discs Usine MMO arae
307. ory card is the event A newly created song provides approximately 2 000 events per song For each track one recording pass uses two events Operations such as punch in out or track copy also use up events The number of events that are used up will fluctuate in a complex way Even if there is capacity remaining on the memory card further recording or track editing will not be possible if all of the events are used up In such cases an error message such as Event Full will appear Finalized Disc Cause Data has already been written to the CD R RW disc and the data has been finalized Place a CD R RW disc that has not been finalized in the drive Solution Turn Off Pitch Correction Cause You cannot use the loop effects or phrase trainer while Pitch Correction is on Press PITCH CORRECTION to turn it off and try the operation once again Solution Memory Full Cause The total time of the drum sounds for one drum kit that can be loaded with tone load has exceeded 13 seconds Solution Make sure the drum sounds being loaded by means of tone load do not exceed a total of 13 seconds p 135 p 171 p 181 Cause No rhythm pattern memory remaining Solution 1 Delete any unneeded rhythm patterns p 133 Solution 2 Delete any unneeded drum sounds in the rhythm patterns p 129 p 132 Cause You have attempted to import an SMF that exceeds the available memory for imported files Solution Del
308. osition Pointer The current position is transmitted by the Song Position Pointer Message when the BR 900CD is stopped or the locate operation has been performed if the SYNC parameter Sync Gen is set to MCK Status Second Third F2H mmH nnH mm LSB nn MSB Song Position Point 00H 00H 7FH 7FH System Realtime Message Transmitted when Sync Gen is MCK in the SYNC parameter Timing Clock Status FSH Active Sensing Status FEH This is transmitted at intervals of approximately 200 msec OStart Status FAH Continue Status FBH OStop Status FCH MIDI Implementation System Exclusive Message Status Data Bytes Status FOH 1iH ddH eeH F7H Byte Description FOH Status of Exclusive Message iH ID Number 7EH Universal Non Realtime Message 7FH Universal Realtime Message ddH Data 00H 7FH 0 127 eeH Data F7H EOX End of Exclusive Message The BR 900CD can transmit and receive Universal System Exclusive messages Universal System Exclusive Message OMIDI Machine Control Commands Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H aaH bbH F7H Byte Description FOH Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 7FH 06H MMC Command Message aaH Command bbH Command F7H EOX End of Exclusive Message see 2 MIDI Machine Control section MIDI Time Code Commands OFull Message Basic opera
309. ound is not removed as you desire or if you want to emphasize the bass sound When CentrCncel is set to OFF subsequent operations are disabled Copying Difficult Songs Phrase Trainer 3 To emphasize the bass sound press CURSOR 41 gt to select Low Boost and turn the TIME VALUE dial and adjust the value so that the bass sound is more easily heard REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM Lk 4 Press CURSOR gt to select C Adjust and turn the TIME VALUE dial and adjust the value of the sound that you want to remove to decrease its volume Depending on how the song was recorded these procedures may not be able to remove the sounds completely REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen NEM You can turn on both the Time Stretch and Center Cancel functions to use them together 193 g uoIp s Initializing the BR 900CD s Settings Initializing All the BR 900CD s Initializing the System Settings Settings Follow the procedure below to initialize the system The following settings are initialized together at one time parameters e System Settings IE e Effects User Patches Song Patches A list of the initial setting
310. ove the cursor to PAN and press ENTER The PAN settings screen appears REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR to display IN PAN INPUT EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the pan settings The pan settings made here are automatically applied to the track that you are recording to so that after recording is complete you can listen to the track with the same pan as that when it was recorded 5 Press PAN EQ or EXIT to return to the Play screen HINT Pan the playback tracks to left or right and the sound you are playing to right or left to make it easier to hear yourself 49 Recording Operations 1 Press REC MODE repeatedly until INPUT is indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen TIME INPUT EFFECTS IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Press REC REC flashes in red and the BR 900CD enters the recording standby state Flash a 900 900 900 388 gso 889 cee LE
311. p 171 p 181 SMF Folder SMF files loaded for use in song patterns will be saved here p 169 p 179 162 USB Folder WAV and AIFF files loaded to the BR 900CD s tracks and WAV and AIFF files saved on computers track data converted to WAV and AIFF format will be saved here p 165 p 167 p 176 p 178 Folders and files created on memory cards are displayed on the computer screen When you continue with an operation the BOSS_BR 900 icon is added in the computer screen With certain versions of Windows OS the Removable disk icon may be displayed Ex WindowsXP J vako _ Devices with Removable Storage H snr Re Bet amp coDrve E My Computer e System Foer ows pr 800 Sa BOSS_BR 900 Ex Windows 2000 Removable Disk Ex Macintosh When you click the BOSS_BR 900 icon or the Removable disk icon or double click the BOSS_BR 900 icon on the Macintosh the ROLAND folder is displayed Open this folder to show the BRO folder the TONELOAD folder the SMF folder and the USB folder Ex YU YU Y BRO SMF TONELOAD Before Using USB Overview Connecting a Computer Use the USB cable to connect the BR 900CD to your computer Purchase USB cables at computer stores or other retailers To USB connector of your computer
312. pose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up on a memory card computer or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liabilit
313. pted cannot be done while the Phrase Trainer p 192 is operating Press PHRASE TRAINER to turn off the Phrase Trainer Solution Stop Recorder Cause The operation you attempted cannot be done while the recorder is running playing or recording Solution Press STOP to stop playback or recording Too Many Songs Cause You are attempting to create more that 100 songs Solution Erase unneeded songs p 77 Unformatted Cause The Memory card is not formatted by DOS Solution 1 Turn off the BR 900CD properly insert the memory card then turn the BR 900CD back on Solution 2 Initialize the card p 196 Unsupported Card Cause The memory card CompactFlash or MicroDrive inserted is not compatible with the BR 900CD Solution Use a memory card compatible with the BR 900CD 32 MB to 1 GB CompactFlash with a power source voltage of 3 3 V Unsupported Format The BR 900CD cannot recognize or use the format of the inserted memory card Cause 1 Solution 1 Insert a memory card initialized for use with the BR 900CD p 196 You have attempted to load an incompatible WAV or AIFF file or SMF to the BR 900CD Solution 2 Check the format of the WAV or AIFF file or SMF Cause 2 Use AC Adaptor Cause You have attempted to use the CD R RW drive while running on battery power You cannot use the CD R RW drive while the BR 900CD is powered by the batteries If you want to use the CD R RW
314. r The BR 900CD can operate in synchronization with a MIDI sequencer o se synchronizing with a MIDI sequencer it is possible to synchronize the MIDI sequencer using the BR 900CD i e with the BR 900CD as the master but it is not possible to synchronize the BR 900CD with the MIDI sequencer i e with the BR 900CD as the slave For details on operation of your MIDI sequencer refer to the operating manual for your device For information regarding MMC see p 160 Synchronized playback with the BR 900CD as the master Follow the procedure given below to synchronize the MIDI sequencer using the BR 900CD 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the BR 900CD and your MIDI sequencer as shown in the diagram po oon bd O oom lA 200 DOO 00000 o o MIDI MIDI iN Sequencer MIDI OUT 2 Press UTILITY 3 Press CURSOR q TH gt to move the cursor to SYNC and press ENTER 158 IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press CURSOR 11 gt to select Sync Gen and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the sync generator
315. r gt Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings LCD Contrast LCD Contrast 13 1 21 Foot Switch Assign Foot SW PLAY PLAY PUNCH FX Audio Sub Mix Switch Sub Mixer OFF OFF ON Internal Mic On Off Switch Mic EXTERNAL EXTERNAL ONBRD EXT Phantom Power Switch Phantom SW OFF OFF ON 3 AB Quantize AB Qtz OFF OFF ON Remain Information Remain Inf OFF OFF ON Power Save Mode PowerSave OFF OFF 1 3 5 10 min Calibrate Tuner Calib 440 435 445 Hz Sync Parameter gt Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Sync Generator Sync Gen OFF OFF MTC MCK MMC Master MMC Master OFF OFF ON MTC Type MTC Type 30 24 25 29D 29N 30 Rhythm MIDI Channel RhyMIDI Ch 10 1 16 OFF Offset Offset 00 00 00 00 0 Any time 209 Parameter List CD Parameter Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Pre Gap Pre Gap 2 0 sec 0 0 3 4 sec 3 Scrub Parameter c Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Scrub From To Mode From To FROM FROM TO Preview Switch Preview SW OFF OFF ON Rhythm Parameter 1 Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Arrangement Pattern Off OFF OFF ARRANGE PATTERN Arrangement Arrangement Name P01 P01 50 S01 05 Pattern Pattern Name P001 P001 327 S001 100 Rhythm Pad 3 OFF UPPER LOWER OFF Arrangement Parameter 1 Parameter Name Display Initial Value Valid Settings Step current setting 1 1 50 Te
316. racks snara eienares 49 Changing the Position of the Input Sound Pan 49 Recording Operations ococononcnncncnncnnnnnnnaronrararnnnncnnnoos 50 Repeating Playback Repealt 5 1 Setting the Repeat PortiOM onecoincncononcnonenonrnnnnrnoos 51 Setting the Repeat Portion with Accurate Timing 52 Re recording Only a Mistake Punch in Out cccccecssorrevsseeseee DO Manually Punching In Out onccncncncononcnonannnnrnnnnnrnos 53 Manually punching in and out using REC 53 Manually punching in and out using afoot Ss Within nm sas msi 54 Auto Punching In and OUt cneconinincononcnennnrnrnnnnrnoos 54 Specifying the area for auto punching in out 54 Erasing a registered auto punch in out location 55 How tOPOCOL i assieta 55 Repeatedly Recording Over the Same Location Loop Rec rdig y srne terme aS 56 Setting the portion to be repeated icicicococonions 56 HOW to TOC Ll priii 56 Canceling an Operation Undo Redo 57 Reversing the Last Operation Undo icococonio 57 Canceling the Undo Redo 57 Putting Multiple Tracks Together BOUNCE iusicicnncianiniacinena cosida DS Bouncing Directly to a CD R RW Disc Direct CD Bounce Jior A 59 Selecting the Input Source and Bouncing the Recording to a CD R RW ou 60 Loading Songs Created with the BR 864 BR 532 ccccccccccssssereeeeeee Ol Loading Songs Created with the BR 864 61 Loading Songs Created wit
317. racks are bounced directly to a CD p 59 O Wave data in the following formats can be imported You cannot import wave data in other formats e WAV or AIFF format e Mono or Stereo e 8 bit or 16 bit e Sampling Rate 44 1 kHz Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded Extremely short waveform data less than approximately 100 msec cannot be loaded O The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be ignored O Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and the extension AIF to imported AIFF files O You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a single drum kit Example Kick 3 seconds snare 3 seconds crash cymbal 7 seconds gt Total 13 seconds Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as mono sounds with the left and right sides mixed 1 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB cable 2 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press UTILITY 3 Press CURSOR JI gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears 4 Select BACKUP with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER The Idling screen appears in the display UTIL UTIL You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling screen is displayed Refer to p 212 for instructions on r
318. rasure press ENTER YES To cancel the operation press the EXIT NO or UTILITY Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly repeatedly to return to the Play screen If you erase a song currently being used the song on the memory card with the lowest number is selected If there are no other songs on the card a new song is created 77 Organizing the Songs You ve Recorded Saving Memory on the Memory Card Song Optimize When you perform overdubbing or punch in out the data that you rewrite replace actually remains on the memory card In some cases this unwanted data may occupy a significant amount of space on the memory card This will cause the time available for recording to be less than it should be By performing a Song Optimize you can have the BR 900CD erase any unnecessary data on the memory card and increase the unused space 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to EDT and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to OPT and press ENTER Are you sure appears in the display UTIL IN 123 4
319. recording 11 Press PLAY Both PLAY and REC will light up and recording will start The solo part will be played and any incorrect pitches will be fixed At the same time the corrected part will be recorded on the selected track 12 Press STOP at the point where you want to stop recording The BR 900CD will stop playback 13 Press ZERO to jump to the start of the song once again and then start playback of the recorded track Move the fader for the track containing the original vocal part all the way down and raise the fader for the track containing the corrected vocal part to an appropriate point As you listen to the corrected part confirm whether or not you are happy with the corrections MEMO If you do not like the way the vocal part was corrected use Undo p 57 to cancel the recording 14 After you have completed entering the settings press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen 114 Fixing the Pitch of Vocals Pitch Correction Setting the Correction Method for Vocal Pitch Pitch Correction Edit Each of the preset patches 1 through 5 uses a slightly different method for correcting pitches Normally it will be sufficient to select the patch that gives the results you like best however if you cannot achieve favorable results using any of these patches you can change the Pitch Correction settings to create a patch of your own 1 Select a preset patch to base your new patch on
320. return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed NEI The sounds produced by the Rhythm and their corresponding note numbers are given below Rhythm Sound Note Number 2 Press UTILITY Closs Stick Gl 6D 3 Press CURSOR lt j gt to move the cursor to Metronome click Al 33 SYNC and press ENTER Metronome bell A 1 384 Kick C2 36 Snare D2 38 i i Tom 4 F2 41 b Closed Hi hat F 2 42 E Tom 3 A2 45 ee Open Hi hat A 2 46 y Tom 2 C3 48 Clash Cymbal C 3 49 Tom 1 D3 50 a o Ride Cymbal D 3 51 y Cowbell G 3 56 N 12345678R LR Tone arrangement is based on GS GM In case your external MIDI sound module is not based on GS or GM you will need to make settings on your external MIDI sound module to change the sounds that correspond to each note number For details on making these settings refer to the manual of your MIDI sound module Ifyou are using an external MIDI sound module to play the Rhythm use the controls of the external MIDI sound module to adjust the volume level 157 Synchronizing with MIDI Devices Synchronizing Playback with a MIDI Sequence
321. rge from the battery compartment Then install new batteries To avoid inflammation of the skin make sure that none of the battery discharge gets onto your hands or skin Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the discharge gets near your eyes Immediately rinse the affected area with running water if any of the discharge has entered the eyes e Never keep batteries together with metallic objects such as ballpoint pens necklaces hairpins etc Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that may be observed in the region in which you live Should you remove screws keep them in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally Always turn the phantom power off when connecting any device other than condenser microphones that require phantom power You risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply phantom power to dynamic microphones audio playback devices or other devices that don t require such power Be sure to check the specifica tions of any microphone you intend to use by referring to the manual that came with it This instrument s phantom power 48 V DC 7 mA Max IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under USING THE UNIT SAFELY on page 2 3 please read and observe the following Power Supply Use of Batteries Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generat
322. rgency eject hole If you insert something while the power is on the disc could get damaged or unexpected problems may occur Notes When Using Mics Always be sure to switch the phantom power off except when connecting condenser mics requiring a phantom power supply Supplying phantom power to dynamic mics audio playback equipment and other devices that do not use phantom power may cause damage to your equipment For mic specifications please refer to the owner s manual for whatever model of mic you are using y BR 900CD Phantom Power 48 V DC 7 mA Max Phantom power is supplied to the XLR connectors for MIC 1 and MIC 2 simultaneously The phantom power cannot be switched on or off for each connector individually If simultaneously using mics that require phantom power with those that don t then connect any mic that does not need phantom power to one of the 1 4 phone jacks Phantom power is supplied only to the XLR connectors not to the 1 4 phone jacks To connect mics to the 1 4 phone jacks use a commercially available XLR to phone adapter cable or other form of adapter USING THE UNIT SAFELY 2 IMPORTANT NOTES cccccsccccccccee 4 Before Using CD R RW Discs 6 Notes When Using Mics s cceccee7 Introduction to the BR 9000D 14 Features A Ara 14 Memory Cards Supported by Your BR 900CD 16 How to remove the card protector 16 Panel Descriptio
323. rumental sounds from an INPUT jack is called an insert effect The effect pedals that a guitarist connects between his guitar and amp are a type of insert effect Loop effects on the other hand are effects connected to the send return jack of mixers and other similar devices refer to p 43 Switch effect patches The BR 900CD provides numerous effects for vocals guitar etc and two or more of these effects can be used simultaneously Such a combination of effects i e the types of the effects used and the order in which they are connected is called an algorithm Each effect in an algorithm offers a certain number of parameters which allow the sound to be altered similar to tweaking the knobs on a stomp pedal The algorithm and its parameter settings are bundled into units called effect patches By changing the effect patch you can simultaneously change the stored effect combinations their on off status and the parameter settings and completely change the sound 1 Press EFFECTS to display the currently selected effect patch P Preset S Song U User Algorithm Name Sri Number Patch Name EFFECTS REC MODE INPUT EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Your BR 900CD allows you to automatically select the most suitable banks by pressing an INPUT SELECT button For example pressing the GUIT
324. s for each parameter is given in the Rhythm Arrangements Patterns Drum Kits Parameter List p 208 1 Press UTILITY 1 P TILITY ress U 2 Press CURSOR q Il gt to move the cursor to INI 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to INI and press ENTER and press ENTER UTIL 0 UTIL 0 6 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL 0 6 IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR QU gt to move the cursor to SYS 3 Press PARAMETER CURSOR lt gt to move the and press ENTER cursor to ALL and press ENTER The confirmation message Are you sure appears in The confirmation message Are you sure appears in the display the display 0 UTIL j o 24 6 IN 123 465 67 8RWMN LR eee 4 To continue the initialization press ENTER YES 4 To continue the initialization press ENTER YES
325. s of condenser microphone use internal batteries as a source of power accordingly there will be no need to supply phantom power in such a case note Notes when using the Phantom power e Phantom power should always be turned off when audio sources other than condenser microphones are being connected to the BR 900CD s In fact dynamic microphones audio players and the like can be damaged by this power supply Always refer to the user s manual for the microphone to be used in order to confirm its phantom power specifications A supply of phantom power is not needed for certain types of condenser microphone i e microphones featuring internal batteries electric condenser microphones etc Ensure that phantom power is set to OFF whenever one of these microphones is connected The BR 900CD s MASTER fader INPUT SENS GUITAR BASS MIC2 and MIC knobs and INPUT LEVEL knobs must be moved all the way down when phantom power is being turned on or off If this precaution is not observed there is a possibility that amplifiers speakers and the like may be damaged by loud noises generated upon switching Before proceeding turn INPUT SENS GUITAR BASS MIC2 and MIC knobs fully counter clockwise in order to reduce the input volumes and then move the MASTER fader and INPUT LEVEL knobs all the way down If any of these volumes is not reduced a loud click may be output when the phantom power is turned on or off Press UTI
326. s the ratio of increase in output of the midrange when the input level falls below the Middle threshold level Mid Attack 0 100 ms This sets the time it takes for the midrange expander to go into effect once the input level falls below the Middle threshold level Mid Release 50 5000 ms This sets the time it takes for the midrange expander effect to stop once the input level exceeds the Middle threshold level Hi Thres 80 0 dB This sets the volume level at which the upper range expander goes into effect Hi Ratio 1 1 00 1 16 0 1 INF This sets the ratio of increase in output of the upper range when the input level falls below the Hi threshold level Hi Attack 0 100 ms This sets the time it takes for the upper range expander to go into effect once the input level falls below the Hi threshold level Hi Release 50 5000 ms This sets the time it takes for the upper range expander effect to stop once the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level Mastering Tool Kit Parameter Functions Compressor This compresses the overall output signal when the input volume level exceeds a set value On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the compressor effect on off Lo Thres 24 0 dB This sets the volume level at which the lower range compressor goes into effect Lo Ratio 1 1 00 1 16 0 1 INF This sets the ratio of suppression of the lower range output when the input level exceeds the Lo threshold level Lo Attack 0 100 ms T
327. s to return to the Play screen Z UOID9G 177 Loading WAV AIFF Files in BR 900CD Tracks WAV AIFF Import You can take WAV or AIFF files on your computer such as files created with audio software applications and load them to the BR 900CD s tracks nove O Wave data in the following formats can be imported You cannot import wave data in other formats e WAV or AIFF format e Mono or Stereo e 8 bit or 16 bit e Sampling Rate 44 1 kHz O Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and the extension AIF to imported AIFF files O Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded Extremely short waveform data less than approximately 1 sec cannot be loaded O The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be ignored O Ifthe unit is in the Arrange mode at the time of the import it takes place in accord with the timing of the Arrange mode On the other hand if the unit is in the Pattern mode at the time of the import it takes place in accord with the timing of the Pattern mode 1 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB cable 2 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press UTILITY 3 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears 4 Select IMPORT with the TIME VALUE dial then press ENTER UTIL UTIL
328. safely disconnect the USB cable from the BR 900CD and the computer 11 Repeat Steps 4 9 as needed 12 When you have finished exporting the WAV or AIFF file s press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen Loading WAV AIFF Files in BR 900CD Tracks WAV AIFF Import You can take WAV or AIFF files on your computer such as files created with audio software applications and load them to the BR 900CD s tracks nove O Wave data in the following formats can be imported You cannot import wave data in other formats e WAV or AIFF format e Mono or Stereo e 8 bit or 16 bit e Sampling Rate 44 1 kHz O Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and the extension AIF to imported AIFF files O Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded O Extremely short waveform data less than approximately 1 sec cannot be loaded O The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be ignored O Ifthe unit is in the Arrange mode at the time of the import it takes place in accord with the timing of the Arrange mode On the other hand if the unit is in the Pattern mode at the time of the import it takes place in accord with the timing of the Pattern mode 1 Connect your computer and the BR 900CD with a USB cable 2 Confirm that the recorder is stopped then press UTILITY 3 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to USB and press ENTER The USB screen appears 4 Sele
329. sence 0 100 This can be selected in the COSM GTR AMP COSM COMP GTR or the VO GT AMP algorithm Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range Ifyou have selected MATCH or VO DRV as the type raising presence will cut the high range the value will change from 0 to 100 Master 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Bright OFF ON with JC 120 CLEAN CRUNCH BLUES BG LEAD AC AMG Turns the bright setting on off OFF Bright is not used ON Bright is switched on to create a lighter and crisper tone Gain LOW MIDDLE HIGH Adjusts the distortion of the amp Distortion will successively increase for settings of LOW MIDDLE and HIGH The sound of each Type is created on the basis that the Gain is set to MIDDLE So normally set it to MIDDLE Ring Modulator This creates a bell like sound by ring modulating the guitar sound with the signal from the internal oscillator The sound will be unmusical and lack distinctive pitches On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the ring modulator effect on off Frequency 0 100 This adjusts the frequency of the internal oscillator Fx Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect sound Dir Level 0 100 Adjust the volume of the direct sound Slow Attack This produces a volume swell effect violin like sound This effect can be used in the COSM GTR AMP algorithm when t
330. so known as bounce recording or ping pong recording By combining multiple tracks in this way you can free up other tracks in order to record additional performances HINT In bounce mode you can play back eight tracks simultaneously and record them all to a single separate V Track When input sources are selected with INPUT SELECT you can have those sounds recorded together Furthermore you can include the sounds from the Rhythm in the recording Rhythm TRACK 1 V1 Track 1 8 TRACK Ev TRACK 7 V2 Separate V Track The explanation below uses an example of mixing the monaural recording on tracks 1 and 2 and the stereo recording on tracks 3 and 4 and bouncing them to V Track 2 of tracks 3 and 4 1 Set the pan for tracks 1 and 2 to the locations you desire set the pan for track 3 all the way to the left L50 and the pan for track 4 all the way to the right R50 is Setting the positioning pan of the sound p 42 2 Play back the song and adjust the volumes for the tracks 1 to 4 using the REC TRACK faders The overall volume is adjusted by the MASTER fader At this time raise the volume as high as possible without allowing the sound to distort Lower the faders for the tracks that you do not want to mix When using bounce recording you can record the sounds with insert effects p 84 loop effects p 108 Track EQ p 110 or Pitch Correction p 114 applied When using the insert effects r
331. songs the allowable recording time may decrease The recording times shown above are for when only one track is used For example if you record on all eight tracks the recording time for each track will be 1 8th of the time shown above The CompactFlash memory cards supported by your BR 900CD are 32 MB to 1 GB CompactFlash cards for use with a 3 3 V power supply voltage Recording Playing Back a Song 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR JI gt to move the cursor to NEW and press ENTER Type appears in the display UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the desired data type The BR 900CD uses a sample rate of 44 1 kHz It is not possible to change the sample rate 4 Press ENTER Are you sure appears UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Press ENTER When the new song is ready you are returned to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 4 Connecting
332. sts the amount of time it takes for the compression ratio set in Ratio to be reached once compression begins as the input level exceeds the set threshold level The larger the value set here the more rapidly compression is applied Release Time with VtgRack 0 100 This adjusts the time from when the signal level drops below the threshold until when the compression is removed The lower the values set the more rapidly the compression is released and the more clearly the sound from the next string played is heard Tone with BOSS Cmp 50 50 Adjusts the tone The higher the value set the more the high frequencies are boosted resulting in a harder sound Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume Insert Effect Parameter Functions De esser Useful for reducing sibilant or S sounds produced by a vocalist On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the de esser effect on off Sibilant 0 100 Adjusts the sensitivity relative to the input volume which controls how the effect is applied Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume Defretter This simulates a fretless bass On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the defretter effect on off Sens 0 100 This controls the input sensitivity of the Defretter It should be adjusted for the bass guitar you have until you get the harmonic changes to sound natural Attack 0 100 This controls the attack of the Defretter Increasing the value will cause the harmonics to change more slowly t
333. t as if it were a 64 track multitrack recorder This allows a wide range of uses such as recording one take of a guitar solo or vocal and then recording another take without having to erase the first one You can also then take just the portions of the V Tracks that you like and put them together onto one track is Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing p 67 1 Press V TRACK Mi The V Track Selection screen appears This screen shows the numbers of the selected V Tracks for each track INPUT EFFECTS IN 123 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR E V Tracks with recorded data O V Tracks without data 2 Use the REC TRACK 1 7 8 to select the track to be altered You can also select tracks with CURSOR DJ 3 Turn the TIME VALUE dial and change the V Track 4 After you finish changing the V Track press V TRACK or EXIT to return to the Play screen Changing the Position of the Input Sound Pan When you record new material while listening to a recorded performance your playing may tend to be buried in the existing performances making it difficult for you to play Tf this is the case you can change the positioning or panning of the INPUT the instrument you are playing and record it so that it is not buried underneath the other sounds 1 Press PAN EQ 2 Press CURSOR 11 gt to m
334. t settings within an AIFF file will be ignored O Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and the extension AIF to imported AIFF files O You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a single drum kit Example Kick 3 seconds snare 3 seconds crash cymbal 7 seconds gt Total 13 seconds O Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as mono sounds with the left and right sides mixed 1 4 Using a PC burn and finalize a CD R RW disc containing the waveform data that you want to import For instructions on how to write waveform data to CD R RW discs refer to your computer and CD R RW drive owner s manuals Place the CD R RW disc in the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press CURSOR J gt to move the cursor to DATA and press ENTER The Data CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to TONE and press ENTER A list of the waveform data files contained on the current CD R RW disc will
335. t to which track you will record The button of the track selected will flash in red and then light in red when recording begins When recording is finished the button of the selected track will light alternately in orange and green 18 Panel Descriptions The relationship between the indicator and the track conditions is given below Off This track contains no recorded data Green An audio track that contains recorded data Flashing in red The track is selected as the recording destination and is in recording standby Red This track currently being recorded Lighting alternately in orange and green This track contains recorded data and is selected for recording IS During creation of Rhythm patterns p 126 a rhythm instrument is assigned to each button TAP TEMPO By tapping this button you can set the tempo for the Rhythm DELETE MUTE By holding down this button and pressing a REC TRACK button whose indicator is lit in green and orange alternating or green you can mute that track during playback regardless of the position of its TRACK fader p 41 When you repeat the same action muting will be defeated While muted the REC TRACK button of that track will flash in green and orange alternating Ifa recording track was muted muting will be defeated when recording ends IS During creation of Rhythm patterns p 126 you can delete rhythm sounds you have input by holding down th
336. ta recorded to the tracks You cannot undo changes made to parameter settings or data other than audio data Keep in mind that the history of all operations you ve carried out with respect to the recorded data will be cleared as soon as you carry out a Song Optimize p 78 This means that once you execute Song Optimize you ll no longer be able to perform an undo Reversing the Last Operation Undo 1 Press UNDO REDO UNDO appears REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 To execute Undo press ENTER YES Press ENTER to reverse the last performed recording or editing operation If you decide not to Undo press EXIT NO Canceling the Undo Redo To reverse the Undo you just executed perform a Redo 1 Press UNDO REDO REDO appears INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 To execute Redo press ENTER YES The Undo you just performed is reversed If you decide not to Redo press EXIT NO 57 Putting Multiple Tracks Together Bounce Although the BR 900CD allows the simultaneous playback of eight tracks when you run out of tracks the BR 900CD also lets you copy the recordings of multiple tracks together onto one track V Track This is called bounce al
337. tch Shifter Doubling Tremolo Pan Delay 89 Insert Effect Parameter Functions 7 COSM BASS AMP This is a multi effect designed for bass guitar This features an amp sound that uses a preamp and speaker simulator COMP PAMP SP EQ WAH J NS FV MOD DLY Compressor Preamp Speaker Simulator 4Band Equalizer Wah 4Band Equalizer Wah Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Modulation Flanger Chorus Phaser Pitch Shifter Doubling Tremolo Pan Delay 8 COSM COMP BSS This is a multi effect designed for bass guitar In addition to a COSM compressor limiter it uses a preamp and speaker simulator for a characteristic amp sound COMP LIM PAMP SP E EQ WAH NS FV DLY COSM Comp Limiter Preamp Speaker Simulator 4Band Equalizer Wah 4Band Equalizer Wah Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Delay BANK MIC 9 VOCAL MULTI This is a multi effect designed for vocals It provides the basic effects needed for vocals COMP DES ENH EQ NS FV MOD DLY Compressor De esser Enhancer 4Band Equalizer Noise Suppressor Foot Volume Modulation Flanger Chorus Phaser Pitch Shifter Doubling Tremolo Pan Delay 10 VOICE TRANS This is a multi effect designed for vocals This allows you to produce a unique effect using a voice transformer VT NS FV MOD DLY Voice Transformer Noise Suppressor Foot Vo
338. tch is returned to its original settings and the changes are lost Saving the Mastering Tool Kit Settings Write This assigns a name patch name to the edited patch settings and saves the settings You cannot write patches while songs are being recorded or played back Tf you do not need to change patch name go to step 4 1 At the Mastering Tool Kit selection screen press CURSOR to move the cursor to NAME and press ENTER The Patch Name Setting screen appears 104 EFFECTS REC MODE MASTERING EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y EFFECTS REC MODE MASTERING EFFECTS IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR Use CURSOR J gt and the TIME VALUE dial to enter the patch name Press ENTER to switch between uppercase and lowercase After you have completed entering the effect settings and patch name as desired press EXIT to return to the Kit Selection screen Press CURSOR q lE gt to move the cursor to WRITE and press ENTER The Write screen appears EFFECTS REC MODE MASTERING EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y EFFECTS
339. tempo is only temporary If you want to change the arrangement s actual tempo refer to Changing the tempo of the arrangements or patterns p 122 Tempos cannot be saved to patterns Tapping to change the tempo of the arrangements or patterns You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or pattern by the timing with which you press TAP Tap on TAP four or more times to change the tempo of the arrangement or pattern The tempo becomes that in which you tapped The arrangement s tempo setting is temporarily disabled O TAP TEMPO The change in tempo is only temporary If you want to change the arrangement s actual tempo refer to Changing the tempo of the arrangements or patterns p 122 Tempos cannot be saved to patterns 38 Recording Playing Back a Song 7 Basic Recording Selecting the recording track 1 Press either 1 7 8 at REC TRACK to select the recording track If the button flashes in red that track is ready for recording e EN EN EN EN ekekeke c The status of each track can be determined from the indicator on the button Off No recorded data exists on the track Green Recorded data exists on the track Red The track is selected for recording If a track with existing data is selected for recording the indicator will light alternately in orange and green If INPUT SELECT GUITAR BASS MIC2 or MIC are lit INPUT SELECT r SIMUL ESOO
340. tesegseiscastsicnazgsedecsts 145 146 164 175 CD R RW Write os hes cise a ecient ee oe aes ene 154 Backup unida ia 145 164 175 CD RW Erase Center Cancel Centre nee dintel A O snvecsenteessetes 222 DEE A A a 95 Defretteriontas Il tt de da 95 CompactElash cirio cipal iia 5 16 27 31 Compatible ias 162 CoOMpresSO ivi cried delata i n a 94 107 Condenser mie di eae aia eens 7 Condenser Microphone saiae aaa Eae 191 COMO inesi i ii 26 33 163 Converting adi 165 176 COP olaaa 125 133 137 Copy Pat A A 81 Copying Argent A a 125 DR EEES a E 137 Copyrichit nira aaa a iaa dp 154 Cord Hook matias 22 Correction Event Map iseina id 116 Correction Event Map screen oomcoconnnnonnnnnincnnncncnnnancnrancarnrannno 116 COSM ii A AS 15 COSM BASS AMP 90 COSM COMP BSS nia 90 COSM COMP GTR vanea eadi eraann Ea a pre naD SSE ada pirana RE iaai 89 COSM COMP VOD diia a da 91 COSM Comp Limiter ancora dar ida 94 COSM GIRAM P nui ii a a 88 Creating ATOM diia 123 Audio CD 140 Dram Kit A A 135 Patri ssi cs cczssscdadedevscadesediviassesaccsessassugeadeachsadgabaiag sense 126 130 CRUNCH renchi iia 98 Cutoff F Deleting Drim SOUS a Oe E EEE o AAE ENTARY LOA ii Digital COPY scr ica E Digital Copy Protect s DIGITAL OUT connector seere aa Eea 22 Dir Level escocosiotoncnnicinopaiocan s nac pabadibin aeaaeai iaiia 97 99 100 Direct CD BOUnCe ita dt 59 Dise tray cassinii e
341. th of the flanging effect Manual 0 100 Adjusts the center frequency at which to apply the effect Resonance 0 100 Determines the amount of resonance feedback Increasing the value will emphasize the effect creating a more unusual sound Separation 0 100 Adjusts the diffusion The diffusion increases as the value increases This will be effective when stereo output is used This effect is obtained with stereo recording using two tracks 8 E Foot Volume Specify the volume between effects By using an expression pedal to control the foot volume you can smoothly change the volume of the output sound For a detailed explanation see When Using an Expression Pedal p 187 On Off OFF ON Switches the foot volume on off Lo Fi Box Produces a lo fi sound On Off This parameter turns the lo fi box effect on off Type Select the mode of the lo fi box RADIO The sound will appear to be heard from an AM radio OFF ON By adjusting Tuning you can simulate the sounds that occur when you adjust the tuning frequency of the radio PLAYER The sound will appear to be heard from a gramophone The noise caused by scratches and dust on the record are is simulated DIGITAL This allows you to create a lo fi sound by lowering the sample rate and or decreasing the number of bits Realtime modify filters connected in series allow you to reshape the sound freely E When RADIO or
342. the input source become audible 3 Carry out Step 5 and the subsequent steps in Bouncing Directly to a CD R RW Disc Direct CD Bounce p 59 The input source sound is mixed with the sounds played back from the tracks and bounced to the CD R RW disc MEMO You can also bounce only the input source sound to the CD by completely lowering track faders 1 6 and 7 8 and the RHYTHM faders Loading Songs Created with the BR 864 BR 532 You can load songs created with the BR 864 or BR 532 into the BR 900CD via memory cards Loading Songs Created with the BR 864 First save the song data created with the BR 864 to a memory card then insert the memory card into the BR 900CD ove Once you record edit or set parameters for imported BR 864 song data that particular song data can no longer be used by the BR 864 To protect against accidental recording or editing song protect p 79 is automatically switched on for imported BR 864 song data If you can accept the fact that you will no longer be able to use the song data with the BR 864 you can switch song protect off then carry out recording or editing 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR TH gt to move the cursor to SEL and press ENTER The Song Select screen is appeared UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL
343. tic guitar If you set the pickup selector of your guitar to the front position the desired effect will be easier to achieve On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the acoustic guitar simulator effect on off PickUp SINGLE HUMBUCK Set this to the type of pickup on the connected guitar Charct This selects one of the four types of sounds STD standard This is a normal acoustic guitar JUMBO This is an acoustic guitar with a body that is bigger than STANDARD The bass sound is powerful ENHANCE This is an acoustic guitar that with a more responsive attack so the guitar will retain more of its prominence in almost any situation PIEZO This simulates the sound you would get from a pickup installed on an electric acoustic guitar During the attack a certain amount of compression will be applied Top Hi 100 100 Adjust the level of the direct sound from the strings That is it adjusts the harmonic contents Top Mid 100 100 This adjusts the interference to the strings made by the top plate That is it adjusts the attack sense Body 100 100 This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body That is it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical Characteristics of acoustic guitars Level 0 100 This adjusts the volume of the acoustic guitar simulator If Top Hi Top Mid and Body are all set to 100 there will be no sound Acoustic Processor With this
344. tination arrangement S01 S05 Song arrangements 1 5 5 Once you have decided on the copy destination press ENTER The screen for confirming the copy destination appears 6 Press ENTER YES to copy To cancel press EXIT NO During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Erasing Arrangements This erases Step 2 and all subsequent steps in the arrangement currently being selected Metro the metronome is set in Step 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is lit Press EDIT The Arrangement Edit screen appears Press CURSOR to move the cursor to ERASE and press ENTER RHYTHM RI RHYTHM RI Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the arrangement to be erased S01 S05 Song arrangements 1 5 If you want to erase the arrangement press ENTER The screen for confirming the deletion appears RHYTHM 6 Press ENTER YES to erase the arrangement 7 To cancel press EXIT NO Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen
345. ting the Reference Pitch of the Tuner 189 Mixing the Output from an External MIDI Device with the Output from Your BR 900CD Audio Sub Mix 190 Using Condenser Microphones Phantom Power ccccccccsssssssees 191 Copying Difficult Songs Phrase Trainer ccccccscccssssccece 192 Slowing Down the Speed Time Stretch 192 Canceling the Center Sound Center Cancel 192 Initializing the BR 900CD s Settings 194 Initializing All the BR 900CD s Settings 194 Initializing the System Settings cococononinoonononnnanno 194 Initializing the Effect Settings 195 Initializing the Rhythm Arrangements Patterns Di Sis aliados 195 Initializing the Memory Card mocccncocononocenoninoncnananos 196 Conserving Battery Power Power Save ccccccccccccccscscccccsoses 197 Deactivating the power save function 197 Utility Parameter List 00000 198 About the System Parameters ccocicicononicininnnoninnones 198 About the Sync Parameters oonococcncoconononenaninnnnnononoos 198 About the Scrub Parameters ocoococcocccnociononcnnnncnnnnos 199 Section 9 Appendices 201 Effect Patch List ccccccccccccccccscee 202 Mastering Tool Kit Patch List 205 Pitch Correction Patch List 205 Arrangement Pattern List 206 Preset Arrangement LiSt ooooononninininnnmmmmmmms 206 Preset Pattern List ccccccss
346. tion FOH Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 03H DEFERRED PLAY MCS F7H EOX End of Exclusive Message Tf the transport switch PLAY was pressed the BR 900CD transmits this message RECORD STROBE Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 06H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 06H RECORD STROBE F7H EOX End of Exclusive Message Transmitted when recording to the audio tracks begins RECORD EXIT Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 07H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 07H RECORD EXIT F7H EOX End of Exclusive Message Transmitted when recording to the audio tracks ends MMC RESET Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 0DH F7H Byte Description FOH Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 0DH MMC RESET F7H EOX End of Exclusive Message When powered on the BR 900CD transmits this message 217 MIDI Implementation LOCATE MCP OFormat 2 LOCATE TARGET Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 44H 06H 01H hrH mnH scH frH ff
347. tion of audio CDs containing only one short song is wasteful since the remaining empty space on such discs can no longer be used For this reason you should aim to carry out finalizing of a CD disc only when it is nearly full of songs If you don t finalize It will not be possible to play your audio CD ona standard CD player until it has been finalized however you can keep adding songs to the disc until this process is carried out Whenever you want to play your audio CD ona standard CD player you should perform finalization 1 Insert the CD R RW disc to be finalized into the BR 900CD s CD R RW drive The drive s access indicator will begin to flash Wait until this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding 2 Press CD R RW The CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 143 Creating Audio CD 3 Press CURSOR q TH gt to move the cursor to AUDIO and press ENTER The Audio CD menu screen will appear REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Press CURSOR gt to move the cursor to FINAL and press ENTER The message Finalize CD OK will appear INPUT 6
348. tion of quarter frame messages will be handled Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 01H 01H hrH mnH scH frH F7H Byte Description FOH Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 7FH 01H sub ID 1 MIDI Time Code 01H sub ID 2 MIDI Full Message hrH Hours and Type 0 yy zzzzz yy type 00 24 Frames sec 01 25 Frames sec 0 30 Frames sec Drop Format 1 30 Frames sec Non Drop Format zzzzz hours 00 23 mnH Minutes 00 59 mnH Seconds 00 59 frH Frames 00 29 F7H EOX End of Exclusive Message When you change the song position the device ID will be transmitted as 7FH About Device ID Exclusive messages are not assigned to any particular MIDI channel Instead they have their own special control parameter called device ID The Roland exclusive messages use device IDs to specify various devices BR 900CD transmits 7FH as the device ID 2 MIDI Machine Control HMIDI Machine Control Command Reference STOP MCS Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 01H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 01H STOP MCS F7H EOX End of Exclusive Message If the transport switch STOP was pressed the BR 900CD transmits this message DEFERRED PLAY MCS Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 03H F7H Byte Descrip
349. to 999 measures 1 Make sure performance of the song is stopped then press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is lit REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 2 Press CURSOR gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the Arrangement number 3 Press EDIT The Arrangement Edit screen appears 4 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to STEP and press ENTER The Recording Standby screen appears You cannot switch from the Recording Standby screen for arrangements to other screens except for the drum kit selection screen Step Pattern Number aa Measure Time Signature R REC MODE CR STEP Tempo Pattern Name Information about the performance is displayed in the matrix display at the bottom of the screen 5 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Step then turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the step to be edited You can press REW to move to the immediately preceding step or press FF to move to the next step 6 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you want to change then turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the setting s value You can press PLAY here to play the sound of t
350. to the audio track will begin When the message Completed appears it indicates that the import procedure has been successfully completed soe an audio disc is inserted into the CD R RW drive the ee 24 message Now Checking may remain on the screen for a eee lo relatively long time This period of time is required for reading of the data stored on the audio CD and it is not the 3 Press CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor to AUDIO and press ENTER The Audio CD menu screen will appear result of a malfunction REC MODE INPUT 6 EFFECTS IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 154 Section 6 Using MIDI MIDI Fundamentals By using MIDI to connect the BR 900CD to other MIDI capable devices you can perform the following O Play rhythm performances on external MIDI sound module O Synchronize with external MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines O Control MMC compatible devices from the BR 900CD This section provides a basic description of MIDI and explains the various ways it can be used What is MIDI MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface MIDI is a global standard devised so that performance data program change data and other similar information could be exchanged among electronic musical instruments and computers If a device is MIDI compatible it will be able to exchange p
351. tracks which provides for simultaneous recording on two tracks or simultaneous playback from eight tracks Moreover each track incorporates eight virtual tracks called V Tracks for a total recording capability of 8 x 8 64 tracks This increased versatility allows you to do things such as record numerous takes of a guitar solo which you can later choose from when putting it all together Also while playing back eight tracks you can use the bounce mode to bounce to a V Track and perform stereo bouncing without needing to erase any data What are V Tracks Each track consists of eight virtual tracks and you can choose any one of these tracks for recording or playback This means that you can record to up to a maximum of 64 tracks and then select any eight of them to play back These virtual tracks that make up the actual tracks are called V Tracks V Track1 V Track2 V Track3 V Track4 V Track5 V Track6 V Track7 V Track8 MEM A Track Sheet is provided at the rear of this manual p 230 which you make copies of and fill in when recording music to V Tracks Equipped with CD R RW Drive The BR 900CD features a CD R RW drive capable of both reading and burning CD R and CD RW discs making it easy to produce audio CDs of the performances you record In addition you can back up performance data stored on memory cards to CD R RW discs for even more efficient and effective use of your memory cards
352. turns the power of the BR 900CD on off 11 DC IN AC Adaptor jack Connect the supplied AC adaptor PSC series to this jack note You must use only the PSC series AC adaptor Use of any other adaptor may cause overheating or malfunctions 12 Cord Hook Wrap the cable around this hook so that the AC adaptor cable is not pulled out accidentally If the AC adaptor is disconnected during operation your important recorded data may be lost 13 Security Slot A http www kensington com 22 Panel Descriptions Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup you may experience a discomforting sensation or perceive that the surface feels gritty to the touch when you touch this device microphones connected to it or the metal portions of other objects such as guitars This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge which is absolutely harmless However if you are concerned about this connect the ground terminal rear panel see figure with an external ground When the unit is grounded a slight hum may occur depending on the particulars of your installation If you are unsure of the connection method contact the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information sheet Unsuitable places for connection e Water pipes may result in shock or electrocution e Gas pipes may result in fire or explosion e Telephone line ground or lightning rod
353. udio devices such as analog tape recorders and for NTSC format black and white video used in Japan and the U S 29N 29 97 frames per second non drop format This is used for NTSC format color video used in Japan and the U S 29D 29 97 frames per second drop format This is used for NTSC format broadcast color video used in Japan and the U S 25 25 frame per second frame rate This is used for SECAM or PAL format video audio equipment and film used in Europe and elsewhere 24 24 frame per second frame rate This is used for video audio devices and film in the US Rhythm MIDI Channel RhyMIDI ch Valid Settings 1 16 OFF Initial value 10 This sets the MIDI channel for the Rhythm performance data output from the MIDI OUT connector No data is output when this is set to OFF Offset Valid Settings 00 00 00 00 0 23 59 59 29 9 Initial value 00 00 00 00 0 Sets the time required to align the song playback and MTC timing when synchronizing an external device using MTC from the BR 900CD The offset is set as the difference between the time to which to align the MTC timing and the time to which to align the song timing For example you want to have the external device play back with the MTC timing shown below when the song timing reaches 01h00m00s00 then set the offset as follows Song Timing MTC for Offset Setting External Device 01h00m00s00 01h30m00s00 00h30m00s00
354. ult of what you just recorded If the recording is not satisfactory press REC and perform the recording again 7 Press STOP to stop recording During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed 8 Press REPEAT to make the button indicator go dark 9 Press AUTO PUNCH ON OFF to make the indicator go dark Canceling an Operation Undo Redo Occasionally when the recording you make may not turn out as you wish or the settings you make for an editing operation are incorrect and you want to reverse what you have done At these times you can use the Undo function The Undo function reverses the action you have just performed and returns you to the status you were in beforehand To reverse an Undo you must use the Redo function For example suppose you are punching in to loop record and record over the same location twice To undo the recording you just performed and return to the first recording you would use the Undo function To then reverse the Undo and return to the condition that you were in immediately after the second recording you would use the Redo function After you have performed an Undo you can only perform a Redo you cannot perform an Undo again Ifyou record something or carry out Track Edit after performing an Undo it will no longer be possible to perform a Redo Undos only affect audio da
355. und actually produced might be perceived as being somewhat low in volume even though the meter shows that it s at the maximum level This also makes it difficult to create powerful sounds With the Mastering Tool Kit however you can smooth out the differences in volume that occur over the course of a song while also correcting the balance in the low end We recommend mastering with the Mastering Tool Kit in the final stage of creating songs The Mastering Tool Kit features 19 pre programmed Preset Patches PO1 P19 19 rewritable User Patches U01 U19 and 19 Song Patches which are stored individually for each song S01 S19 BR 900CD Memory Card Song Preset Patch Song Patch Mastering Tool Kit Patch List p 205 In Mastering mode the following buttons are disabled after you set the recording source and destination and return to the Play screen In addition you cannot change the point to which the insert effects are connected p 87 INPUT SELECT TUNER PAN EQ LOOP EFFECTS PITCH CORRECTION PHRASE TRAINER ARRANGE PATTERN OFF EDIT RHYTHM PAD V TRACK DELETE MUTE 102 source V Track and then press ENTER The Mastering screen appears in the display Recoding source MASTERING EFFECTS IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR E V Tracks with recorded d
356. until the indicator is lit 2 Press EDIT as Press CURSOR repeatedly to move the cursor to NAME and press ENTER The Change Arrangement Name screen appears RHYTHM You cannot change Preset arrangement names 124 Creating Original Arrangements 7 Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen 4 Press CURSOR 1 gt and turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the characters Press ENTER to switch between uppercase and lowercase 5 Press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Copying Arrangements You can take the currently selected arrangement and copy it to another Song arrangement 1 Press ARRANGE PATTERN OFF repeatedly until the indicator is lit 2 Press EDIT The Arrangement Edit screen appears 3 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to COPY and press ENTER The screen for selecting the copy destination is displayed RHYTHM RI 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the copy des
357. uring automatic updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed MEMO To copy move or erase repeated portions you first need to set the portion to be repeated using the procedure described on p 51 Copying Data Track Copy Track Copy allows you to copy a specific part of data and then place it in a different location You can perform editing operations such as copying the data on a track all at once or copying the data from a specified part as many times as you wish Tf for example you want to use a phrase from a certain track or have the same phrase repeated again and again the copy function will help save you time Tf data exists at the position being copied to that data will be overwritten The portion being copied must be longer than 1 0 seconds long If the copied portion is 1 0 seconds or less no sound will be heard even if the copy is carried out The three types of Track Copy are given below Copying the repeated portion AB Perform the procedure given below to copy the portion from the repeat start A to the repeat end B Ex 1 Copying twice to the same track C Repeat Repeat TO Time Start A End B Ex 2 Copying twice to another track Repeat Repeat TO Time Start A End B 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR JI gt to move the cursor to TRK and press ENTER
358. urn off the power while the indicator is lit This may corrupt the data on the memory card possibly rendering the card unusable 20 12 MIC Internal microphone This microphone can be used for recording with the BR 900CD is Press the INPUT SELECT button of the instrument that you want to record p 34 Turning on the internal microphone p 34 Headphones jack Q Headphones sold separately are connected here When headphones are connected the same output as that from LINE OUT can be heard from the headphones The headphone volume is adjusted with the MASTER fader 13 MEMORY CARD slot Eject butto F T o l This slot is where memory cards CompactFlash are inserted when you want to save data You cannot record unless you have a memory card inserted here Eject button Press this button to eject the memory card Panel Descriptions CD R RW drive Nove 08 0 AL Before you use the CD R RW drive it is important that you first of all read Before Using CD R RW Discs p 6 1 Disc tray Place the CD R RW discs on this tray 2 Access indicator This indicator will light up whenever data is being read from or written to a CD R RW disc 3 EJECT button Press this button to eject a CD R RW disc from t
359. urs Adjust the input sensitivity with the SENS knob INPUT LEVEL knob so that this indicator lights only occasionally at those moments Use this knob to adjust the volume of the input source for when you play your guitar or other instrument at its loudest recording INPUT SELECT buttons Ifyou use the INPUT LEVEL knob to turn down the volume Use these buttons to select the input source input jack that of the input source during recording the sound will be you wish to record The indicator of the selected button will recorded in the audio track at a low volume so that noise will light You can mute silence the input sound by pressing a be more apparent when you raise the volume of the audio track button that is lit for playback If you want to lower the sound of the input source GUITAR BASS MIC2 pd ds a lower de eis neil dea For selecting either guitar or bass use of the GUITAR BASS f wA ie ia ae o aji Wa f PAYE DAGIS jacke ot the MIC 2 jack use the fader for the respective tracks TUNER MIC pu For selecting either the MIC1 jack or the internal Use this button to turn on and off the tuner p 188 microphone This allows you to tune your instrument connected to the You can turn on and off the internal microphone p 34 GUITAR BASS jack 17 Panel Descriptions 2 EFFECTS Use this button to turn on and off the insert effects p 35 p 84 or call up the screen for editing the various settings T
360. with which each rhythm instrument sounds in the matrix display The V mark in the lower part of the matrix indicates beat timing When a coarse Quantize setting is used the W mark may indicate half note or quarter note timing Ex CLOSED HH el im El i SNARE KICK r Ll Q Quantize v v v v CH m a II a a SD C C Ki mm Q Quantize yy y yv Yy v yY erm T a a a a a SD m m KI m O EX coseno HH dije LL LL L44 SNARE J J KICK r Q Quantize v v M v v v CH M O O O O O O O O SD C C Ki C When using high resolution Quantize settings you may be unable to view the entire pattern from start to finish in the display at one time In such instances a symbol appears indicating that there is material not currently displayed UN y M RI In this case you can press REW IFF to move the location cursor in large steps 131 Creating Original Patterns Naming Patterns HINT You can press REC MODE during Step Recording to switch to Realtime Recording 9 Set the tempo and Quantize values as needed 10 Repeat Steps 6 9 as needed Press PLAY to listen to the recording patter
361. y card into the memory card slot The supplied memory card still has some remaining space however for extended recording you will need to erase some of the demo song or prepare a new memory card 64 MB or greater is recommended The demo songs are protected To delete the demo songs first remove the protections then carry out the deletion Ss Protecting a Song Song Protect p 79 Erasing Songs Song Erase p 77 2 Turning On the Power Use the procedure described in Turning On the Power p 28 Formatting the memory card Initialize This is not necessary for memory cards that have already been used with the BR 900CD Newly purchased memory cards or memory cards that have been used previously with a computer will need to be prepared so they can be used with the BR 900CD Carry out the following steps in the order given to complete the procedure this preparation process is called Tnitializing 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR lt ll gt to move the cursor to INI and press ENTER UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR q lE gt to move the cursor to CARD and press ENTER
362. y concerning such loss of data Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory on a memory card computer Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in the unit s memory or a memory card once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Use only the specified expressio
363. y has data written to it Place a CD R RW disc with no data written to it a blank disc in the CD R RW drive If using a CD RW disc you can erase the data on the disc in order to create a blank disc p 153 Solution Not CD RW Disc Cause The disc is not a CD R RW disc so the data cannot be erased Solution Use a CD RW disc Not Finalized Disc Cause The disc cannot be played back properly because it has not been finalized Solution Finalize the disc p 143 Power Down Cause Internal power source voltage is below than guaranteed workable range Solution In case of using PSC adaptor Cable might be broken or adaptor itself might be malfunctioning Please contact Roland Service or Roland authorized dealers In case of using batteries Please replace with new batteries p 23 Protected Cause You are attempting to write data to a song that has protection switched on Solution To write data to the song switch Protect to OFF p 79 Set Bounce Target to Track Cause You cannot use the Rhythm related functions switching Arrangement Pattern Off editing switching Rhythm pads Tone Load when a CD is specified as the bounce destination Solution When using Rhythms specify a track as the bounce destination Set the Repeat Cause Repeat A Starting Point and B Ending Point is not set Solution Set the Repeat A and B p 51 Stop P Trainer Cause The operation you attem
364. y is most fully exhibited in making tone adjustments during mixdown Introduction to the BR 900CD The Pitch Correction feature allows you to freely adjust the pitch of vocals assuring that you can obtain reliable high quality performances The Mastering Tool Kit allows you add compression to songs that have been mixed down and provides a variety of other effects is Using the Insert Effects p 84 Using the Loop Effects Track EQ p 108 Fixing the Pitch of Vocals Pitch Correction p 113 Mastering p 102 What is COSM Composite Object Sound Modeling Technology that virtually reconstructs an actually existing structure or material using a different means is called modeling technology COSM is proprietary Roland technology that creates new sounds by combining various sound modeling technologies Editing functions With the BR 900CD you can perform editing operations such as copying moving and erasing which cannot be done with multitrack recorders that use tapes This means operations such as copying and repeating a multiple bar phrase moving a multiple bar phrase to another track and erasing the data of a track whole or in part can be performed with ease Non destructive editing Being a digital recorder the BR 900CD offers non destructive editing With non destructive editing after performing any editing and recording operations you can still return your data to its
365. yed 10 If you intend to write additional songs to the same CD R disc press EXIT NO Alternatively press ENTER YES if no more songs will be added to this disc If you press ENTER YES the message Now Finalizing will appear and the finalization process will begin When the message Completed appears it indicates that the finalization has been completed For more detailed information regarding finalization refer to What is finalization 11 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen 12 Press the CD R RW drive s EJECT button to eject the disc This completes the writing process It may take a period of several seconds before the disc is actually ejected ote e The range of available write speeds can sometimes be limited by the type of media being used In such a case the BR 900CD will allow you to select only the supported speeds e Ifyou are using CD R or CD RW discs intended for high speed writing the frequency of write errors may increase if the x2 or x4 speed is selected It is recommended that you use the x8 speed for high speed discs e Note that selecting higher factor write speeds does not necessarily mean the speed will be that multiple exactly This is due to the processing time required for conversion of the audio data on the audio tracks to CD format as the data is written to the disc e Audio CDs can be created with up to a maximum of 99 tracks on the disc
366. yed The volume level of the instrument connected to GUITAR BASS jack or LINE IN jacks is too low O Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor A specific track cannot be heard O Has the track volume been lowered O Is the V Track setting for a different V Track O Has the track been muted The input source cannot be heard O Did you adjust the SENS knob O Has INPUT SELECT been muted The INPUT SELECT indicator will be dark Has the INPUT LEVEL knob been set to MIN If you are using the internal microphone is Mic under UTILITY set to ONBRD EXT O O Cannot record O Isa song protected O Is a memory card inserted O Does the memory card have insufficient remaining capacity O Has the recording mode REC MODE been selected correctly O Has the Phrase Trainer or Scrub Playback function been turned on The recorded sound contains noise or distortion O Is the input sensitivity set appropriately If the input sensitivity is too high the recorded sound will be distorted If it is too low the input sound will be buried in noise Adjust the SENS knob so that the level meter moves as much as possible without causing the PEAK indicator to light Set it so the 0 is not indicated in the level meter O Are the track output levels appropriate If you hear noise or distortion after bouncing tracks the output level of t
367. you can confirm the operation 11 Press ENTER The copy is executed 12 Press UTILITY or press EXIT repeatedly to return to the Play screen During updating Keep power on appears in the upper line of the display while the lower line shows what is being processed Copying by specifying the time TME MES Perform the procedure given below to copy the portion between specific times Ex 1 Copying twice to the same track START END TO Time Ex 2 Copying twice to another track START END TO Time e Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR TL gt to move the cursor to TRK and press ENTER UTIL IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR y UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM L R 3 Press CURSORIN II gt to move the cursor to CPY and press ENTER UTIL IN 123456 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select TME MES and press ENTER Editing the Performance on a Track Track Editing UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 5 Use CURSOR gt and the TIME VALUE dial to select the track V Track to copy from and track V Track to
368. your own Rhythm part performances The Rhythm features two modes Pattern mode and Arrangement mode Pattern Mode You can perform patterns and create your own original patterns Arrangement Mode You can perform arrangements and create your own original arrangements About the Patterns These are phrases consisting of from one to several measures of drum performance Types of patterns Preset patterns P001 P327 These are internal patterns stored in the BR 900CD that have already been prepared for use There are 327 patterns categorized by musical genre such as rock and jazz You cannot change and overwrite Preset pattern data Preset patterns include prepared patterns for intros verses fill ins and endings you can confirm the type by looking at the characters at the end of the pattern name Example ROCK1 IN Intro ROCK1 V1 Verse 1 ROCK1 F1 Fill 1 ks Preset Pattern List p 207 ROCK1 V2 Verse2 ROCK1 F2 Fill 2 ROCK1 E Ending IN Intro Music patterns to be placed at the beginning of a song V Verse 1 and 2 Music patterns to make up the main part of the song 1 are basic patterns and 2 are more advanced versions of 1 F Fill 1 and 2 Music patterns to be used as phrases to connect different sections of a song You can select either 1 or 2 depending on the form that will follow the fill E Ending Music patterns
369. zation press ENTER YES To cancel press EXIT NO or UTILITY When ENTER is pressed initialization begins After the initialization has been completed you are returned to the Play screen Initializing the Rhythm Arrangements Patterns Drum Kits This initializes the Rhythm Arrangements Patterns and Drum Kits e In Song Arrangement Step 1 is set to the metronome e In song patterns and song drum kits the step is empty 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR Il gt to move the cursor to INI and press ENTER UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR UTIL IN 12345 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 3 Press CURSOR 4 11 gt to move the cursor to RHY and press ENTER The confirmation message Are you sure appears in the display UTIL IN 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM LR 4 To continue the initialization press ENTER YES To cancel press EXIT NO or UTILITY When ENTER is pressed initialization begins After the initialization has been completed you are returned to the Play screen g uoIp s 195 Initializing the BR 900CD s Settings Initializing the Memory Card nog Be aware that when initialized any existing data on the card

Boss Audio Systems BR-900CD User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents